mmm Siwl:. m ■Mill li wm itaiiii mmmaxmmm immsimam lillisiiiiiaill pip sim ippi itelK lllilli iSBSiSll Kill' ii:. ii •- •• •:-. cl., :«Vi 1. • mmm pllp mmm- ilfcwiiii iPiisiiisi* iiiMliiiii lip! WliS m ■ilBBIilii ill iSliil wmzmimmm ■■■■ will IK iti K! I I- W«S* 1 ■ p . Ilfcll ■liigliia KKllillililSil .■ »»»» Kll 1! Ii- lip Sill • v ••• / . ‘ psii ................Iflllii l?5 I i i ‘ v i: i, . , . ■. i -a i ill mi ■ ii ■ I I r ' ' : ’■■ ■. I •■•' ‘ -' m. ■* •; ■ ■ ■ - p • .; 11:'' • *. i • Ml f. i r P " ’ i? i m, i. ' 1 .11 i mm V Kll :!•-! i f Ii ii St M mm I f S II I i 111 :»il ii«i« mm BSsSSSs inn i-'iilii- §:*■ i } I I §1 l IIP* t: i V illllil liBlliilll mmm gifi ilfll %1!15 bb Hi III s ;1#1 MiliC ». i ‘ B a jpp •?*’ BP......;ii ,> <§-m i PMPpiW’-M as msmmmm W-MiM mmM-rn ■ ' ■ mmsmm wm>wi a,a 1 H liplEflsii I ■MB * B E,-/'iVt%I' >'i If « n mBk&ifefih BS® feiajyi psiaifa '< :*a, S' iiilia«I laeBasr bb ® IlSIiiSfey ,. , • -' Jf A,'\ ,.r, - - C',S V*’* ' • r ■• • B4r ;B -:*‘■''■■> s;-wti;sy« !mmmm B: m.; “v' * - a . S«A*S=‘ %W} «f a#- BB asss m 4 sn p Uli ■ipsii mi BASffi'ABA illS * BIS*® KSAgelaliiSi! Bipisilii 7v,B ""■"''■■ B 'a/:'>,' ■?IlSilftaS I,v; 1 ffii Hwm a & aMis iiiilpii!| ii*« liiSIl Ills®(o o 2 G T^Sp A.D. 1854 ............N° 2201. Bottles, Jars, &c. LETTERS PATENT to Robert Pinkney, of 26, Long Acre, in the County of Middlesex, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Bottles, Jars, and OTHER LIKE VESSELS, AND IN THE METHOD OP STOPPERING THEM.” Sealed the 13th April 1855, and dated the 14th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Robert Pinkney at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 14th October 1854. I, Robert Pinkney, of 26, Long Acre, in the County of Middlesex, do 5 hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “Improvements in Bottles, Jars, and other like Vessels, and in the Method of Stoppering them,” to be as follows, viz.:— It consists in a mode of securely closing the mouths or openings of bottles, jars, pots, & other vessels of like nature, by the peculiar formation of a 10 portion of such bottle itself, and taken conjointly with it in a new form of cover or stopper, fitted to act upon & with the mouth of the bottle or other vessel to be closed; the method by which I perform the same being as follows :— In the making of the bottle or vessel, I form on its neck, & conveniently near to its mouth, small projecting blocks or studs, & in the cover or stopper 15 thereof, which I fashion after the manner of an inverted cylindrical cup, are grooves or passages; when such cover is placed on the bottle or vessel covering2 AD. 1854.—N° 2201. Provisional Specification. Pinkney’s Improvements Pottles, Jars, dfc. its mouth, it applies itself by its grooves or passages to the aforesaid projecting blocks or studs ou the neck of the bottle, &c., so as to become firmly affixed thereto, carrying with it, fixed on the inner side of its upper & closed end, a flat disc or stopper, made of an elastic material; & this, when the cover is fixed upon the neck of the bottle in the manner afoi’esd, is firmly pressed on & over its mouth, and is securely held in its position by the mutual action of the bottle & the cover, as described; I also make a modification of the above- described method to the same end, but in an inverse conformation of the same; thus, I form hollow or indented grooves or passages on the outside of the neck of the bottle, & projecting studs or blocks on the inner face of the cylindrical cap or cover, & corresponding with & fitting into such indented passage on the neck of the bottle; the principle of the construction and action being the same in both cases. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Robert Pinkney in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 14th April 1855. TO Ah b ; ' J.I THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Robert P-inksev, >)f A u. 2 6, Long Acre, in the County of Middlesex, send greeting. .WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Fourteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Robert Pinkney, Her special licence that I, the said Robert Pinkney, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Robert Pinkney, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times there- after during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention of “ Improve- ments in Botti.es, Jars, Aim other like Vessels, and ix the Method of Stop- pering them,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Robert Pinkney, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should par- ticularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854—N° 2201. 3 Pinkney's Improvements in Bottles, Jars, $c. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Robert Pinkney, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement (that is to say):— 5 The nature and intention of this Invention is a mode of closing the mouths of bottles, jars, pots, and vessels of similar character in a more secure and expeditious manner than has hitherto been effected. I carry this intention into effect by a new arrangement of stem and socket combination, known to gunsmiths and other mechanics as the “ bayonet joint ” fastening, but in a 10 modification of its formation, principle of action, and mode of application as regards the secure closing of bottles and such vessels; and this I do by a new manner of applying or fitting the socket on the stem, and of securing them together when so applied. Fig. 1 is an elevation of a stopper and neck of a bottle; Fig. 2 is a section 15 of the same; Fig. 3 is an elevation of a stopper and neck of a bottle; Fig. 4 is a section of the stopper and elevation of the neck; Fig. 5 is a section of the stopper and elevation of the neck ; Fig. 6 is a section of stopper and neck; Fig. 7 is an elevation of the stopper and bottle of Figs. 3 and 4. Fig. 1 may be considered as a modification of the ordinary bayonet fastening. 20 A represents the upper portion of a bottle of ordinary construction, tapering to the neck B, in which is the mouth D of the bottle; C is a small circular projection on the upper part of the neck; E is a cap or cover, of metal or other suitable material, fitting on the outside of the neck above the rim F, without friction, and leaving a disc G-, of gutta percha, cork, india-rubber, or 25 other elastic material in the top part of the cap or cover, which presses on the mouth D, and makes the bottle air or liquid tight. The metal cap E has on the lower edge of its open end a vertical cut or passage H, extending about the half of its height, and branching off at an angle of about ten degrees with the cut H, as shewn; another cut or passage is made on the opposite 30 side of the cap E, but having the branch passage in the opposite direction, as shewn in Fig. 2. When the bottle is to be stopped, the cap E is put on the neck, presenting the mouth of the passage II directly over the circular projection C, so that it shall enter the passage; and when the cap has descended as far as the passage 35 will allow, it is turned round and goes downwards, as the projection C is allowed to slide or travel along the branch passage, until the lower edge of the cap is on the upper face of the ring F, and is there held by the projection C, fit ting in the cavity 1 of the branch passage. The disc G, of india-rubber or4 A.D. 1854.---------N° 2201. Specification. Pinkney's Improvements in Bottles, Jars, $c. other suitable elastic waterproof material, will then be pressed on the mouth D, making the bottle perfectly air or liquid tight. Fig. 3 and 4 represent a modification of the principle of construction and action of Figs. 1 and 2. A, B, D, and G, may be respectively taken as meaning and referring to the same parts in the Figs. 1 and 2. The cap J is 5 made of the same form as the cap in Figs. 1 and 2, with the exception that the cap J has two projections N, indented from the outside, and without having any vertical cut or passage, as in cap E, Fig. 1. M is a projecting external ring, formed around the circumference of the bottle neck, and has an opening or passage 0 ; one such passage being on each side of the circum- 10 ference, and diametrically opposite to each other. L is the inclined under edges in surfaces of the projecting ring M. The mode of operation for closing the mouth of the bottle is, by pressing the cap on the neck until the two indented projections N have passed into and entirely through the passage 0, and by turning the cap round, it causes a downward progressive motion of the 15 cap along the inclined under surface L of the ring M, and draws the disc G, of india-rubber or other suitable waterproof material, gradually tight upon the top of the bottle D, and until the lower edges of the cap are brought to rest on the projecting ring T, and is there held by the indented projections N, fitting in the cavities S. To prevent the cap from turning too far, there 20 j . ’ '•top R, as shown. The projection N may be soldered on the inside ox ip, so as to leave the exterior perfectly plain for ornamental chasing, etc. Figs. 5 and 6 represent another variety of arrangement of the working parts, and the action of the cap, reciprocally with the projecting block C of 25 Fig. 1, for the same end. In these Figures the corresponding parts are respec- tively marked with the same letters of reference as in the preceding Figs., as far as such parts can be seen. The cap W in these Figures is made perfectly plain on the exterior for ornamental chasing, &c., and on the inside periphery are soldered two pieces of metal U, as well as a vertical stop V, as shewn. 80 The projection C is made to extend to the top of the bottle. To close the mouth of the bottle, the cap W is put on the bottle, so to allow projection C to fit in the passage X; and when the cap is pressed down as far as it will go, it is turned round, and by the projection C sliding or travelling along the inclined piece of metal soldered on the inside, the disc G, of india-rubber or 85 any other suitable elastic waterproof material, is brought in contact with the mouth D of the bottle, as well as the lower edge of the cap, being made tight Against the upper edge of the ring F, and is there held by the projection G,Specification. A.D. 1854.—N" 2201. 5 Pinkney s Improvements in Bottles, Jars, §c. fitting in the projection Y, on the inclined piece of metal U. To prevent the cap from turning too far, there is a stop Y, for the same purpose as the stop R, in Figs. 3 and 4. Having thus described the nature of this Invention, and the manner in 5 which the same is or may be carried into effect, I wish it to be understood that what I claim is,— The method of closing bottles, pots, jars, and other like vessels by the socket and stem or bayonet action of a cap, or modifications thereof, as described; firstly, by the cap having two cuts or passages, with an incline, 10 stop, and cavity, in combination with the projections in the neck of the bottle, &c., and formed by the mould, as shewn in Figs. 1, 2, 5, and 6 ; secondly, the cap having indentations or projections in combination with a projecting rim and passages on the neck of the bottle, &c., formed by the mould, as shewn in Figs. 3, 4, and 7. In witness whereof, I, the said Robert Pinkney, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Fourteenth day of April, in the year of our Lord 1855. ROBERT PINKNEY, (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.FIC. I. nc. 2. {lSBEE I.) A.D.1854. Oct 14. JT? 2201. PINKNEY'S Specification. fig. 5. / FIG. 6. Kled/ drawing FIG. H. . E ,)) r r • f FIG. 3. J jst London: BautedbyGeorge Edward Eyri: mkIVVii-uam Sfottiswoode , ftintEacs to tie Q«een^ most Excellent M^estjr. 1855 . FIG. 7. Drawn on Stone LyMalby Sc Sons. ‘LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF IfeUNOISA.D. 1854 N° 2202. Bedsteads, Packing Cases for the same, &e. LETTERS PATENT to Louisa Monzani, of Greyhound Place, Old Kent Road, in the County of Surrey, Widow and Administratrix of Willoughby Theobald Monzani, late of Saint James’s Terrace, Bermondsey, in the said County of Surrey, Gentleman, deceased, for the Invention of “ Im- provements in Bedsteads, and Packing Cases or Boxes to contain the same and other Articies.”—A communication. Sealed the 4th May 1855, and dated the 14th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Louisa Monzani at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with her Petition, on the 14th October 1854. I, Louisa Monzani, of Greyhound Place, Old Kent Road, in the County of 5 Surrey, Widow and Administratrix of Willoughby Theobald Monzani, late of St. James’ Terrace, Bermondsey, in the said County of Surrey, Gentleman, deceased, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention for “ Improvements in Bedsteads, and Packing Cases or Boxes to contain the same and other Articles,” to be as follows:— 10 The chief object of this Invention is so to arrange parts that a bedstead shall be partly constructed of the box or case which, when the bedstead is packed and out of use, contains it. For this purpose, a box or packing case2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2202. Provisional Specification. Monzani sImprovements in Bedsteads and Packing Cases for the same, <$fc. is constructed in two parts; one part is fitted up as a portmanteau or box, for carrying garments and other articles; the other part of the box or case is arranged for receiving the parts constituting the bedstead, which is formed in the following manner:—The two parts of the box or case are connected at the ends of a strong fabric or sacking, suitable when stretched out to receive the bedding, and the two parts of the box or case are also connected by means of straps or cords, which, when the bedstead is stretched out and formed, come near the ground. And in order to keep the two parts of the box or case separated, and the sacking or fabric distended for use as a bedstead, stretching bars are used on either side, which enter grooves or sockets formed at either end of the parts of the box or case, and by means of keys or wedges these parts are more completely separated and held secure. It is not essential that the two parts constituting the head and foot of the bedstead should be parts of a box or case, as only one or neither may be so. There is provision made for a head to the bedstead for preventing the pillow falling out. When the whole is packed for carriage, the parts assume the exterior character of a simple box or case. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, and of an Order of the Lord Chancellor, filed by the said Louisa Monzani in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 5th May 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Louisa Monzani, of Greyhound Place, Old Kent Road, in the County of Surrey, Widow and Administratrix of Willoughby Theobald Monzani, late of Saint James’ Terrace, Bermondsey, in the said County of Surrey, Gentleman, deceased, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Fourteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Louisa Monzani, Her special licence that I, the said Louisa Monzani, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Louisa Monzani, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Bedsteads, and 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2202. 3 Monzani's Improvements in Bedsteads and Packing Cases for the same, <$fc. Packing Cases oe Boxes to contain the same and othee Aeticles,” being a communication from my late husband, Willoughby Theobald Monzani, upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Louisa Monzani, by an instru- ment in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and 5 ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Louisa Monzani, do hereby declare the 10 nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say):— The chief object of this Invention is so to arrange parts that a bedstead shall be partly constructed of the box or case which, when the bedstead is 15 packed and out of use, contains it. For this purpose, a box or packing case is constructed in two parts; one part is fitted up as a portmanteau or box, for carrying garments and other articles; the other part of the box or case is arranged for receiving the parts constituting the bedstead, which is formed in the following manner:—The two parts of the box or case are connected at the 20 ends of a strong fabric or sacking, suitable when stretched out to receive the bedding, and the two parts of the box or case are also connected by means of straps or cords, which, when the bedstead is stretched out and formed, come near the ground. And in order to keep the two parts of the box or case separated, and the sacking or fabric distended for use as a bedstead, stretching 25 bars are used on either side, which enter grooves or sockets formed at either end of the parts of the box or case, and by means of keys or wedges these parts are more completely separated and held secure. It is not essential that the two parts constituting the head and foot of the bedstead should be parts of a box or case, as only one or neither may be so. There is provision made for a 30 head to the bedstead for preventing the pillow falling out. When the whole is packed for carriage, the parts assume the exterior character of a simple box or case. Having thus stated the nature of the said Invention, I will proceed to describe the manner of performing the same. 35 The box or case is to be made in two parts, each part having connected therewith, and by preference permanently fixed thereto, some of the parts which go to form a bedstead. The two parts of which the box or case consists, it is preferred, should be made alike in exterior form, but this is not essential; and it is preferred that the opening into them should be on one side, and that4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2202. Specification. Monzani's Improvements in Bedsteads and Packing Cases for the same, $c. that side should be the one uppermost when made up into a bedstead; and for facility of carriage, it is desirable that the two parts of the box or case may go together and when out of use as a bedstead, and be made as one package, or when to be carried by a mule or other animal, that they should be capable of being so complete when severed as to present two separate yet complete packages. The sacking or webbing, or other form of flexible surface which is to form the upper surface of the bedstead, it is preferred, should be fixed permanently to one of the two parts of the box or case, and to fold into it, and be only connected to the other part of the box or case when made up into a bedstead, and this may be done by straps and buckles, or by other convenient attachments, which will facilitate the keeping of the sacking or other flexible upper surface of the bedstead in a state of tension. The arrangement of side stretchers which is preferred for keeping the two parts of the box or case separate, and the sacking or upper surface stretched between them, are such as are shewn by the Drawing, though others may be used. These stretchers or bars are made into rectangular frames, which enter sockets or grooves made to receive them at the ends of the boxes or cases, and they are keyed or wedged so as to keep the parts separated and secure, and these frames or stretchers pack within the box or case ; or the stretchers may be hinged at the ends to the boxes or cases, and fold and pack within the recesses formed to receive them. And in order to keep the side stretchers separate and parallel, a central cross stretcher is used, which at each of its ends has fixed buttons, which enter slotted holes in the side stretcher bars, and retain all parts correct. The interior of the boxes or cases may be fitted up in any convenient manner for receiving garments, bedding, and other articles. When the side stretcher bars are separate from the two parts of the box or case, and are connected by entering sockets, it is desirable to have a strap or straps at the bottom to draw the two parts of the box or case towards each other, and thus to resist the tension of the sacking or flexible top to the bedstead; but when the side stretchers are hinged to the parts of the box or case, these may be dispensed with. The Drawing annexed shows at Figure 1 a perspective view of a bedstead; and at Figure 2 one of the parts is shewn separately, a, b, are the two parts of a box or case; the sides which face each other when made into a bedstead are recessed, to admit of the side stretchers c, c, being placed or folded therein, and so as to admit of those two sides being brought together, and by straps or other fastenings held as one package; or when to be carried on either side of a mule or other animal, each part a or bis to form a separate package, by the stretchers c being retained in the recess formed to receive them. The parts 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2202. 5 Monzani's Improvements in Bedsteads and Packing Cases for the same, not/ coloreds Drawn. ctp. Stcoie lyMalby be, boi is. London : Printed bv Gbojwe LdwmwI-vue and Wiiaiam Spottistoodi: . Printers to the Queens most Jixeellmt Ma jesty . IoLIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF v ILLINOISUNIVERSITY UBR*R^ OF THE. ° OF lUJHOlSA.D. 1854 N° 2208. Lubricating Apparatus. LETTERS PATENT to John Bonnall, of Spittlegate, Grantham, in the County of Lincoln, Engineer, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Apparatus for Holding Oil foe Lubeicating Purposes.” Sealed the 13th April 1855, and dated the 16th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said John Bonnall at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 16th October 1854. I, John Bonnall, of Spittlegate, Grantham, in the County of Lincoln, o Engineer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improve- ments in Apparatus for Holding Oil for Lubricating Purposes to be as follows My improvements consist in forming oil vessels for lubricating purposes wholly or in part of flexible or elastic material, with an elastic tendency to 10 keep to the form or figure desired, but capable of compression to force the oil therefrom; and I prefer to form such vessel of vulcanized india-rubber, with a tendency to keep to the form obtained, which may be spherical or otherwise; and I apply thereto a suitable spout or nipple, to serve as the inlet and outlet passage. I also apply a weight at one part of such vessel, especially when of 15a spherical form, in order that the spout or nipple may be kept upright, or in such other position desired. Other flexible material may, however, be employed2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2208. Provisional Specification. Bonnall's Impts. in Apparatus /or Holding Lubricating Purposes. to form the vessel, and the elastic tendency to maintain an extended form may be obtained by helical or other springs applied to it. Supply may be obtained through the spout or nipple by collapsing the vessel, thus forcing out the contained air, when, upon applying the apertuie of the spout or nipple to oil, and allowing the vessel to expand, the oil will flow therein. In like manner supply from such vessel is obtained by compressing to the extent desired. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said John Bonnall in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 16th April 1855. ^ TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS.. SHALL COME, I, John Bonnall, of Spittlegate, Grantham, in the County of Lincoln, Engineer, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Sixteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord 15 One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said John Bonnall, Her special licence that I, the said John Bonnall, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said John Bonnall, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree ^0 with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Appa- ratus eor Holding Oil for Lubricating Purposes,” upon the condition (amongst ®5 others) that I, the said John Bonnall, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. ^ NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said John Bonnall, do jhereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say):— My improvements consist in forming oil vessels for lubricating purposes ^ wholly or in part of flexible or elastic material, with an elastic tendency toSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N* 2208. 3 Bonnall's Impts. in Apparatus for Holding Oil for Lubricating Purposes. keep to the form or figure desired, but capable of compression to force the oil therefrom ; and I prefer to form such vessel of vulcanized india-rubber, with a tendency to keep to the form obtained, which may be spherical or otherwise; and I apply thereto a suitable spout or nipple to serve as the inlet and outlet 5 passage. I also apply a weight at one part of such vessel, especially when of a spherical form, in order that the spout or nipple may be kept upright, or in such other position desired. But that the nature of the said Invention, and the means for carrying the same into effect, may be fully understood, I will proceed to describe the 10 Drawing annexed. * Description of the Drawing. Figure 1 shows one arrangement of vessel such as I prefer to use. a is the oil chamber, formed of vulcanized or prepared india-rubber ; b is the spout, which is retained to the vessel a by being passed through the plate c and 15 screwed into the nut d. In putting the parts together, the nut d is first passed through the hole for the inner end of the nipple, and when the vessel is of india-rubber, this hole will open sufficiently for that purpose, and then close again by its elasticity. Figure 2 shows a slight modification of the above. In this case 20 there is a portion cut away at e, to admit the lead or other weight f for the purpose of keeping the vessel with the spout upright, as shown. This weight / is held in position by the screw g, passed through the plate h and into the weight /, as shown, by which the parts will be held closely together to prevent escape of oil. 25 Figure 3 shows a section of a slight modification of the preceeding, but to prevent repetition, the parts are marked with similar letters of reference as those previously employed, i is a foot, to sustain the spout in position, as may be desired. In some cases I line the interior of the vessel a with a coating of gutta 30 percha. Other flexible material than prepared india-rubber may, however, be employed to form the vessel a, and the elastic tendency to maintain an extended form may be obtained by helical or other springs applied to it. Supply may be obtained through the spout or nipple by collapsing the vessel, thus forcing out the contained air, when, upon applying the aperture 35 of the spout or nipple to oil, and allowing the vessel to expand, the oil will flow therein. In like manner supply from such vessel is obtained by compressing to the extent desired. Having thus described the nature of my said Invention, I would have it understood that I do not confine myself to the precise details herein shown and4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2208. Specification. Bonnall's Impts. in Apparatus for Holding Oil for Lubricating Purposes. described; but what I do claim is, the forming vessels to contain oil for lubri- cating purposes of flexible or elastic material, capable of compression to force out the oil contained therein, but with a tendency to expand again when the pressure is removed, as explained. In witness whereof, I, the said John Bonnall, have hereunto set my 5 hand and seal, this Thirteenth day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. JOHN BONNALL. (l.s.) Witness, Theophilus Easte. 10 LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.(l SHEET.) AD.1854-. Ogtobeb.16.F9 2.208. BONFALL'S Specification. # %■ . They iUcd/ drawing is -parity colored. Dtrawn-oo. StmelijMalby- fc. S 01 Xondon: Printed by GeopuGE Edward Eyre andWiLUAM Srotteswoode , Priutexs'tothe Queeiismost Excellent Majesty. 1855-LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF IfeMNOISA.D. 1854 N° 2209. Life-Preserving Seats. LETTERS PATENT to Nathan Thompson, junior, of New York, in the United States of America, for the In vention of “ Improvements in Life- Preserving Seats. Sealed the 19th December 1854, and dated the 16th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Nathan Thompson at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 16th October 1854. I, Nathan Thompson, junior, of New York, in the United States of 5 America, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention for “Improvements in Life-Preserving Seats ” to be as follows:— This Invention consists in improvements on the life-preserving seat, patented by me on the Eighteenth day of September, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four. In place of hinging or fixing the water-tight compartments to the IQ sides of the seat, so that they may be opened out by being pressed against the body of the person, I permanently attach the said water-tight compartments to the sides of the seat; besides which I divide the top of the seat and upper water-tight compartments into two parts, which I hinge together. When in ordinary use, the two parts of the seat ai s held together by a spring; but I - when it is used as a life preserver the spring yields, so as to allow the person to enter between the two water-tight compartments.2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2209. Specification. Thompson s Improvements in Life-Preserving Seats. SPECIFICATION ia pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Nathan Thompson in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 13th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Nathan Thompson, junior, of New York, in the United States of America, send greeting'. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Sixteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Iler reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Nathan Thompson, Her special licence that I, the said Nathan Thompson, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Nathan Thompson, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Life-Peeserving Seats,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Nathan Thompson, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Nathan Thompson, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say) :— This Invention consists in improvements on the life-preserving seat, patented by me on the Eighteenth day of September, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four. In place of hinging or fixing the water-tight compartments to the sides of a seat, so that they may be opened out by being pressed against the body of the person, I permanently attach the said water-tight compartments to the sides of the seat; besides which I divide the top of the seat and upper water-tight compartment into two parts, which I hinge together. When in ordinary use, the two parts of the seat are held together by a spring ; but when it is used as a life preserver the spring yields, so as to allow the person to enter between the two water-tight compartments. 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2209. 3 Thompsons Improvements in Life-Preserving Seats. And in order that my said Invention may be most fully understood and readily carried into effect, I will proceed to describe the Drawing hereunto annexed. Description of the Drawing. 5 Figure 1 is an end view, Figure 2, a section, and Figure 3 a side view, of a seat arranged according to this Invention, a is the top of the seat, which is divided into two parts and hinged together at is a piece of leather with which the joint is covered; d, d, are two water-tight compartments formed under the two parts of the top of the seat; is a spring of vulcanized 10 india-rubber, by which the hinge b is kept closed ; f f, are two other water- tight compartments attached to the sides or legs g, g, of the seat. When seats of this description are employed for sustaining persons in the water, the person, by pressing against the compartments /, /, forces them into the position shewn in dotted lines in Figure 3, until the person has passed into 15 the space h,between the sides or legs g, when the spring causes them to resume their original position, i, i, are notches, for the accommodation of the arms of the person using the apparatus. It will be seen that life-preserving seats arranged as herein described are less complicated than when arranged as described in the Specification of my former Patent, as in this arrangement 20 only one hinge and one spring is required, and the lower water-tight compart- ments are fixed. Having thus described the nature of my Invention, and the manner of performing the same, I would have it understood that I do not confine myself to the exact details described; but what I claim is, the mode of arranging a 25 life-preserving seat as herein described. In witness whereof, I, the said Nathan Thompson, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Third day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. NATHAN THOMPSON, Jr. (l.s.) 30 Witness, J. Basset, 2, Rue Drouot. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the (Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.AD.1854*. 0ct16N?2209. THOMPSON’S Specifigatiqn. '1 SHEE EnH View FIG. I. CL They fCUd drcmtftg is eolor&eL. SeyCdvoro. FIG.2 li Sid& Vve/W. FIG.3. Brawn. an. StanfiTylSaBy&Sans. London. Ptmledltv George ):mv'AM> Eyiiil unci Wiiliam Spottiswooi>£ ; Printers to die Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855. ,r-LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS A.D. 1854 .............N” 2210. ^WWWWWVA/wvwwwwvvvwwvvvvwvvwvvvvvvvvvvvvvvvi File-Cutting Machines. LETTERS PATENT to Etienne Bernot, of Paris, in the Empire of France, and of 4, South Street, Finsbury, London, Gentleman, for the Invention of “ A New Machine foe Cutting Piles, which he calls Bernot’s File- Cutting Machine.” Sealed the 27th March 1855, and dated the 16th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Etienne Bernot at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 16th October 1854. I, Etienne Bernot, of Paris, in the Empire of France, and of 4, South 5 Street, Finsbury, London, Gent", do hereby declare the nature of the Inven- tion of “ A New Machine for Cutting Files, which I call Bernot’s File- Cutting Machine,” to be as follows :— My Invention consists in a new arrangement of machinery for cutting files. Drawing 1 is a side elevation of the machine. 10 ,> 2, end elevation of the same. A, B, is a support, susceptible of turning in any direction, and allowing the demi-sphere C to be acted upon all over its surface by the graver D, which remains fixed. The endless screw V is set in motion by a chain passing over2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2210. Provisional Specification. Bernot's New Machine for Cutting Files. a cog wheel X, which causes the rack C°, d°, on which the support A, B, moves transversally, and hence the file Y, held by the support A, B, to advance alternately with a regular motion before the graver D. The other parts of the mechanism serve for directing and regulating the action of the machine. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed 5 by the said Etienne Bernot in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 16th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Etienne Bernot, of Paris, in the Empire of France, and of , 4, South Street, Finsbury, London, Gentleman, send greeting. 10 WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Sixteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Etienne Bernot, Her special license that I, the said Etienne Bernot, 15 my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Jitienne Bernot, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, 20 the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention of “A New Machine for Cutting Files, which he calls Bernot’s File-Cutting Machine,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Etienne Bernot, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be 25 performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Etienne Bernot, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- 80 formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof, reference being had to the Drawings hereunto annexed, and to the figures and letters marked thereon, that is to say:— My Invention consists in new mechanical arrangements for the construction of a machine for cutting files. ... . 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2210. 3 Bernot's New Machine for Cutting Files. Description of the Drawings. Drawing I. represents a front elevation of the machine (Figure 1). Drawing I. also represents a side elevation of the machine, and a section through A, B, and E, F, Figure I., for shewing more clearly the interior of the machine 5 (Figure 2). Drawing'll., plan of the whole machine (Figure 1). Figure 2, Drawing II., represents a vertical section through the line X, X, of Drawing II. (Figure 1). Figure 3, Drawing II., is a section through P, 0, Figure 2, Drawing II., 10 and through R, S, Drawing II. (Figure 1). Figure 4 represents a front view of the buffer, and the manner in which the half circular file is fixed. Figures V. & 6 also represent the manner of fixing the three-sided and rats-tail files. 15 A, B, C, D, cast-iron frame, upon which the various parts of the machine are set up; E, F, lower part of the frame, serving as foundation to the machine; this part is hollow internally, and by its arrangement allows the connecting rod V1. shewn by dotted lines, to work vertically, as represented in Drawing I. ; but chiefly in Figure 2, Drawing II., which, being a vertical 20 section, shews the working and the manner in which motion is communi- cated more clearly. G, stone pedestal, by which the whole of the machine is supported. The bolts a, a, are sealed into the pedestal, and run through the iron foundation E, F, and plate 0, uniting them together, so as to form but one piece. El, cast-iron pulley, (the diameter of which may vary,) serving to 25 put in motion the whole of the machine. L1, M, N, horizontal shaft, set in motion by the pulley H, and mounted on a barrel L, turning round in a socket L1, forming part of the shaft L1, M, N, and cogging, by means of the lever J in J1, thus setting the shaft in motion, as herein-before described. I, fly wheel, fixed upon the barrel of the pulley, and serving to regulate the 30 rotative motion of the shaft L1, M, N. K, K, plummer blocks, forming part of the frame, & in which the horizontal shaft L1, M, N, works. 01, cam, mounted upon and fixed to the centre O2 of the horizontal shaft, by a conical shoulder running through it, and a screw which fastens them together, as shewn in Figure 2, Drawing II. This cam being fixed to the horizontal shaft, 35 encounters during the revolution of the latter the ram beam P, Q,, which slides between two grooves V, cut in the upright of the frame, and gives to it an ascending movement. R, ring, enclosing an excentric R1; during the movement of the horizontal shaft, the ring R, fixed to the rod S, gives to the4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2210. Specification. Bernot'sNew Machine for Cutting Files. latter a to and fro movement, as shewn in Drawing I. (Fig. & Draw® II. (Fig. 1.) T, balance lever, jointed at the point U, V, and pivoting by means of the axis X. This connecting rod has towards its centre a groove, which allows it to ascend or descend, according to the catch Y. The catch Y at each to and fro movement causes the ratchet wheel Z to turn, by pushing it before 5 it. The stroke of the catch Y is always calculated so as to cause the ratchet wheel Zto advance one cog at each movement. A1, counter catch, for preventing the ratchet wheel Z making a retrograde movement; it is moveable on the point B1, and can, by means of the grooved piece B1, C1, which receives it, advance or recede with it, according to the 10 required inclination. This inclination is always regulated by that of the cog of the ratchet wheel, which varies in size, according to the degree of fineness to be obtained. In order to prevent the rising of the catches, two springs bear constantly on the points Y of one, and on A1 of the other. D1, small horizontal shaft, set in motion by the ratchet wheel Z\ at the 15 extremity of this shaft is a pinion E1, upon which the cog wheel F1 works. This wheel is set upon a horizontal shaft G1, to the middle of which is fixed a pressure excentric H1; the spokes which serve to form the circumference have been calculated, so as to press continually in its rotation in a propor- tionate manner upon a spring I1; it only travels over three-fourths of the 20 circumference, and as this movement has been determined by the length of the file, it therefore follows, that each time one of the surfaces of the file has been cut, the wheel F1 returns, and imparts to it its motion by means of the two handle levers J2, which form part of the said wheel F1. The handles also serve as a mark for replacing the excentric at its starting point at each new 25 cutting. I1, main tempered steel spring, fixed by a counter plate and two screws to the centre of a moveable shaft K1. Another small spring L2, also fixed to the shaft K1, rests upon a stop M1, and serves to prevent the main spring l1 from taking a vertical direction, which, owing to the mobility of the shaft K1, to which it is fixed, would 30 otherwise take place. During the action of the machine the excentric IT1 is constantly in contact with the main spring I1. It will be readily understood, bearing in mind the ascending movement which the cam imparts to the beam P, Q, that the beam encounters the main spring each time, and consequently the elastic force of the latter varies 35 according to its contact ,vith the excentric. The beam P, Q, is provided at its lowest end with a graver or chisel N which is firmly fixed by a counter plate, which, with two bolts running through it, prevent the chisel N acting on the beam itself. °Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2210. 5 JBernot's New Machine for Cutting Niles. The carriage of the graver should always be perpendicular to the axis of the beam P, Q,, and consequently have its edge parallel to the surface of the file to be cut; when once this object is obtained, the file, notwithstanding the irregu- larities of thickness in all its transverse sections, will always present a line of 5 contact parallel to the cutting edge of the graver. It will be seen by the pre- ceding, that as the elastic force of the main spring I1 upon the beam varies in proportion as the excentric performs its movements, this beam descends with more or less force, and consequently, by means of the graver at its end, cuts the lines upon the file always of an equal depth. 10 The mechanism working the excentric is arranged that it should exert the strongest pressure upon the middle of the file, where the surface to be cut is the largest, and that the pressure should gradually diminish in advancing towards the extremities, and thus produce the cutting of an uniform depth. The movement of the excentric is regulated by means of the supports A3, B3, 15 upon which it rests. These supports slide in grooves C5, & are fixed by a semicircular piece D°. The mechanism for setting the file in motion is as follows:—O3, shoulder, forming part of the horizontal shaft M, N ; in the middle of this shoulder a handle P1 slides, which is fixed by means of a screw bolt when its range is 20 determined. Q,1, main connecting rod, provided with a pulley R3 at its upper part, and jointed at its lower part in S1. This connecting rod, set in motion by the handle P1, which works with the horizontal shaft M, N, gives to the rod T1 a to and fro vertical movement. At the lower part of the rod T1 is a small pulley U1, jointed to its extremi- 25 ties, and which sets in motion a connecting rod V1, suspended at its other extremity to a pulley X, similar in construction to the pulley U1, but which remains fixed while it pivots on the point V1, bolted to the framing of the machine. At the middle of the balance lever V1 rests a vertical rod Z1, A3, jointed at 30 Z3, and which also receives a to and fro vertical movement from the rod T1 by means of the balance lever V1. This rod Z\ A2, slides frictionwise in a barrel, provided with a shoulder at its lower part, and tapped at its upper part to receive a round nutted screw, which presses it firmly between the plate, herein-before described, and set on the framing of the machine & the buffer 35 carrier B3. At the upper part of the rod Z\ A2, is another balance lever C2, jointed to the left extremity at D3, as shewn in Drawing I., provided with a pulley, also jointed at its lower part at B2, and pivotting upon an ear fixed to the buffer carrier B3. The right-hand side of this balance lever communicates to the6 A.D. 1854.—N° 2210. Specification. Bernot's New Machine for Cutting Files. connecting rod G2, with which it is jointed, an ascending and descending movement, which it has received from the rod Z1, A2. The connecting rod G2 can work in any direction, being provided at each of its extremities as with universal joints. The arched arm J3, which is fixed to the upper part of the connecting rod 5 G2, receives from the latter a to and fro movement, which it communicates to the connecting rod L3, which, like the arm J3, forms part of the shaft K2, (as seen in Drawing I., Fig. 2,) working in two plummer blocks M2, N2. The connecting rod L3, being attached to the small pulley M3 by the rod N3, jointed to both at the points O3 and P2, gives to the pulley M3 a to and fro 10 motion, and causes the ratchet wheel R3 to advance one cog each time by the pressure of the catch S2, which pushes it successively before it. To prevent the pulley M3 moving too freely, it is attached to a support T2, at the lower part of which is a ring cut in two, and reunited by two claws & two screws; this ring rotates freely upon the shaft U2, which receives a circular movement 15 from the ratchet wheel R3, forming part of it, by the pressure of a hut with cap V3, against one of the shoulders of the shaft U2. A counter catch Y2 serves to prevent the ratchet wheel from making a retrograde movement; this counter catch can be lengthened or shortened at will by means of the piece z2, which slides in a screw bolt into an iron plate bs, 20 serving as support to the plummer blocks N2 & M2. When the length of the catch is determined, it is merely necessary to bear strongly upon the head of the bolt to keep at the same length the catch V2; its length and inclination are always dependant on the fineness of the cogs of the ratchet wheel upon which it is to act. 25 It will be seen, from what has been herein described, that the ratchet wheel R3 gives a circular movement to the shaft U2; this shaft, which works in two plummer blocks B4, B4, is provided at its other extremity with an endless screw C3, which in turning advances or recedes, according to the impulse given to it by a rack D3, with which it cogs. The rack D3, as represented in Drawing I. 80 (Fig. 2), and Figure 2, Drawing II., travels the whole of the length when sliding through a semi-hollow cylinder E3, F3, provided at its lower extremity with a groove G3, serving as guide to this rack. Towards the extremities of this rack are two stops H3, H3, serving to direct the upper part or buffer Is, that rests upon it. 85 This buffer I3 is of the form of a demi-cylindrical prism, and has towards its extremities two grooves made in it, which slide freely in a transverse direction to the demi-prism while held by the stops H3, H3. The demi-prism, as shewn in Figure 3, Drawing II., moves in a transverse direction to Es, Fs, withSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2210. 7 Bernot's New Machine for Cutting Files. which it moves with a gentle friction; it can therefore move freely round ' E3, F3, & at the upper surface change its position from a horizontal to an inclined position either to the right or left. At the upper part of I3 a groove is formed through the whole of its length, and at the bottom of this groove an 5 iron plate m is let in, the upper surface of which represents exactly the shape of the file which is to be submitted to the action of the machine. Between the file and the plate m, as well as upon the lateral side of the file, zinc bands are placed, in order that the stroke of the beam P, Q,, should not impair the cut lines already produced. 10 Figure 3, Drawing II., shews the manner in which the file is fixed upon * the bufier. In this Figure the g’rooves made in the buffer are shewn in section, and receive, as shewn in plan, Figure 1, Drawing II., two wedges ab, V\of which the left one is fixed and the right one moveable. This last forms part of a screw with prolonged threads. This screw is supported by a 15 piece of iron fixed to l3 by means of rivets; if, therefore, this screw is set in motion by means of its handle n, it causes to advance or recede the moveable wedge to which it is jointed, and which then tightens or slackens the file against which it is applied. The buffer I3 works longitudinally, by means of an endless screw cogging with the rack D3, upon which it rests. It will be 20 readily understood, on referring to Figure 2, Drawing II., that the motion can also be produced in a transverse direction by means of grooves made towards the extremities of the buffer, and sliding freely in the stops H3, H3, of the rack D3. The buffer I3 has on each side of its lateral faces semi- circular pieces a2, a2, (shewn in black dotted lines,) forming an axis, and 25 pivoting in circular grooves hollowed out in the interior of the uprights of the support B3, by whieh the circular, alternate, and vertical movement is given to the buffer carrier, and afterwards to the buffer itself. This movement is com- bined, so as to pass from a horizontal to an oblique direction, and form an angle which can reach 60°, and allows of regulating at will the inclination of 30 the cuttings of the file. When the requisite cutting tool is regulated, the whole mechanism is stopped, to prevent any movement from top to bottom, by means of an iron rod T, moving at its lower part e round a bolt screwed into one of the uprights of the support. At the upper part of this rod is a groove, in which slides a bolt f screwed into the buffer carrier. The lateral 35 faces of the said rod are divided into 60 parts, so as to correspond to the 60° of the angle that the buffer may have to describe. The bolt f then performs the function of slider with the iron rod T, which, by means of the divisions marked thereon, becomes a scale of vertical inclinations ; if, therefore,8 A.D. 1854.—N° 2210. Specification. Bernot's Neiv Machine for Catting Files. the nuts of the two bolts are strongly pressed, the buffer will be prevented from moving in a vertical direction. It will be seen by the foregoing description that the file, the buffer, its carrier, and the support B3 form but one body, which moves in a horizontal . plane, and allows the file to present itself to the graver from right to left for 5 the first cut, and from left to right for the second. The support is provided at its lower part with a disc B3, in which the uprights g, g, already described, are enclosed, and retained by bolts. A fusee h passes through the centre of this disc, and acts as a pressure bolt to the plate 0, through which it also passes; this fusee h is held by a head i at its lower part, and at its upper part by a 10 round nut j,pierced with six vertical holes, to receive the key for holding it firm. These several movements are shewn in red in Figure 1, Drawing II. At the centre of the disc B3 at K is a mark, which also serves to regulate the cross angular cuttings. This mark, shewn by the vertical line l, cor- responds to a semicircle, divided on each side into 60 degrees, begining at 15 the point K. It will be understood that 0, begining at K, the reading of the degrees is either from left to right, or vice versa, p is a plate, having at its centre q a groove, shewn in black dotted lines; this plate is fixed to the main frame by means of two screw bolts. Behind this plate p is a disc, which has at its centre r an axis of the same diameter as the above-mentioned groove, go This groove is made so as to allow the axes of the counter plate to slide from right to left in it, and to describe in its motion an arc of a circle, of which the point s is the centre, and which pivots on the point s of the plate, to which it is held by a nut t. This movement serves only to regulate the disc, which is fixed to the plate by means of a nut l. This disc is shewn in Figure 1, 25 Drawing I., in black dotted lines, and in Figure 2 by the letter pl. U, dove- tailed guide, sliding freely in the disc pl; its movement takes place from top to bottom and from right to left, that is to say, similarly to the disc with which it slides. At the upper part of this guide U, at the point V, a rod is rivetted, which SO acts as an axis, and serves to receive the main lever. , [arm of the lever, jointed at y, z, & u. The small arm y, z, is held at the point £ to the plate p when the apparatus is not in motion. At the extremity of the main arm x is fixed a cast-iron ball, which exerts a constant pressure upon the guide U, with which it communicates by means of the rod V, which acts at 35 the same time as a pivot and axis of the main arm x. A1, small crutch moving at b\ serving to receive the arm of the lever x, which rests upon it at C1, when the latter ceases to bear upon the guide U. This movementSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N* 2210. 9 Bemot's New Machine for Cutting Files. takes place every time a new line is cut, and is represented colored red in Figure 1, Drawing I. Owing to tlie peculiar arrangement of this part of the machine, when the guide U is once regulated by the counter plate or disc, in which it slides, it 5 acts as press and guide at the same time, that is to say, it always forces the file, upon which it rests during the cutting operation, to keep parallel to the graver N1, by which the cutting is performed. The flat files are maintained upon the buffer I3 by means of pressure & zinc wedges, which embrace three faces of the file submitted to the cutting. 10 I will now proceed to describe the manner in which the half-round & rats- tail files are fixed upon the buffer I3. For the half-round, see Figure 4, Drawing II., a zinc plate 6} is cast, upon which the plane surface of the file (previously cut by the same process as the flat file) rests. The concave part e\ which retains one of the convex 15 sides of the file, is moulded upon this file. This plate is held on the buffer by two grooves j1, j\ and is subjected to all the transverse movements given to the buffer. It will be readily understood that if a plummer block g\ slides in the buffer carrier E3, F3, and is held to the buffer by means of a groove made in 20 the semi-disc hl, fixed to the vertical face of the buffer by two screws, that the buffer can move transversally, and take with it the plummer block gl, g1, which is kept with gentle friction by the circular cheek i1, i\ of the semi-disc h1. Upon the plummer block g\ g\ is a moveable catch j, held by a spring k\ This catch forces itself into the openings l1, l\ l\ made in the 25 cheek of the semi-disc h\ and serves to hold the file steady during the cutting action. It will be seen in Figure 4, Drawing II., that an opening corresponds with the surface of the file to be cut. According to the arrangement shewn in that Figure, only one half of the file can be cut at a time. For cutting the 30 other half, it suffices to mould another zinc plate in a contrary direction, and to operate in the same manner. For cutting the three-faced files and rats-tail form, the arrangement of plummer blocks is the same as for the half-round file, that is to say, the bearing g\ g\ moves with the buffer only; it is fixed to it by means of two screws z3, z’\ 35 Between the internal face and the face of the buffer is a circular gorge, in which a washer a3, about ^rd of an inch in thickness, freely moves, and is provided with three equidistant holes, for cutting the three-faced files, and for the rats-tail form there are ten holes. A screw V2, running through the10 A.D. 1854.—N° 2210. Specification* Bernot's New Machine for Cutting Files. plummer block g1, g1, is inserted into the buffer, and forms a projection in the bottom of the gorge. This screw acts as a support and stop to the washers, which successively present their openings to this screw, according as a longitudinal cut is finished. The zinc plates which receive each of the files are previously moulded upon 5 them (as for the half-round files), and sink into the buffer by means of grooves made in each side. To prevent the file from moving during the cutting operation, its end is inserted in openings made in the washers; these openings are of the same form as the ends they are to receive. And having now described the nature of my said Invention, and the manner 10 of putting the same into execution, I wish it to be understood that I do not confine myself to the precise details of construction herein laid down, as the same may be varied; but what I claim is,— First, the peculiar arrangement of the buffer carrier for the manufacture of files, as herein-before described and referred to in Figures 1 & 2,Drawing I., 15 & Figures 4, 5, & 6, Drawing II. Secondly, the combination of a chain, composed of levers and connecting rods, with ordinary or universal joints, capable of working in all directions, as herein-before described and referred to in Figures 1 & 2, Drawing I. Thirdly, in the arrangement of a guide set parallel to the graver, as herein- 20 before described and referred to in Figures 1 & 2, Drawing I., & Figure 2, •Drawing II. Fourthly, in the arrangement of an excentric, the pressure of which is proportionally exerted upon a spring, as herein-before described and referred to in the Figures 1 & 2, Drawing I., & Figures 1 & 2, Drawing II. 25 In witness whereof, I, the said Etienne Bernot, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twelfth day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. E. BERNOT. (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.AD. 1854. Ocx. 16. JNV 2210 . BEKNOT S provisional specification. DRAWING I (X SHEETS.) JJw drmxing Uft yyi/tb Jurwisiorvalj SpeeMca^Coiv wpartbf coloreds. Drawn, on Stone by Malty & Sons. London'; Jointedbv Gi-orgi- ]hjwaiu) Eyrje and William Spottiswoojde .• iTinters to the Queens most. Excellent Majesty. 185-3.lSeijtj: /t ^ . A.D. 1854. Oct. 16.1ST? 2210. BEIINOT’S FROYISIONAL SPECIFICATION. (z SHEETS.) DRAWING 2 . A -ir ■ i The/ drawing left -with' 3-cnnsional' Sj>ea/icadzcny is partly colored' Drawn on Stone Dy Malby So Sons. London: JPtintedb? George EdwaiujEtue and.Wujjam Spotciswoode, 1 miters to me Queens mosULsccllent Majesty. 18,55.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D .18 54 .Oct 16 N° 2210 . BEKSTOTS SeeciircATioir. F I C . 2 . F I G . 1 . . : / 1------------- r; il-----/ - / -(U-LL Th& itL^&ccwmg ts jvarSf colored. Dram. oil Stoib£>j ]vfdlb^ Sons. London; Pirated by George Edward Eyrje and William Spottiswoore , Banters to the Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY ©F IkUNOISA.D.1854.0CT.16 .¥92210. BEIUSTOT S SPECIFICATION FIG .5 F I G . 6 F I G . I F I G iiL-------... / ,/■ -----4- F I G . 4 Drawn oil Stone try Malby & Sons The fthed' drawing zs partly cdtfed. Loxjyom Printedby George Edward Eyre and ^rrxiAM Spottiswoode Pmters totlie Queenls inostfo Majesty 1855.LIBRARY Of THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2211. Manufacture of Paper Pulp. ( This Invention received Provisional Protection, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by William Rossiter and Matthew Edwin Bishop at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 16th October 1854. We, William Rossiter, of Goswell Road, in the County of Middlesex, 5 Paper Manufacturer, and Matthew Edwin Bishop, of Cannon Street West, in the City of London, Wholesale Stationer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in the Manufacture of Pulp suitable for Paper, Pasteboard, and Millboard, Papier Mache, and other like Purposes,” to be as follows:— 10 We take rope, shakings, canvas, tow, bagging, or other similar materials used in the manufacture of paper, and reduce the same to pulp in an ordinary rag engine, adding a certain quantity of oil and alum or other equivalent chemical agent, for the purpose of neutralizing any tar or other matter that may be contained in the pulp ; we then introduce into the rag engine about 15 an equal quantity of refuse tan, bark, or other vegetable matter, which may or may not have been previously reduced to pulp, and we combine the same thoroughly with the rope pulp. The pulp thus produced may be bleached or not, as desired, and it is then manufactured into paper, &c. in the ordinary manner. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Evre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2212. X/'✓>rf'w%«r^/\/vry„ V.- Apparatus for Indicating Leakage of Gas, &c. (This Invention received Provisional Protection, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent ivas not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by John Henry Johnson at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 16th October 1854.—A communication. I, John Henry Johnson, of 47, Lincoln’s Inn Fields, in the County of ® Middlesex, and of Glasgow, North Britain, Gentleman, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ An Improved Apparatus for Discovering the Leakage or Escape oe Gas,” a communication from Etienne Abram Maccaud, of Paris, in the Empire of France, Gentleman, to be as follows:— This Invention relates to a peculiar arrangement of apparatus for dis- 10 covering any leakage or escape of gas in buildings lighted by that medium, and consists in forcing a certain quantity of atmospheric air into the pipes and apparatus connected therewith by means of a force pump, the cocks of the burners and main cock being previously closed. A pressure guage or indicator is attached to the pipes to indicate the exact pressure within, and when any leakage is taking place it will at once be indicated by the pressure guage and by the whistling of the out-rushing jet. A small safety valve is also fitted to the pipes to regulate the amount of pressure within. The force pump before mentioned is also applicable for cleaning the pipes by forcing a liquid therein. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 ............... N° 2213. Screw Propellers. LETTERS PATENT to William Wain, of Brunswick Street, Stamford Street, in the Borough of Southwark, Engineer, for the Invention of “ Improve- ments in the Construction op Screw Propellers.” Sealed the 9th February 1855, and dated the 16th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said William Wain at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 16th October 1854. I, William Wain, of Brunswick Street, Stamford Street, in the Borough 5 of Southwark, Engineer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in the Construction op Screw Propellers ” to be as follows: — The object of this Invention is to produce a simple and efficient screw propeller, the blades of which shall be capable of adjustment to any required 10 angle to suit the run of the vessel to which the propeller is applied. The boss of the propeller I cast in one piece, with an opening through it to receive the stems of the propeller blades. These stems are severally set in conical bushes, which bear against a shoulder on their respective stems, and being bolted to the boss, hold them securely therein, while at the same time they afford a ready 15 means of tightening up the blades in their sockets when they have worked loose by wear. The stems at their inner ends lock into each other, and they2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2213. Provisional Specification. Warns Improvements in the Construction of Screw Propellers. are provided each with a ring of bevil teeth, into which a pinion takes for turning the blades and setting them at any required angle. A square socket is made in this pinion, which is contained in the propeller boss, and into the socket takes the square end of a shaft, that passes through a hollow shaft which is secured to the driving shaft of the engine. In the propeller boss a square socket is formed, to receive the squared end of this hollow shaft. This mode of connecting the propeller with its shaft is for the purpose of facili- tating their disconnection, when such is required. The inner end of the pinion shaft is feathered to receive a worm wheel, which works into and is driven by a worm carried by a spindle, which has its bearings in a flange of the hollow shaft. By means of a key this worm is rotated, and thus (through the worm wheel and its shaft) an axial motion is imparted to the pinion in gear with the rings of teeth on the stems of the propeller blades, and at the same time the blades are caused to turn in their sockets, and assume any required angle with respect to the driving shaft. To disengage the propeller, the hollow shaft is drawn inwards until it is clear of the boss of the propeller, and to shorten this movement as much as may be, I find it desirable to give the inner shaft an independent sliding motion. For this purpose I form upon it a circular rack, into which gears a pinion carried by the hollow shaft. By turning this pinion the shaft may be slidden forward or backward, as required. An index pointer is mounted on this shaft to show the angle at which the blades are standing. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said William Wain in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 16th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, William Wain, of Brunswick Street, Stamford Street, in the Borough of Southwark, Engineer, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Sixteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said William Wain, Her special license that I, the said William Wain, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said William Wain, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2213. 3 Wains Improvements in the Construction of Screw Propellers. expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “Improvements in the Construction of Screw Propellers,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said William 5 Wain, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should par- ticularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. 10 NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said William Wain, do hereby declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement, reference being had to the Drawing hereunto annexed, and to the letters and figures marked thereon (that is to say) :— 15 This Invention relates to a novel construction of screw propeller, the blades of which may be adjusted from the interior of the vessel to which the pro- peller is applied. In the accompanying Drawing, Fig. 1 represents in sectional elevation a screw propeller constructed according to my Invention, and attached to the propeller shaft; Fig. 2 is a similar section, drawn on an enlarged scale; 20 and Fig. 3 is an elevation of the inner end of the propeller shaft and the apparatus connected therewith, for giving an axial motion to the blades of the propeller, a, a, is the boss of the propeller, cast in one piece, with an opening through it, to receive the stems 6 of a pair of propeller blades c, which are capable of being set to any required angle to suit the run of the 25 vessel. The gearing for effecting this adjustment is contained within the boss a, and is therefore not liable to injury or disarrangement. These stems are set in conical bushes d, made in two halves, and bolted to the boss a, and, by the inner edge of the bushes bearing against a shoulder on their respective stems, they will hold the blades securely in their place, while at the same time 30 they afford a ready means of tightening up the stems in their sockets when they have worked loose by wear. The stems at their inner ends (see the enlarged view, Fig. 2,) lock into each other when, as shewn in the Drawing, but one pair of blades is employed, and by this means the strain or leverage upon one blade is counteracted by 35 the resistance offered by the other, so that the tendency of the blades to work loose in their sockets is greatly diminished. I do not, however, confine myself to the use of two blades, as any required number may be employed, the boss -being cast with a number of radial sockets corresponding to the number of stems it is intended to receive. The stem of each blade is. provided with a4 AJD. 1854.—N° 2213. Specification. Wains Improvements in the Construction of Screw Propellers. ring of bevil teeth e, into which a pinion / takes, for turning the blades and setting them at any required angle. This pinion / has its bearing in the propeller boss a, a suitably shaped recess being formed for its reception ; and it is provided with a square socket, into which takes the squared end of a shaft that passes out through the stern of the vessel, to which the propeller is fitted, 5 and is employed for adjusting the blades to the required angle. The rear or inner end of the shaft g bears against an elastic cushion of india-rubber, and by that means it is pressed forward into the socket of the pinion f, and at the same time causes that pinion to work in close contact with the bevil teeth e. The propeller boss is provided with journals a*, *, which are carried by 10 suitable bearings as usual. The propeller receives its motion from a hollow shaft h, through which the shaft g passes, and in which that shaft has its bearings. In the propeller boss a square socket is formed, to receive the squared end of the shaft h, which projects out at the stern of the vessel. The other or inner end of the shaft h is connected in any convenient manner 15 to the driving shaft h* of the engine. This mode of connecting the propeller with its driving and adjusting shafts will greatly facilitate their disconnection, when such is required. The inner end of the adjusting shaft g is feathered to receive a worm wheel i, which fits into a recess formed for it in the end of the shaft h. 20 Gearing into the worm wheel i is a worm carried by a spindle j, which has its bearings in the flange of the hollow shaft h, as shewn best in the end view, Fig. 3. By means of a key or winch handle applied to either end of the spindle j, rotary motion is given to the worm, which, taking into the worm wheel, will turn the shaft g, and thus impart an axial motion to the pinion /; 25 but as this pinion is in gear with the rings of teeth e, on the stems of the propeller blades, these blades will at the same time be caused to turn in their sockets, and assume any required angle with respect to the driving shaft. In order to unship the propeller, the shafts g and h are drawn back into the vessel until they are clear of the boss of the propeller;-the propeller may 30 be then unshipped in the usual manner. As in some cases it may be found desirable to shorten this sliding movement of the shafts as much as possible, I propose to give the adjusting shaft g an independent sliding motion. This may be effected by providing in the abutting end of the driving shaft h* a recess, to receive the end of the shaft g, and forming upon the shaft a 35 circular rack, into which gears a pinion carried by the hollow shaft. When, therefore, this pinion is turned, the shaft g may be slidden backward, until its outer end is drawn within the hollow shaft h. The two shafts may then be drawn back together free of the propeller boss.Specification. A.D. 1854.—N“ 2213. 5 T Vain's Improvements in the Construction of Screw Propellers. For the purpose of ascertaining the angle at which the blades are standing at any given time, it may be found convenient to employ an index apparatus, which shall receive its motion from the spindle j, and thereby determine the amount of axial motion that has been imparted to the adjusting shaft. 5 Having now set forth the nature of my Invention of “ Improvements in the Construction of Screw Propellers,” and explained the manner of carrying the same into effect, I wish it to be understood that under the above in part recited Letters Patent I claim,— First, forming in one piece the boss of screw propellers, the blades of which 10 are adjusted by mechanism contained in the boss. Secondly, the means herein described for securing the propeller blades in their sockets, and of diminishing the tendency of the blades to work loose therein. And, thirdly, I claim the means herein described for setting the propeller 15 blades at any required angle. In witness whereof, I, the said William Wain, have hereunto set my hand and seal, the Twenty-seventh day of March, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. W. WAIN. (l.s.) 20 Witness, N. E. Tuxen, Captain, Danish Royal Navy, Copenhagen. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.(1 SHEET.) A.D.1854'. October 16.N? 2213 WAIN^S SPTCiFrcATioisr. m X\\\\\\\\W' F I C , ^ F I G ///'A Ifw fihdy di'OAViAUj, I# jm'tty cclmtd/ Dram on. Stone DjMaLbj 8c. S ons • London: BantedlirGeorge EdwabdEyre arid YfruiAM- Spottiswoode , IYmters to trie Qacens most Excellent Majesty. 1855.LIBRARY Of THE university OF IUUHOISA.D. 1854 N° 2214. Pumps. LETTERS PATENT to Lionel John Wetherell, of Compton Street, Clerken- well, in the County of Middlesex, Civil Engineer, and Augustus Johann Hoffstaedt, of Albion Place, in the County of Surrey, Agent, for the Invention of “ An Improved Construction of Pump.” Sealed the 3rd April 1855, and dated the 16th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Lionel John Wetherell and Augustus Johann Hoffstaedt at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 16 th October 1854, We, Lionel John Wetherell, of Compton Street, Clerkenwell, in the 5 County of Middlesex, Civil Engineer, and Augustus Johann Hoffstaedt, of Albion Place, in the County of Surrey, Agent, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ An Improved Construction of Pump ” to be as follows:— This Invention relates to a novel arrangement of mechanical parts for 10 transmitting the reciprocating action to pump rods, chiefly applicable to ships’ pumps and other force pumps. Affixed to the pump barrel is a horizontal bracket guide, which receives a traversing fulcrum pin projecting from the pump handle. This handle is jointed to a central pin of an arrangement of levers, constructed on the lazy- 15 tongs principle, which pin traverses in a vertical guide attached to the pump2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2214. Provisional Specification. Wetherell§ Hoffstaedt's Improved Construction of Pump. barrel. This lazy-tongs arrangement is carried by bearing pins at opposite sides of the pump barrel, and to its upper end the piston rod of the pump is connected. When, therefore, the pump handle is vibrated, a lengthened stroke of piston due to the moving fulcrum of the handle and the lazy-tongs lever will be effected. To prevent the sticking of the pump valves and the clogging of the pump, it is proposed to employ conical floating valves, which will act freely, and be little liable to injury from the introduction of foreign substances into the pump barrel. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Lionel John Wetherell and Augustus Johann Hoffstaedt in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 16th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, we, Lionel John Wetherell, of Compton Street, Clerkenwell, in the County of Middlesex, Civil Engineer, and Augustus Johann Hoffstaedt, of Albion Place, in the County of Surrey, Agent, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Sixteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto us, the said Lionel John Wetherell and Augustus Johann Hoffstaedt, Her special license that we, the said Lionel John Wetherell and Augustus Johann Holf- staedt, our executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as we, the said Lionel John Wetherell and Augustus Johann Hoffstaed, our executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “An Improved Construction of Pump,” upon the condition (amongst others) that we, the said Lionel John Wetherell and Augustus Johann Hoffstaedt, by an instrument in writing under our hands and seals, or under the hand and seal of one of us, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification, A.D. 1854.—N° 2214. 3 Wetherell $ Hoffstaedt’s Improved Construction of Pump. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Lionel John Wetherell, (on behalf of myself and of the said Augustus Johann Hoffstaedt,) do hereby declare the nature of our said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following 5 statement, reference being had to the Drawing hereunto annexed, and to the letters and figures marked thereon (that is to say) :— This Invention (which is applicable chiefly to ships’ pumps and other force pumps) relates to a novel arrangement of mechanical parts for transmitting the reciprocating action of pump handles to pump rods, the object being to 10 obtain,-without interfering with the compactness of the pump, a greater length of stroke than it has hitherto been found convenient to give to pumps worked by hand. In the accompanying Drawing wre have shewn our improved mechanism for effecting this object, as applied to a single action pump. Fig. 1 is a side elevation of a pump fitted according to our Invention; 15 Fig. 2 is a front view of the same; Fig. 3 is a vertical section, taken at nearly the middle of the pump; and Fig. 4 is a sectional plan view of the pump, taken in the line 1, 2, of Fig. 1. The improvement consists essentially in the employment of a Iazy-ton^^^y^^w^>^✓^✓^✓^^v^y^^v^vv'v^^^a^>^%^^N^v^^.^.^/vv^^#^^ <***>* AD. 1854 ..........................................................N° 2215. Brushes. (This Invention received Provisional Protection, hut notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent teas not given tvithin the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by William Henry Child at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 17th October 1854. I, William Henry Child, of 21, Providence Row, Finsbury, in the City of 5 London, Brush Manufr, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Certain Improvements in the Manufacture and Construction of Brushes ” to be as follows, that is to say :— My first improvement consists of certain improvements in the arrangement and disposition of the hair; secondly, the order and manner in which the hair 10 is arranged, inserted, and fixed in the hair frame; and, thirdly, certain con- venient arrangements for altering, repairing, & cleaning the said brushes, and in constructing the handles thereof. My first improvement in the arrangement and disposition of the hair may be generally described as being the employment of hair of various degrees of 15 strength or substance in one and the same brush; the object of this being that the coarser hair may penetrate to the skin, while the softer and finer hair removes the dandrifF from the surface of the hair, seperated from the skin by the stronger or coarser bristles. In respect to this part of my Invention, I claim the employment of hair of various degrees of strength or fineness when 20 used in the same brush. My second improvement being as follows :—I select bunches of the finer2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2215. Provisional Specification. Child’s Improvements in the Manufacture and Construction of Brushes. description of hair, which I insert in a row of holes, the said line being either a straight or right line, or a curved line; and I either employ one such line or two or more parallel lines of fine hair; I then insert a similar disposition or arrangement of strong or coarse hair. I sometimes arrange indiscriminately bunches of fine or weak or strong and coarse hair, without order or arrange- 5 ment. Further, I prefer to make the coarse hair bunches longer by one quarter of an inch or more than the fine hair, in order that the coarse hair should penetrate better and clean the skin; the fine hair, being shorter, removes the dandriff. In respect to the second part of my Invention, I claim arranging the hair in bunches, variously coarse and fine, either in lines straight or curved, or 10 otherwise, or making one set of bunches one quarter of an inch longer than the other. I do not, in the above or following arrangements, confine myself to any of the known materials with which brushes are made. My third improvement may be described as follows:—I seperate the handle, frame, or back of the brush in two or more loose pieces, so connected that one 15 or more of such pieces may be readily seperated one from the other; I unite them by dovetails, screws, clasps, or other suitable means, which enables me to clean, alter, or repair, or substitute brushes in one handle of various characters, hard or soft. I finally construct brushes intended to be used with fluid or semi- fluid ; the said fluid being emitted or driven out through the centre or other 20 suitable part of the brush when in use. I finally make carpet brooms of the usual materials, by binding it around the wooden block by leather bands, which requires only short material. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spoitiswoode, Printers to the Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N°2216. Calculating Machines. LETTERS PATENT to George Scheutz, of Salisbury Street, in the County of Middlesex, Gentleman, and Edward Scheutz, of the same Place, Civil Engineer, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Calculating, and Printing the Results of such Calculations.” Sealed the 13th April 1855, and dated the 17th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said George Scheutz and Edward Scheutz at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 17th October 1854. We, George Scheutz, of Salisbury Street, in the County of Middlesex, 5 Gentleman, and Edward Scheutz, of the same Place, Civil Engineer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for M Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Calculating, and Printing the Results of such Calculations,” to be as follows:— This Invention relates to the effecting of calculation by mechanical agency, 10 and consists principally in the employment of a set of calculating wheels, each of which can be turned backwards or forwards at pleasure independantly of the others. Figure 1 of the annexed Drawings is an end elevation of the apparatus; Figure 2 is a plan of the same; and Figure 3, a corresponding side elevation. 15 The calculating wheels A, A1, are arranged in rows, in such a manner that all the wheels which, during the movements of the machine, represent terms in a series of the same order are arranged in the same plane.2 AD. 1854.—N° 2216. ProYision&l Specification. G. and the nature of each particular character of ore to be operated upon may require, so long as the peculiar principle of my said Invention is preserved. In witness whereof, I, the said Louis Cornides, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Seventeenth day of April, in the year of our Lord SO One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. LOUIS CORNIDES. (l.s.) Witness, Alex. Prince, Patent Agent, 35 4, Trafalgar Square. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Etre and Wtldiam Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.f1 SHEE A.D. 1854.Oct 17. N? 2218 CORMDES’ SPECIFICATION Dr'ecwn on Stone-;Ly Malby Onus. i'fu: (ilerJy drawing t$ petrify colored/. London : Fruited by Georgj; L ward Eyre and William Spottiwoode , Printers to the Queens most Excellent Ma jesty IS/?D.MP'-'-RY Of THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2219. Portable Drill. (This Invention received Provisional Protection, hut notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PEOVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by John Lawes Cole at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 17th October 1854. I, John Lawes Cole, of Henry Street, Salmon’s Lane, Limehouse, in 5 the County of Middlesex, Engineer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ An Improved Construction op Portable Drill ” to be as follows:— The chief object of this Invention is to provide a ready means of boring holes in gas and water mains, for the purpose of attaching thereto branch 10 pipes. To effect this object, I provide the drill with a clamping frame, which consists of two side bars, connected to a cross bar at about the middle of their length by adjustable pins, which pass through them and through holes in the cross bar. A series of holes is made in the several bars, to permit of the side bars being set at varying distances apart, to suit the different diameters of pipe 15 to which it may be required to apply the drill. The outer extremities of the side bars are thrust apart by means of nuts on a right and left handed screw, which passes through the extremities of these bars, and thus the opposite ends of the side bars are caused to bind upon the pipe. The cross bar carries a hollow standard, from which a bracket projects, to receive the bearing of the 20 drill socket. A binding screw fitted into this standard is employed to force a binding piece into contact with the pipe to be bored, and thus to complete the2 A.D. 1854.—N" 2219. Provisional Specification. Coles Improved Construction of Portable JDrill. grip of the frame upon the pipe. The drill socket works freely in its bearing, and is capable of sliding therein, which it is caused to do when the drill is in action by means of a screw which bears upon it, and is gradually depressed by the operator as the boring proceeds to keep the drill up to its work. An axial motion is imparted to the drill by means of a spring bolt, which is actuated by 5 a hand lever, and takes into a plate with ratchet teeth cast upon its face; but any ordinary click arrangement may be used, if thought desirable. LONDON: Printed by Geoege Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2220. Manufacture of Boots. (This Invention received Provisional P, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time p/rescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Arthur Veal at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 17th October 1854. I, Arthur Veal, of the City of Oxford, Bootmaker, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ An Improvement in the Manufacture of 5 Boots” to be as follows :— The object of this Invention is to construct Wellington boots and other boots of that class so that they shall be capable of expanding while being drawn on to the foot of the wearer, and afterwards contracting to their original size. This I effect by introducing lengths of elastic webbing into the boot at opposite 10 sides of the leg, extending down to the galoche or counter, and also a central piece at the instep. When, therefore, the boot is being drawn on to the foot it will expand as required, and thus permit of persons, whether possessing high insteps, or long heels, or low insteps, wearing Wellington boots or other boots of that class with comfort. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.I). 1854 ..............N° 2221. Combing Machines. LETTERS PATENT to Alfred Illingworth and Henry Illingworth, of Bradford, in the County, of York, Spinners, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Combing Wool and other Fibrous Substances.” Sealed the 17th April 1855, and dated the 17th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Alfred Illingworth and Henry Illingworth at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 17th October 1854. We, Alfred Illingworth and Henry Illingworth, of Bradford, in the 5 County of York, Spinners, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Combing Wool and other Fibrous Substances ” to be as follows:— Our Invention relates to combing machinery, in which the material to be operated upon is drawn off in detached tufts by nippers or other such apparatus, 10 and the principle we proceed upon is to comb out the end of a tuft which projects beyond the holding apparatus, and while it is retained thereby; the operative parts for effecting this may consist of rotatory points, or may be arranged so as to act upon the material by a reciprocating action. A peculiar method of working the nippers, constituting an important part of our Invention, 15 and which facilitates the above operation, consists in causing them to draw out2 A D. 1854.—N° 2221. Provisional Specification. A. § II. Illingworth's Improvements in Machinery for Combing Wool, a tuft of material by two operations, that is to say, the intended length of tuft is drawn forward without being detached, and the nippers then move inward, embrace the material, and in moving out again complete the severance, by which arrangement the uncombed end is left projecting for the action of the comb above mentioned. 5 Another part of our Invention consists in turning over the detached portions of combed material, so as to deposit them reversed, as regards their ends, upon a “ gill,” or other apparatus suitable for forming a continuous sliver. A method wre adopt for effecting this consists in using a transferring comb, carried by a bar which oscillates upon a centre, and by turning thereon effects the 10 required operation. This oscillating bar we can also use for carrying the extra comb, above described, for operating upon the uncombed projecting end. Another part of our Invention consists in the adaptation of a spring or springs to the bottom part of the nippers used for detaching tufts of w'ool or other material, in connection with or instead of to the upper part, as now 15 practised; and in reference to such nippers, our Invention also consists in imparting motion thereto through the agency of excentric wheels, whereby we are enabled to gain a varied speed. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Alfred Illingworth and Henry Illingworth in the Great Seal 20 Patent Office on the 17th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, we, Alfred Illingworth and Henry Illingworth, of Bradford, in the County of York, Spinners, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters 25 Patent, bearing date the Seventeenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto us, the said Alfred Illingworth and Henry Illingworth, Her especial license that we, the said Alfred Illingworth and Henry Illingworth, our executors, 30 administrators, and assigns, or such others as we, the, said Alfred Illingworth and Henry Illingworth, our executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within within the United Kingdom of Great Britain 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2221. 3 A. H. Illingworth's Improvements in Machinery for Combing Wool, • ■ #'■ I ■; F I C . 2 ■ -ti-ll The fihjdj drawvnc/,1^ jijcarfly- oot/rred-. Item cm. Slow IjMalbf & Soi m. London: Panted br George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode . Printers to the Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855-UBn«Ry OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2222. Machinery for Raising Woollen Cloth. LETTERS PATENT to Jacob Dockray, of Leeds, in the County of York, Machine Maker, and John Dawson, of Holbeck, in the Parish of Leeds, in the said County, Machine Maker, for the Invention of “ Certain Improvements in Machinery por Raising Woollen Cloth.” Sealed the 30th March 1855, and dated the 17th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Jacob Dockray and John Dawson at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 17th October 1854. We, Jacob Dockray, of Leeds, in the County of York, Machine Maker, 5 and John Dawson, of Holbeck, in the Parish of Leeds, in the said County, Machine Maker, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Certain Improvements in Machinery for Raising Woollen Cloth ” to be as follows: — This Invention consists in the mode of arranging the working parts of a machine used for raising the nap of woollen cloth by means of wire cards. It 1 is hitherto been the practice in raising machines to bring the cloth in contact with the under side of an horizontal cylinder, which is covered with wire cards, by means of rollers, placed on each side and parallel with the card cylinder. These rollers are adjusted at each end by screws, which have to be turned separately by the attendant on each end of the machine, according to the degree of raising found desirable. This mode of adjustment frequently leads to uneven work, and could not be applied to what is termed broad cloth ;2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2222. Provisional' Specification. Dockray Dawsons Improvements in Machinery for Raising Woollen Cloth. also the passing of the cloth underneath the card cylinder is found to work inconveniently. Our improvement consists in placing two cast-iron shields or guards, which partially cover the upper side or surface of the card cylinder, leaving an opening between them at the top, so that as the cloth is drawn over these 5 shields, a part of the surface of the card cylinder projects above them, and comes in contact with the cloth.. We also apply an ex centric of peculiar con- struction for raising and lowering these shields, so as to bring the cloth with more or less force against the card surface. This exeentric is so arranged that it can be worked from one end of the machine. 10 Our next improvement consists in adapting this machine for what is termed “cross raising,” and for this purpose we use two endless leather sheets or bands. Upon these sheets, corresponding to the width of the cloth, are placed suitable pieces of wire cards, intended to operate upon the cloth. The sheets move in contrary directions upon horizontal rollers. Parallel with the upper 15 surface of these sheets are two plates, placed so as to support the cloth as it is drawn in a direction parallel with the axis of the sheet rollers. These plates are raised and depressed by means of an exeentric, similar to the one above mentioned, so as to enable the attendant to give the required amount of work to the cloth. 20 SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Jacob Dockray and John Dawson in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 17th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, we, Jacob Dockray, of Leeds, in the County of York, Machine Maker, and John 25 Dawson, of Holbeck, in the Parish of Leeds, in the said County, Machine Maker, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Seventeenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, 30 did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto us, the said Jacob Dockray and John Dawson, Her special license that we, the said Jacob Dockray and John Dawson, our executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as we, the said Jacob Dockray and John Dawson, our executors, admi- nistrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from ^5 time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the UnitedSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2222. 3 Dockray $ Dawsons Improvements in Machinery for liaising Woollen Cloth. Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “Certain Improvements in Machinery for Raising WoolIiEN Cloth,” upon the condition (amongst others) that we, the said Jacob Dockray and John Dawson, by an instrument in writing under our hands 5 and seals, or under the hand and seal of one of us, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. 10 NOW KNOW YE, that we, the said Jacob Dockray and John Dawson, do hereby declare the nature of our said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement, reference being had to the Drawing hereunto annexed, and to the letters and figures marked thereon (that is to say) :— 15 This Invention consists in an improved arrangement of machinery for raising the nap of woollen cloth by means of wire cards or teazles. It has hitherto been the practice in raising machines to bring the cloth in contact with the under side of an horizontal card cylinder by means of rollers placed on each side and parallel with the card cylinder. These rollers are adjusted at their 20 opposite ends by screws, which are turned separately by the attendant, accord- ing to the degree of raising found desirable. This mode of adjustment frequently leads to uneven work, and could not be applied to what is termed broad cloth; the passing also of the cloth underneath the card cylinder is found to work inconveniently. 25 In our improved machinery, the cloth is caused to pass under a stretching roller and over a pair of shields or guards. These shields or guards partially cover the upper side or surface of the card cylinder, leaving a portion of the surface exposed between them, so that as the cloth is drawn over the shields, a part of the surface of the card cylinder projecting above the shields 30 comes in contact with the cloth. This improvement has reference to what is termed straight raising, that is, raising the nap in the direction of the warp threads. Our Invention relates also to improved machinery for effecting what is termed cross raising, that is, raising the nap in the direction of the weft 35 threads. For this purpose we employ two endless bands of wire cards for operating upon the cloth at right angles to its progress through the machine. Parallel with the upper surface of these bands of cards are two plates, so placed as to support the cloth as it is drawn over the cards. After passing the cards, it is drawn by the drawing rollers, and carried by other rollers4 Specification.' A.D. 1854.—N° 2222. Dockray »^vvvvyvvvwvwvvvw ^vvywvwvvvwvvvs/v%vww Propelling Vessels. LETTERS PATENT to Richard Green, of 12, Sydney Street, Brompton, in the County of Middlesex, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Propelling Vessels.” Sealed the 20th March 1855, and dated the 17th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Richard Green at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 17th October 1854. I, Richard Green, of 12, Sydney Street, Brompton, in the County of 5 Middlesex, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention for “ Improvements in Propelling Vessels ” to be as follows :—• This Invention consists in the employment of a submerged wheel, working either horizontally or vertically, but by preference horizontally; on this wheel are placed blades or arms, which, during one half of the revolution of the 10 wheel are turned, so that they act flat against the water, so as to propel the vessel; and during the other half of the revolution of the wheel, to come again into position to propel the vessel, the blades turn, so as to pass edgeways through the water, and to offer only a slight resistance to the motion of the ship, and this motion of the blades I produce by the action of cam surfaces on 15 the stems of the blades.2 A.D. 1854.----------N° 2224. Specification. Greens Improvements in Propelling Vessels. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Richard Green in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 14th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Richard Green, of 12, Sydney Street, Brompton, in the County of Middlesex, send greeting. , WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria,” by Her Letters Patent, bearing-date the"Seventeenth May of Oetobei^lfTthe"year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Richard Green, Her special licence that I, the said Richard Green, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Richard Green, my executors, administrators, and* assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “Improvements in Propelling Vessels,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Richard Green, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should par- ticularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Richard Green, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say):— My Invention for “ Improvements in Propelling Vessels ” consists in the employment of paddle wheels, in which I arrange a series of rotating paddles round a revolving axis or spindle, so that during a portion of the revolution of the wheel, they may offer their broad surfaces to the water whilst propelling the vessel, and, by what is technically termed feathering, offer their narrow surfaces or edges to the water during that portion of the revolution when their action upon the water ceases to be beneficial in propelling the vessel, and this I.effect: as follows :—I take a drum or wheel, which I mount on an axis or spindle, to be driven by a steam engine or other motor. In this I place as many paddles as are suited to the intended object, each paddle being mounted on an axis or spindle, and turning-freely in- bushes let into the rims or frame- 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2224. s Green & Improvements in Propelling Vessels. work of the drum or wheel. These paddle wheels I cause to project beyond the side of the vessel, when placed, as I prefer them to be, horizontally, and submerged, with their spindles or axes vertical; though I do not confine myself to this precise application, as they may be fitted and arranged vertically bn the 5 vessel’s side, either submerged or partially so, as an ordinary paddle wheel. The paddles may be in form and shape most convenient and suitable for the work they are intended to perfoi’m. To the inner part of the sides of the vessel I attach hollow boxings, open toward the water, forming a water-tight casing or enclosure to the paddles and wheels, and which, when applied horizontally, 10 terminates at the vessel’s side, enclosing only that portion of the wheels which is within the line of the vessel’s side, leaving the paddles with the portion of the wheels which protrude through the opening uncovered while acting in propelling the vessels; by this expedient I get rid of the objectionable external paddle case. I fix to the top and bottom of this casing concentric rings or 15 rails, on which I place at suitable distances apart, on one or both rings, studs, pins, or rollers, so that they may be acted upon by, and may intercept, the motion of the paddle axes or spindles, which overhang or pass over them ; for which purpose I attach to the said axes or spindles collars or cams of a suitable form, having indents upon their peripheries, edges, or angles, the 20 diameter of which cams must correspond with the projection of the said studs, pins, or rollers, so that the paddles, having performed a portion of a revolution with their broad surfaces to the water, the indents on the said cams may, as the wheels or drums revolve with their paddles, come into contact with, and take into, the said studs, pins, or rollers, and cause the paddles to make 25 successively a quarter of a rotation, which motion will place the paddles in a new position, in which they will pass edgewise through the water, offering thereto the minimum resistance; and I retain the paddles in this new position by causing the flat sides of square collars, fixed on the paddles’ axes, to rub or slide against, and be confined between, the concentric rings above and below 50 them, during such part of the rotation of the wheel or drum as is required to bring the paddles again into action, retaining the paddles firmly in their position. So soon as the paddles shall have arrived at the proper point for resuming their original position, and to recommence their action upon the water for the propulsion of the vessel, I cause the square retaining collars successively to 35 have the guides or concentric rings, which is effected by cutting away a portion of the surfaces of the said rings, which allows the collars to turn as the cams come into contact with, and take into, other studs, pins, or rollers, and effect, another quarter: of a rotation of the paddles* which brings their broad surfaces again into action against-the water. This being a successive andi A.D. 1854.—N° 2224. Specification. Greens Improvements in Propelling Vessels. continuous action, the vessel is thereby propelled forward with uniformity, and without any drag, counteraction, or impediment arising from back water or the retrograde motion of the paddles. The paddle casing need only.be of such dimensions as will admit of the paddles passing edgewise through it, and is made perfectly secure from leakage by passing the main axis or spindle of the 5 paddle wheel or drum through a stuffing box in the top or bottom of the casing to the interior of the vessel, as may be most convenient for communi- cating with the steam engine or motor. It will be obvious that the reverse action or backing of the vessel may be effected by simply reversing the motion of the paddle wheel or drum, as the studs, pins, or rollers may be so placed IQ that their action will be precisely the same in both directions. Having now described the nature of my said Invention, the following description of and reference to the accompanying Drawing will more par- ticularly show its application. Description of tiie Drawing. 15 Figures 1, 2, 3, shew the elevation, section, and plan of a horizontal paddle wheel or propeller and its case, in which the same letters refer to similar parts. A is the side of the vessel; B, the casing enclosing the paddle wheel or pro- peller, with a stuffing box C,- through which the spindle or axis D of the wheel E passes and works water-tight, and is connected to the engine as 20 convenience may suggest; the paddle wheel or drum fitted with collars or bushes for the paddle axes to turn in. F, F, the paddles, with their stems, axes, or spindles G, G; H, H, cams, for the purpose of giving rotative motion to the paddle axes, having hollow corners, angles, or indentations suited to be acted upon by the studs, pins, or rollers I, I, against which they strike; 25 K, K, square collars, which, passing freely between the concentric rings L, L, retain the paddles in their respective positions, and, having their corners rounded oft’ to prevent them from tripping against the rings, recesses, or breaks in the rings L1, L1, are provided to allow' the collars K, K, to turn when the cams H, H, strike the studs I, I, see Figure 4. M, a shield, secured 30 to and travelling with the paddle wheel, which encloses the machinery, and effectually protects it from obstructing matter floating in the water. Figure 4 is an enlarged view of the cam H, the stud I, and collar K, shewing the position at the commencement, the middle, and the end of the motion of the cam, the two latter being shewn by dotted lines at K1, K11. Figure 5 shows 35 the application of an upright wheel to the side of a vessel. Figures 6 and 7 shew the application of a wheel of small diameter to the centre of a vessel and submerged, well adapted for canals.Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2224. 5 Greens Improvements in Propelling Vessels. Having now described the construction of paddlo wheels or propellers according to my said Invention, adapted either for sea-going, river, or canal navigation, I do not strictly confine myself to the precise details delineated in the Drawings, as the same may be variously applied and the parts diversified 5 without departing from the nature or principle of my said Invention; and I therefore claim the application of paddles on moveable axes or spindles, the motion of which is effected by cams or collars on the said axes or spindles, combined with the concentric guide rings or rails, and the studs, pins, or rollers, for periodically changing the position of the paddles with respect to the water 10 in which they act, whether such paddles be made to rotate continuously on their axes in one direction, or to rotate to and fro by a combined forward and reverse action of the studs, pins, or rollers, and whether such wheels or pro- pellers be applied as ordinary paddle w'heels, using the feathering action to avoid back water or an abrupt entrance, or whether as a partially or entirely 15 submerged propeller, either applied vertically, horizontally, or at an angle with the surface of the water, and whether applied to the sides or other convenient part of the vessel. In witness whereof, I, the said Richard Green, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Thirteenth day of April, in the year of our Lord 20 One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. RICHARD GREEN, (l.s.) Witness, John Edkins. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Bpottiswoodf, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855..Drawn an Stone iy Mali)7* & Sons. 1855.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 ............N° 2225, Waggons, Trucks, &c. (This Invention did not proceed to the Great Seal.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by William Eassie at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 18th October 1854. I, William Eassie, of the City of Gloucester, Railway Contractor, do 5 hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ An Improved Means op Securing Goods or Loading in or on Railway Trucks or Waggons " to be as follows:— I propose to use an improved kind of latch or bar lock, chiefly applicable for the flaps of lime or coal waggons or trucks, by which the fastening process 10 will be rendered easier to work, and better secure the load ; the present mode of fastening these long flaps (viz4.) by means of a slot and chain, with an attached peg, being always attended by great loss of time, and usually with risk of accident, when in the act of attaching the two fasteners inside the buffers. I propose to cut in the headstock or sole bar a long groove, into 15 which is inserted a long iron bar, which can be slid three inches or so in a sideward direction, and in which occasional notches are made, such notches occurring in near proximity to where the long hinges depend. On moving the lever, by which the iron bar is slid along, the hook on the end of the hinge iron is brought opposite to the apperture in the bar, and thus opened; or if wanted 20 to be fastened, the lever is turned over the back of flap, and thus becomes immediately locked. The position of the working lever is so contrived that it partly forms in itself the purpose of a holdfast, by being made to turn over in the end of the flap. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 rv/W\AT\/Vs^AAr»/WWNAr»A/WWWVW\AAAA/NAAAA/WWV N° 2226. Breech-loading Fire-arms. LETTERS PATENT to Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, of 16, Castle Street, Holborn (City), London, Patent Agent, for the Invention of “ Certain Improvements in Breech-loading Fire-arms.”—A commu- nication. Sealed the 9th March 1855, and dated the 18th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Auguste Edouard Lora- doux Bellford at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 18th October 1854. I, Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, of 16, Castle Street, Holborn ® (City), London, Patent Agent, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Certain Improvements in Breech-loading Fire-arms,” a communication, to be as follows, viz. :— The nature and intention of my said Invention relates to, and consists in, an improved formation and construction of the barrel, the stock, and the ^ breech of fire-arms, & in fitting and connecting them together, so formed and constructed as to afford new facilities in the loading or placing the charge therein and in discharging the same. My said Invention also extends itself (as connected with, and forming part of, such improvements) to a new mode of supplying, delivering, and affixing percussion caps to the nipple of the2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2226. Provisional Specification. Bellford’s Improvements in Breech-loading Fire-arms. lock from a magazine of the same, formed in the stock of the piece. These constructions & operations I perform by placing side pieces on the stock, a short distance forward from the breech of the barrel, & suspending the barrel thereon by trunnions or centre pins, on which it is at liberty to be moved vertically on an axle, allowing its rear end to be raised until the bore presents 5 itself in a position to receive the charge. The charge being placed, the barrel is returned to its ordinary position in the stock, whereby the form of its rear end and that of a corresponding form given to the front of a false breech, affixed to the stock by a collar common to both, it is secured in its position for discharge. Such forms of the rear end of the barrel, and that of the front 10 of the face of the false breech, are both of them cylindrical, & of concentric curvature, the axis of the cylinder giving the curvature to these faces being identical with that on which the barrel moves, to elevate the rear end of the barrel, as above described. The magazine is a straight longitudinal passage made in the stock, extend- 15 ing from the butt end to a point at a small distance behind the nipple. The width and depth of the magazine passage is made to suit the dimensions of the caps, and they are urged forward to the nipple by the movement of a ratchet & a supporting spring, which being so connected with the tumbler of the lock as to act simultaneously with it, and advance a cap to the nipple, 20 and fix it thereon, with each descent of the hammer in the act of discharging the piece. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 14th April 1855. 25 TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Augusts Edouaed Loeadoux Bellfobd, of 16, Castle Street, Holborn (City), London, Patent Agent, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Eighteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord 80 One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, Her special licence that I, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, 85 my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with,Specification. 3 A.D. 1854.—N° 2226. Bellford's Improvements in Breech-loading Fire-arms. and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention of “Certain Improvements in Breech- 5 loading Fire-arms,” a communication, upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office 10 within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by 15 the following statement (that is to say):— This Invention relates, firstly, to a certain method of constructing the barrel, and connecting it with the stock and breech, for the purpose of allowing it to swing, and present the rear end of the bore for the reception of the charge. 20 It relates, secondly, to certain means of making a secure and perfect con- nection between the rear of the chamber and a fixed breech. It relates, thirdly, to a certain arrangement whereby the caps are caused to be supplied from a magazine in the stock to the nipple, as required, by the movements of the hammer in cocking and discharging the piece. 25 The accompanying Drawing exhibits a gun containing the above improve- ments. Fig. 1 is a side view, Eig. 2 a top view, with one of the side plates B, B, which attach the barrel to the stock, partly in section; Fig. 3 shows a longitudinal section of the stock, breech, and magazine, with a side view of the barrel; Fig. 4 exhibits a section of part of the stock and barrel, and a side 30 view of the breech ; Fig. 5 is a transverse section, immediately in front of the breech ; Fig. 6 is a back view of the cock and tumbler, with a transverse section of the magazine, showing the manner in which the feeding rack, by which the caps are supplied, is operated; Fig. 7 is a transverse section of the magazine; Fig. 8 is a side view, and Figs. 9 and 10, top views, of the front 35 part of the magazine, showing the arrangement of the springs which hold the caps at the mouth. Similar letters of reference indicate corresponding parts in the several Figs. To enable those skilled in the art to make and use my Invention, 1 will proceed to describe its construction and operation.4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2226. Specification. Bedford's Improvements in Breech-loading Fire-arms. A is the barrel of the gun; and B, B, are two side plates, which are firmly secured to the stock C, for the purpose of attaching the barrel thereto in such a way that it may raise up the rear end of its bore, as shown in Fig. 4, to receive the charge. The barrel is attached to the side pieces by means of two projections a, one on each side, opposite each other, each entering a 5 recess b in one of the side plates. The front part of each projection forms more than half a circle, from which it extends backwards in the form of a wedge, or in two tangential lines, which meet and form an angle at the back end, as shown in Fig. 3. The front part of each recess corresponds in form with the front of the projection, but it extends backwards in two parallel 10 lines to the same length as the projection. The form of the recess is shown in dotted outline in Figs. 1 and 3, and partly dotted and partly in bold outline in Fig. 4. These forms of the projection and recess admit of a limited swinging motion of the barrel, allowing it to change its position from that shown in Figs. 1 and 3 to that shown in Fig. 4; in the former of which 15 positions the bottom of the projection rests on the bottom of the recess, and in the latter the top of the projection is in contact with the top of the recess. The thickness and depth of the projections and recesses is shown in Fig. 2, where one of the side plates is shown partly in section. The rear end of the barrel is in the form of an arc, described from tlie 20 imaginary axis, passing through the circles of the projections and recesses, which constitutes the axis of oscillation of the barrel, and it fits close up to a stationary breech D, having a face of corresponding form. The front part c of the breech is made cylindrical, and the rear end of the barrel has a conical termination d; and to the cylindrical part c of the breech and conical part d 25 of the barrel is fitted the loose breech collar D1, which is bored to fit the breech, and conically enlarged in front, to receive the rear end of the barrel. This collar secures the barrel in position for firing. A spring S, applied as shown in Fig. 5, or otherwise, may be used to force the collar D1 forward, and make a tight joint with the cone c of the barrel. The collar has two studs e, 30 one on each side, which pass through slots e1, e\ in the side plates, and are furnished outside with knobs, by which to draw the collar backwards by the hand to set the barrel free. The vent / passes through the centre of the breech to the nipple g, which is in a recess in the upper part of the rear of the breech. 35 The magazine or receptacle for the caps r, r, consists of a tube E, extending straight through the stock from the butt end to a point above, but a little in rear of the nipple, as shown in Fig. 3. The transverse sectional form of this tube is shown in Fig. 7, where it will be seen that its length is equal toSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N* 2226. 5 JBell/ord's Improvements in Breech-loading Fire-arms. the height of the caps and its width to their diameter, and where it is shown that there is a slot h in the bottom, which extends its whole length. The caps are kept and urged towards the front of the tube by a follower or piston i, see Figs. 3 and 6, which fits to the tube, and has an elastic tongue j, which passes 5 thrbugh the slot h into a recess below the tube within the stock, and engages with a ratchet rod k, which extends as far as the rear of the tube, and is con- nected by a stud l with the tumbler m. Above its axis, the teeth of the ratchet are of a pitch corresponding with the diameter of the caps, and thus every time the gun is discharged, the descent of the hammer o brings forward the 10 ratchet, and thus urges forward the follower a distance equal to the diameter of the caps, and thus forces one cap from the front of the tube; and every time the hammer is drawn back in cocking, the receding of the ratchet bar causes the spring tongue to pass over a tooth in advance of that by which it was last moved. 15 Each cap, as it emerges from the tube E, is brought directly over the nipple, and is driven on the nipple by the same blow of the hammer that explodes it; but previously to its being struck by the hammer it requires to be held in the proper position outside the tube. This is effected by means of two springs n, n, which are attached to the sides of the tube near the front end, and act 20 like nippers, so that when a cap t is expelled from the tube they hold it, as shown in Fig. 9, until it is struck, as shown in Fig. 3, by the hammer, which, as it drives down, the cap passes between the jaws of the nippers. The springs are each formed with a slight bend at u, behind the parts v, v, which hold the cap outside the mouth, in order that when there is no cap outside the tube, 25 they may retain those which are within, as shown in Fig. 10. Slots are provided in the sides of the tube for the springs to work through. When the gun is required for sexwice, the follower i is worked by the ratchet out at the front end of the magazine, which is then filled with caps from the rear end, and the follower inserted behind them. When it is desired to load 30 the piece, it should be held in the left hand, near the front of the stock, and the collar D1 requires to be drawn back by the right hand far enough to free the cone e, when the greater weight of that portion of the barrel in front of the axis on which it oscillates causes it to descend, and throw up the rear end to the position shown in Fig. 4, when it is ready to receive the charge, which 35 is, preferably, employed in the form of a cartridge. After the charge is inserted, the rear end of the barrel may be forced down into its place by the left hand, and the collar D1 moved forward with the right; or if a spring S is applied behind the collar, it will be thrown forward by the spring. As the hammer is drawn back to cock it, the ratchet bar moves back, and one tooth6 A.D. 1854____N° 2226. Specification! Bedford's Improvements in Breech-loading Fire-arms. passes the spring catch j of the follower ; and when the trigger is drawn and the hammer set free, the early portion of the descent of the latter moves forward the ratchet bar and the follower i, and forces forward all the caps in the tube E, forcing out the foremost one, which is prevented falling by the action of the springs n, n, which hold it till the hammer strikes it down over the nipple, and explodes it. Having thus described the nature of this Invention, and the manner in which the same is or may be carried into effect, I wish it to be understood that what I claim is,— lrst, connecting the barrel with the stock and stationary breech by means of projections a, a, on its sides, one part of each of which is circular and another part of wedge form; said projections fitting within recesses b, b, in plates B, or their equivalents, attached to the stock, which said recesses correspond in form with the circular part of the projections, but are wider than the wedge- shaped parts thereof, substantially as described, and thereby admit of a limited swinging movement of the barrel, for the purpose of exposing its rear end, as herein set forth. 2d, the sliding collar D1, sliding over the stationary breech and the rear end of the barrel, substantially as described, for the purpose of making a close joint between the barrel and breech. 3d, though I do not claim the tube E, the piston i, ratchet bar k, and springs n, n, separately, or irrespective of the particular arrangement shown, I do claim the particular arrangement shown and described, whereby the follow- ing results are obtained, viz.:—lrst, a sure forward movement of the caps without the assistance of a spiral spring; 2d, convenience for replenishing the tube without removing it from the stock; and, 3d, the explosion of a cap already on the nipple without bringing another from the magazine. In witness whereof, I, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twelfth day of April, in the year of our Lord 1855. A. E. LORADOUX BELLFORD. (l.s.) 5 10 15 20 25 30 LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoodk, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.V TtwfdrcL dnccwing imparity coloredr/ ( Ldroosr: Rmtedty &eorge Edward Eyrj- aaclWnxTAM. Spotiiswoode ; Printers to die Queens most Excellent M colored/. Mr.SJNtt o:n Sl.pnp by "Maibv Sc. So.us. Lon DOJsr. ftin.te(l.b> (^oik;e Edward Eyrh arid Win jam S pottis woor.k. I miters to the Queen’s most Excellent Majestv. 1855.library OF tH£ UNIWBITY of ILLINOISFONTAINE MOREAU'S FKOVISJONAT SPECIFICATION. OKA.WINa JILL Th&dj'c(wvrig Zeft/wif^prarisidiLaJ/ SpedIxAxUian/is wots colored. IcheZt&d&Q, 5 Op. oo. London: RmtVVVWWWVVVVW>AArtftnAAAfV^Art/VW\/\Aftrt^nA^Aarts separataSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2228. 7 Gessner's Improvements in Gig Mills. retained; but what I claim is, the mode herein described of combining the mechanical parts for conducting cloth to and from a gig mill. In witness whereof, I, the said Ernst Gessner, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Tenth day of March, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. ERNST GESSNER. (l.s.) Witness, Eduard M. Cockel. Ernst Liebmann. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.SHEETJ. London: l^tedby feopp Edward Eyre andWimAM Spottlswoode, Printers to meteens most Excellent Majostj. 1855.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISSHEET 2. A .3). 1854. Oct.18 .N? 2228. GESSKER’S SPECIFICATION. (2 SHEETS) FI C. 4. FIG. 5. The hied drovmng "parity colored' Londojst: Printed by George Edward Exre and WimAM Spottiswoode , Printers to the Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855. Dram on StmeEy Malty & Sons." UB^Ry OF THE UNIVERSITY Of ILLINOIS. AJD. 1854 N° 2229. Obtaining Soundings. LETTERS PATENT to George Hamilton, of 86, Great Tower Street, for the Iavention of “ Improvements in Obtaining Soundings.” Sealed the 18th April 1855, and dated the 18th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said George Hamilton at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 18th October 1854. I, George Hamilton, of 86, Great Tower Street, do hereby declare the 5 nature of the Invention for “ Improvements in Obtaining Soundings ” to be as follows:— This Invention consists in attaching by a hinge joint to the fore part of a.ship or vessel a metal or other bar, so arranged as to trail on the bottom when the depth of water is small. To this metal bar is attached an indicator, by means 10 of which the depth of water is indicated as soon as the ship gets into shallow water. The trailing bar may be arranged so that it can be raised out of the water, that it may not impede the progress of the vessel when there is no chance of its being required. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed 15 by the said George Hamilton in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 18th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, George Hamilton, of 86, Great Tower Street, send greeting.2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2229. Specification. Hamilton's Improvements Obtaining Soundings. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Eighteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said George Hamilton, Her special licence that I, the said George Hamilton, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said George Hamilton, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times there- after during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Obtaining Soundings,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said George Hamilton, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said George Hamilton, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say) : — This Invention consists in attaching by a hinge joint to the fore part of a ship or vessel a metal or other bar, so arranged as to trail on the bottom Avhen the depth of water is small. To this metal bar is attached an indicator, by means of which the depth of water is indicated as soon as the ship gets into shallow water. The trailing bar may be arranged so that it can be raised out of the water, that it may not impede the progress of the' vessel when there is no chance of its being required. Having thus stated the nature of my said Invention, I will proceed to describe the manner of performing the same. Description of the Drawing. Figure 1 shows a side view of the apparatus complete, except the trailing bar; Figure 2 shows another side view of the fixing parts, with the other or upper parts in a position at right angles to that in which they are shown in Figure 1; Figure 3 is part plan of some of the parts; and Figure 4 shows the upper part of the trailing bar. a, a, is a clamping frame, by which the apparatus is fixed to the taffrail or other part of a ship or vessel by means of the screws b and moving plate c.On the upper part of the frame a is fixed 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N* 2229. 8 Hamilton's Improvements in Obtaining Soundings. the axis d, which carries the other parts of the apparatus, and allows of their moving thereon, so as to come correctly in position for use. is a forked arm, which at one end turns freely on the fixed axis d, and at the other end the forked arm carries the axis / in suitable bearings g, g. On this axis f there 5 is a saddle-piece f \ on which the forked end of the trailing bar is placed, as shown at Figure 4. On the axis f is the arm h, which acts as a counter- balance to the pointer i, fixed on the axis /, as shown, j is an axis, fixed to the socket or boss of the forked arm ; ■ 7c is a graduated arc, which moves freely on the axis j, and is kept counterbalanced by the weighted arm l, fixed 0 thereto. This arc may be graduated on both sides, so as to employ two different lengths of trailing bars therewith, but ordinarily one trailing bar will be sufficient, in which case only one graduation will be necessary. Supposing this apparatus to be fixed to the fore part of a ship, or, in fact, in any con- venient part of a ship, and the trailing bar is in position, the depth of water 15 will be indicated by the pointer and graduated scale, and which will assume positions according to the angle of the trailing bar for the time being. I would remark that I do not claim any of the mechanical parts separately, nor do I confine myself to the details shewn, as they may be greatly varied without departing from my Invention, which consists of combining the use of 20 a trailing bar with a suitable index, to indicate the depth of water a ship or vessel is for the time being floating in. In witness whereof, I, the said George Hamilton, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Eighteenth day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. 25 GEORGE HAMILTON, (l.s.) Witness, Geo. Pitt, 4, Old Square. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers t® the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.(1 SHEET.) AJ>.1854k 0CT0BE&I8 J$°. 2229. HAMILTOIST’S Sbfxificatio^ . Tki'filed/ drcavauj to' co'Lorad/- Lojstdoat: Printed^ George Ed^4bi) fea: and WiiXL^vM Sporrt sworn-, xedleiit Majestv. 1855.LIBRARY' „ THE vwmrr mmois#^^AAAA^AA^AAAA/^AAAAAAAAArvAA/•V’ A.D. 1854 ............N° 2230. Preparation and Spinning Machines. LETTERS PATENT to John Mason, of Rochdale, in the County of Lancaster, Machinist, and William Robertson, of the same Place, Machinist, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Pre- paring and Spinning Cotton and other Fibrous Substances, Part of which Improvements is also applicable for Shifting Straps by which Motion is Communicated in other Machines.” Sealed the 17th April 1855, and dated the 18th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said John Mason and William Robertson at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 18th October 1854. We, John Mason, of Rochdale, in the County of Lancaster, Machinist, and 5 William Robertson, of the same Place, Machinist, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Preparing and Spinning Cotton and other Fibrous Substances, Part of which Improvements is also applicable for Shifting Straps by which Motion is Communicated in other Machines,” to be as follows : ^ Our improvements consist, firstly, in gradually regulating the velocity of spindles used in preparing and spinning, so that the said spindles are caused to rotate at a given speed at the commencement of filling, and are con2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2230. Provisional Specification, Mason $ Robertsons Impts. in Machinery for Preparing <$* Spinning Cotton, <§c. tinuously altered as the cop or bobbin increases in size. We accomplish this by driving the machine by two conical pullies or by friction plates, along the former of which the strap is from time to time shifted by any periodical movement of the machine, as, for instance, the travelling of the carriage in mules, or the rising and falling of the copping rail in roving frames. 5 Another part of our improvements relates to the mule, and consists of the following improvements:— Firstly, we regulate the speed of the carriage in going in, so that when the spindles are bare, its speed shall be lower than when the base of the cop has been formed. A mechanical contrivance for effecting this consists in the 10 employment of a pulley for the carriage band, made in segments, and capable of being contracted at one end, so that when the base of the cop is formed, a conical periphery will be the acting medium. The variable motion of the carriage may, however, be obtained by other means, as, for instance, upon the principle used for winding on in Sharp & Roberts’ mule. 13 Secondly, we establish a connection between the under and upper fallers, whereby the variation of the former is caused to impart to the latter the motion necessary for securing a good chase of the cop. Thirdly, our Invention consists in weighting the faller, so as to cause it to drop down during the backing-off; this falling, if necessary, we regulate 2# by a shaper plate, upon which it rests, and which is turned by friction from the tin roller; this plate is employed in lifting the faller at the roller beam. If the shaper plate be not used, we adopt a separate motion for raising the faller. Fourthly, we drive the cam shaft which effects the changes by means of a 23 band or other friction apparatus, which will slip while the said shaft is to be detained. Fifthly, our Invention consists in the adoption of loose warves to the spindles, on to which the bands are shifted when the twist is completed, so as to enable the pressure of the faller upon the yarn to effect the backing-off. When 80 spinning yarns of fine numbers, we assist this operation by the action of a friction surface against the spindles. Another part of our improvements relates to an arrangement for traversing the driving strap of mules, applicable also to other machines in which the strap is shifted by self-acting machinery, and is also required to be placed on to the 33 loose pulley by hand. The peculiar feature of this part of our improvements is, that whether the strap be moved by the machine or by hand, the proper relative positions of the several parts will be preserved, and we are enabled by these means to dispense with the usual over-head motion.Provisional Specification. A.D; 1854.—N° 2230. 3 Mason is communicated therefrom by the pulley h to the main shaft of the machine. 30 As the back roller a revolves, the fork d will be caused to travel upon the screw c, and the strap g will consequently be shifted along the conical pullies, so as to vary the speed at which the machine is driven. At the commence- ment of filling a bobbin, the said strap is so situate that the spindles shall be driven at the greatest speed, gradually diminishing in velocity as the material 35 accumulates. ~When the bobbins have been filled, the strap of the conical pullies may be brought to its starting position by disengaging the shaft f from the train, by which it is connected to the roller d, and then turning it by means of suitable hand apparatus. The Drawing shews the shaft b as connected toSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2230. 5 Mason df Robertsons Impts. in Machinery for Preparing ottiswooi>e > , PmtestoliLeQiieei^mostMelledtM^es^. 1&55.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY Of ILLINOISAJ).1854>. 0CT0BER18.N? 2230. M^SO^ &ROBERTSOTTS Specifications FI C . II . {uv\n/u\n_njgj^ SHEET S. ( 7 SHEETS.) Ihe/fCUM/ (trawmejTs net colored/, Np<. T" DramLoruStoiielyMalbjScSoiis. Lo*VDOjsr: Piintedby George Edward Eyre andWnxmi• Spottiswoode, Printers to the ‘Queeiis most Excelleat Majesty' 1 ?v >oLIBRARY of the vniveMityof ,LumSHEET 6. ' AJX1854*. OCTOBERlg.JJf? 2230. MASOJT 8cROBERTSON’SSpecification . jr (7 SHEETS.) C*3 - Tkfr filed/ dr caring is not colored/. 0 Drawn an StaneDyMally 1/ S ons. London: PrintedbjGeorge Edward Eyre andWixuXM Spottiswoode, . Printers to the Queens most lxcelleiit Majesty. 1855.OF THE “« .1354?. OcTia . 1ST? 2230. MAS ON AND ROBERTSONS SPECMCATIOX 0 V JTi/i Yiled'drcmififf w riot/ colored/. Drawn cm Stone by Malby 2( Sons. London: Pmtedby George Edward Eyre and. Wru jam'Nrotjts woode . ftanterstothe Queeais most Excellent Majesty. 1855.library* Of THE UNIVEBIITV OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2231, Caulking Ships, Waterproofing Roofs, &c. ( This Invention received Provisional P, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Benjamin Franklin Cooke at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 18th October 1854. I, Benjamin Fbanklin Cooke, of Boston, in the State of Massachusetts 5 and United States of America, Gentleman, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “An Impboved Mode op Caulking Ships, applicable also to the Rendeking of Roops Watebpboof,” to be as follows:— The chief object of this Invention is to render ships’ seams water-tight in all latitudes; this I effect by the use of an elastic caulking material, which 10 is tightly compressed between the planks of the ship, and, having always a tendency to expand, it will, when, for example, the deck planks shrink under the heat of a tropical sun, keep the seams water-tight, and when by the action of water they are caused to swell, will yield to the lateral pressure of the planks. The elastic material which I propose to employ is a compound known as 15 sponge gum. This material is usually made by introducing alum into the ingredients of vulcanized india-rubber, whereby the compound is rendered cellular after it has been subjected to heat in the well-known manner. To reduce the cost of the india-rubber or other gum used in this elastic compound,2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2231. Provisional Specification. Coolees Improved Mode of Caidlcing Ships, Waterproofing Roofs, $c. I find it advisable to mix therewith fibrous materials or cork cuttings, in quantity not sufficient seriously to impair its persistent and elastic qualities. In applying the compound, I form a longitudinal groove in the edges of the planks, and insert a strip, a quarter of an inch thick (more or less), between the planks when they are being laid; or I fold the strip, or groove it on 5 its edge, to permit of its opening laterally when the planks shrink, and yet presenting a water-tight joint. This mode of caulking is also appliccable to the roofs of buildings, for preventing the passage of water thi’ough skylights, &c. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 ............N° 2232. Furnaces. (This Invention received Provisional Protection, but notice to proceed with the application for letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Mark Wheeler at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 18th October 1854. I, Mark Wheeler, of Newton Street, Ilolborn, in the County of Middlesex, Japanner, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ An Improved 5 Mode op Consuming Smoke arising prom the Combustion op Fuel in Furnaces to be as follows:— The object of this Invention is to effect the consumption of smoke in furnaces without in any way altering their construction. To this end I provide the stoker with a quantity of sawdust, or other substance which will 10 readily absorb water, and will when dry burn as fuel; and when the fire is fairly alight I throw on to it, after every fresh charge of coals, a shovelfull of this damp substance, the action of which is, that it will prevent the smoke given off from the coal from rising and passing away from the fire-place with the flames and gases of combustion. By this means not only is the escape of 15 the smoke effectually prevented, but a considerable saving of fuel is at the same time effected. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2233. Roof Lamps for Carriages. LETTERS PATENT to Howard Ashton Holden, of Birmingham, in the County of Warwick, Carriage Lamp Manufacturer, for the Invention of “ Certain Improvements in Roof Lamps for Railway or other Carriages, and for Parts used in Connection with the same.” Sealed the 18th April 1855, and dated the 18th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Howard Ashton Holden at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 18th October 1854. I, Howard Ashton Holden, of Birmingham, in the County of Warwick, 5 Manufacturer, do hereby declare the nature of my Invention for “ Certain Improvements in Roof Lamps for Railway or other Carriages, and for Parts used in Connection with the same,” to be as follows (that is to say):— My Invention consists, firstly, in so constructing the burners of such lamps as to allow the air to play around the wick, and which object I effect by 10 diminishing the metal around the wick-holder, and introducing a tube or tubes for conducting the air from the top or outside of the lamp down to the burner; this much improves the combustion of the oil, and prevents the too rapid carbonization of the wick. Secondly, in dispensing with the inner lining in such lamps, by allowing the 15 air to enter at the sides in the usual manner, and pass down to the flame through perforations in the reflector. Thirdly, in the filling or supplying the reservoirs of such lamps with oil, and2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2233. Provisional Specification. Holdens Improvements in Roof Lamps for Railway Carriages, which consists in uniting the burner to the supply or feed tube or tubes in such a manner that the oil may be poured through them into the reservoir, the oil afterwards flowing to the burner, as usual in such lamps when burning. Fourthly, in the application of a stop-cock in the supply tube of such lamp, for the purpose of preventing the oil running down to the burner while the 5 chamber or reservoir is being filled. Fifthly, in the application of a screw stopper, for securing the mouth of the supply pipe when the reservoir is supplied from the bottom. Sixthly, in so constructing the reflectors of rectangular lamps as to increase their reflecting surface. 10 Seventhly, in strengthening the cross piece of railway carriage roofs where it is usually cut away for receiving the lamps, by introducing two metal plates, made in such a manuer that they may come together at about an angle of forty-five degrees round the lamp, and which angle or bevilled surface I plate or cover with a suitable reflecting metal or enamel, or make it of glass, china, 15 earthenware, or other vitreous reflecting material. And, lastly, in introducing a reflector around and outside the lamp, and placed horizontally against the roofs of such carriages. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Howard Ashton Holden in the Great Seal Patent Office go on the 18th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Howard Ashton Holden, of Birmingham, in the County of Warwick, Carriage Lamp Manufacturer, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Eighteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Howard Ashton Holden, Her special license that I, the said Howard Ashton Holden, my executors, administrators, and assigns, 30 or such others as I, the said Howard Ashton Holden, my executors, administrators, or assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, 35 and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Certain Improvements in Roop LampsSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2233. 3 Holdens Improvements in Hoof Lamps for Railway for Raiiway or other Carriages, and for Parts used in Connexion with the same,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Howard Ashton Holden, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, 5 and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Howard Ashton Holden, do hereby declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to 10 be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statements thereof, reference being had to the Drawings hereunto annexed, and to the figures and letters marked thereon, that is to say:— My improvements consist, firstly, in so constructing roof lamps that I am enabled to keep the cotton holder cold while burning, and this I effect by 15 means of a tube or tubes extending down from the outside of the lamp to the socket of the cotton holder, and thus I am enabled to surround the wick with a constant supply of cold air, which not only improves the combustion of the oil (or other lunurious fluid), but prevents the rapid^carbonization of the wick, thus ensuring a brilliant and clear light for a much longer time (after each 20 trimming and lighting) than is obtained from lamps of the ordinary con- struction ; and this improvement is not only applicable to circular, but also to rectangular, or other desired form of roof lamps. Secondly, my improvements relate to circular roof lamps, and consist in dis- pensing with the usual inner lining. In this case I allow the air to enter in 25 the ordinary manner, and pass down to the flame through perforations made around the edge of the reflector, or between the outer edge of the reflector and glass of the lamp. Thirdly, my improvements consist in uniting the cotton holder to the supply and air tubes of such lamps by what is called (or known) as union joints, by 30 which means I am enabled to reverse the position of the socket or cotton holder, thereby forming a kind of funnel through which the oil (necessary in supplying the reservoir) may be poured when the cotton holder may be again reversed, as well as the reservoir, the oil flowing back again to the burner through the same supply tube, to supply the flame in the usual way. 35 Fourthly, my improvements consist in the application of a stop-cock to the supply tubes of such lamps when the reservoir is to be supplied with oil from the top; by this means the oil is prevented running down the supply tube to the wick while the reservoir is being filled. And the fifth part of my improvements in roof lamps relate to the manner4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2233. Specification. Holdens Improvements in Roof Lamps for Railway Carriages, Qc. in which I make the stoppers for closing the hole through which the oil is poured to supply the reservoir, and for this purpose I use a screw stopper, united to the top or under side of the reservoir by suitable straps, by which means the stopper is always attached to the reservoir, and this is a great convenience in many instances, as the loose stoppers of ordinary lamps 5 often get mixed in the trimming room of the various railway stations, and a perfect exclusion of the air is indispensable to the well-burning of such lamps, and which cannot be insured when the stoppers are mixed. Sixthly, my improvements in roof lamps refer to what is called rectangular lamps, and consist in so constructing the reflectors that the greatest amount of 10 reflecting surface shall be obtained, which, in connection with my improve- ments, as set forth under the first and third part of this my Specification, adds greatly to the light given out, as well as to the general appearance of such lamps. And, seventhly, my Invention consists in applying strengthening plates to 15 the cross rails that usually support the roofs of railway carriages, but which rails are necessarily cut away for the purpose of receiving the lamp down from the top; these plates I allow to meet around the lamp glass at or about an angle of forty-five degrees, curved or otherwise, so as to expose the flame of the lamp as much as possible; in addition to which I plate, enamel, or coat with 20 any suitable vitreous or other reflecting surface the angles of such plates, so that this part of the strengthening plates may form reflectors around the lamp. This plan will be found a great improvement on the ordinary mode (but suit- able only where one lamp is required to light two compartments), and is capable of some modification, such as the making the reflectors of any suitable 25 reflecting material, and fixing them between the iron plates before named, or making each reflector separate, and uniting them together by the plates. And, lastly, my Invention consists in the use or application of horizontal or crown reflectors in connection with the roof lamps of railway or other carriages, such reflectors being made of any suitable material or shape, according to the 30 form or position of the lamp used. And in order that my Invention may be fully understood and readily carried into effect, I will proceed to describe the Drawings hereunto annexed, in the various Figures of which the same letters are used to indicate the same part as they are represented. 35 Description of Drawings. Fig. 1 (Sheet 1) represents a vertical sectional view of a circular roof lamp with my improvements (as named under the first head of this my Specification)Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2233. Holdens Improvements in Roof Lamps for Railway ,§c. 5 applied to the same ; and Figure 2 represents a transverse section, taken through the lamp glass at A and B of the same Figure. C, C, is the air tube, with a trumpet-formed mouth at the top, that it may better suck in or gather the air; D is the socket for receiving the cotton holder, and to which the tube C is 5 united in such a way that the air passing down the tube (as represented by the arrows) may freely pass around it and out at the top, between it and the cotton holder, which fits loosely in the socket, and rests on the projections E, E. The arrows around the cotton wick represents the escaping of the air after passing through the air tube, but the main bulk of the air necessary for supporting the 10 flame pass into the lamp through a row of holes surrounding the lamp at F, F, as indicated by the arrows, and pass down between the outer and inner lining of the lamp, entering the body of the lamp through the holes g, g, g, &c., as indicated by the barbs of the arrows coming through them, and by the aid of the chimney H (which carries away all the rarified air), a steady and regular 15 current is kept up; and I will observe that the top fence, represented at J, J, has heretofore been placed much higher in this description of lamps, and which had an injurious effect, whereas by my keeping it in the position shewn I generate an additional current, as indicated by the arrows passing between its under edge and the top of the lamp, which greatly facilitates the escape of the rarified 20 air, and greatly improves the ventilation of the lamp. K is the reflector, united to the air tube C and supply tube L; the dotted lines m, m, simply indicate the sectional form of the reflector, to which the chimney is united by solder or otherwise. N, N, is the oil chamber, represented in section, in order that it may be seen that the air tube C passes right through it on the inside, 25 while the chimney, which may be suitably made of tin or sheet iron, ascends concentricly through without touching it; and 0 is simply the plug, to be unscrewed when fresh oil is required. In order to explain my improvements in roof lamps, named under the second head of this my Specification, I will observe that I dispense with the inner 30 lining, as represented &tp,p, Figure 1, which enables me to increase the size of my reflector, as exhibited in a top view at Fig. 3; but in this case it is necessary to perforate or pierce holes through it around the edge, as repre- sented in this Figure, to allow the air to descend to the flame, or the reflector may not entirely fill up the space, in which case the air may pass down between 35 its edge and the glass or body of the lamp. Figure 4 represents the interior or working part of the lamp, as exhibited in connection with the outer case at Fig. 1; but I have drawn this detached, for the purpose of exhibiting the improvements named under the third head, and relating to the mode of supplying the reservoir with oil, and which consist in6 A.D. 1854.—N° 2233. Specification. Holdens Improvements in Roof Lamps for Railway , fyc. uniting the socket D to the supply and air tubes by means of the union joints q, q, by which I am enabled to reverse the socket D, and turn the reservoir down when the latter requires filling, and which may now be easily done by pouring the oil into the socket, which (in this position) forms a funnel for receiving it. 5 And the fourth part of my improvements in roof lamps consist in the appli- cation of a stop-cock to the supply tube, for preventing the oil flowing to the burner when the reservoir is supplied with oil from the top, as exhibited at 0, Figure 1, and in which Figure I have represented the stop-cock in dotted lines at r. 10 Figure 5 and 6, Sheet 2, represents my improvements in the stoppers of roof lamps, as stated under the fifth head of my improvements. S, S, are the straps or ears, united to the supply pipe by the pins t, t, on which they work, as exhibited by the dotted lines, Figure 6, the screw head u being tapped through the centre of the straps, and then united to the conical stopper, shewn out in 15 Figure 6, and in at Figure 5, so that when the reservoir requires filling, the conical stopper is drawn out, as exhibited, and moved in the direction of the dotted lines, leaving the supply pipe free for receiving the oil when it has to be brought back to its proper position against the stop V, and the stopper firmly screwed in. 20 And Figure 7, Sheet 1, represent my improvements as stated under my sixth head, and refer to rectangular lamps, and in which Figure I have represented the body of the lamp in section, as also the oil chamber A1, A1, the rest portion being exhibited in a front view, as it would appear in the lamp, in like manner as I have represented my improvements in Figure I; and the advantage of 25 my improvements as exhibited in this Figure is derived from the position of the oil chamber, which heretofore have been placed in such lamps below the flame, occupying much space, and necessarily elevating the burner, which has been found highly objectionable; whereas my arrangement (as here exhibited) enables me to keep the burner low, and to extend down the side reflectors 30 B1, B1; and again, by keeping the flame low the light meets the top reflector C1 at a more suitable angle for distributing the light. The arrows d\ e\ and f,g\ shew how the lamp is supplied with air, while the air tube H1 keeps the cotton holder cold; and I have also found in this case, as in Figure 1, that the best result is obtained by observing the position of the fence J1, J1, 35 as it greatly improves the light, and thoroughly ventilates the lamp by inducing a strong and continuous current of air to pass through it. Figure 8 is a transverse section taken through K1, K1, of the last Figure, and which exhibits the form of the hole e\ g1, where the air comes throughSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2233. Hoickin's Improvements in Roof Lamps Railway Carriages, 7 to supply the flame, as indicated by the arrows; and also shewing (in a sectional form) the reflectors B\ B\ and B\ B1, which I prefer meeting at or about the angle shewn in the Drawing, as it increases the size of the reflectors. 5 Figure 9 is a side and end view of the cotton holder. The springs n\ n\ may be soldered on or formed out of the brass of which the cotton holder is made, as here represented by the dotted lines o\ o\ and afterwards bent up into the required shape. Figure 10, Sheet 2, represents the mode in which I strengthen the cross rails 10 of railway carriages, as named under the seventh head of this my Specifica- tion ; P1, P1, being a plate of iron, brass, or other suitable metal, applied each side of the rail, and screwed with common screws, or screws with nuts, as seen in the edge view at Figure 11, the wood part V1, V1, being represented as grained; and I may observe that in making this Drawing I have adhered to 15 no particular scale, as they can be made to any form or size necessary; and it will be seen that the bevelled edges of the plate is intended to meet in the middle of the rail, for the purpose of exposing as much of the light as possible, while the surfaces of the bevel part Q,1, Q1, may be plated or coated with any vitreous material, for the purpose of reflecting the light; nor am I confined to 20 the use of a flat surface in the reflecting part, as that portion may be curved, as represented at R1, R1, Figure 11, or corrugated in a radial form; or the reflector may be made separate, as represented in the top and front view, Figures 12 and 13, the part S1 being made of glass, china, or any other vitreous material, and held in its position by the iron plates, shewn only at 25 T1, T1, and T1, T1, Figure 13. Figure 14, Sheet 2, represents a reflector drawn according to the eighth or last part of my Specification, and which may be made of glass, china, or other suitable plastic material, as also of cast or stamped iron, and enamelled in any desired colour; and this form of reflector I intend to be screwed or secured against 30 the roof of railway carriages at that part where the lamp would be required, and in such a manner that the light and glass of the lamp should pass down through it, as shewn in dotted lines at Y, Y, Figure 1, in which case this kind of reflector will not only be beneficial as a reflector, but also to form a neat and elegant finish around the lamp, and is capable of much diversifica- 35 tion in design and manner of constructing, as it may be formed of glass, and cut or moulded in the most approved shape for increasing the reflecting surface or for deflecting the light; or a series of prisms may be cut in a radial form and secured to a suitable plate, and which plate may be secured by suit- able means to the carriage; but in this case I have represented in a broken8 A.D. 1854.—N° 2233. Specification. Holclens Improvements in Roof Lamps for R Carriages, §c. form a brass basil, as at W\ W1, having a flange at the bottom edge lapping over the reflector, the upper part of the basil or rim being screwed to the roof of the carriage, as will be best understood by referring to Figure 15, which represents part of a section of the reflector and basil, shewing the holes X1, X1, by which it may be screwed or secured to the carriage; but as this reflector is 5 more particularly applicable to circular lamps, I have thought proper to shew in what manner roof or horizontal reflectors may be applied where rectangular lamps are used. A11, A11, Figure 16, represents a suitable rim, which may be of brass, or brass plated, or any other suitable material, and which rim may be secured by screws 10 passing through holes (as here shewn), or by means of pins, soldered to the reverse side, and passed through holes, and secured by screws on the top side of the carriage; and B11 may be a piece of plate glass (silvered on the top side), or any other suitable reflector may be used ; and Figure 17 simply represents a section of the last Figure taken through D11 and Eu. 15 Having thus described the nature of my Invention, and the manner in which the same may be carried into effect, I wish it understood that I do not confine myself to the exact shape or proportions as exhibited in the Drawings ; but what I claim as my Invention is,— Firstly, the general arrangement of circular roof lamps, as exhibited at 20 Figure 1 and 2, without confining myself to the use of one air tube, as it may be necessary in some instances to use two or more. Secondly, in so constructing circular roof lamps that the inner lining may be dispensed with. Thirdly, I claim the improvements in roof lamps as exhibited at Q,, Q, 25 Figure 4. Fourthly, I claim the use of a stop-cock or valve to the supply pipe of such lamp's, for the purpose of preventing the oil flowing down to the burner while trimming, without any regard to the shape or position of the stop- cock or valve. Fifthly, I claim the uniting of the stoppers to the reservoirs of roof lamps, without confining myself to the exact manner and details, as exhibited at Figure 6. Sixthly, I claim the general arrangement or construction of rectangular lamps, as set forth at Figures 7 and 8. Seventhly, I claim the improvements in connection with roof lamps, exhibited at Figures 10, 11, 12, and 13, without any regard to the shape of such plates or reflectors. And, lastly, I claim the use of horizontal or crown reflectors, as exhibited at 80 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2233. 9 Holdens Improvements in Roof Lamps for Railway Carriages, fc. Figures 14, 15, 16, and 17, without any regard to the shape or material of which such reflectors may be made, or to the manner of attaching them to the roof of railway or other carriages. In witness whereof, I, the said Howard Ashton Holden, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Seventeenth day of April, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. HOWARD ASHTON HOLDEN, (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.KJ) .18 54.0CT.18 .¥92233. HOLDER’S SPECIFICATION. fz SHEET SHEET 1. r\ o F I C . 8. * ~T I/ieftkd dr cavingLIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY. OF ILLINOIS A.D .1854.0CI.18 J9V 2233. HOLDER’S Specification. A SHEETS/ SHEET 2 The filed' drawing Is noP colored. • DramL aaSlmeliyMalby & Sous. W- I .. ASA ,r. ,:/k. Lonwmtc JIb^WGeoShsb Eoy^lTfraaitf^^ . , Jeters to teQueeAmostMeleEtMajes^. 1855. : fd/:-/;, library OF THE u»'ve«s!iy or auttomA.D. 1854 N° 2234. Rods used in the Construction of Metallic Furniture. % LETTERS PATENT to Robert Walter Winfield, of Birmingham, in the County of Warwick, Merchant and Manufacturer, for the Invention of “ An Improvement or Improvements in Tubes and Rods used in the Construction op Articles of Metallic Furniture.” Sealed the 3rd April 1855, and dated the 19th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Robert Walter Winfield at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 19th October 1854. I, Robert Walter Winfield, of Birmingham, in the County of Warwick, 5 Merchant and Manufacturer, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention for “ An Improvement or Improvements in Tubes and Rods used in the Construction of Articles of Metallic Furniture” to be as follows:— My said Invention consists in coating the iron rods and tubes used in the construction of metallic furniture with zinc, tin, or other metal or alloy, and 10 afterwards passing the said coated tubes through a draw plate* whereby the surface of the coating is rendered smooth. Tubes and rods thus made have a better appearance than uncoated rods and tubes of iron, and the said coating defends the said iron from rust. The smooth surface produced by drawing is also better for japanning upon (where the articles are to be japanned) than the 15 rough surface of the iron rod or tube.2 Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2234. Winfield's Impts. in Tubes $ Rods for the Construction of Metallic Furniture. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Robert Walter Winfield in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 17th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Robert Walter Winfield, of Birmingham, in the County of Warwick, Merchant 5 and Manufacturer, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Nineteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said 10 Robert Walter Winfield, Her special licence that I, the said Robert Walter Winfield, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Robert Walter Winfield, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, 15 use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “An Im- provement or Improvements in Tubes and Rods used in the Construction op Articles of Metallic Furniture,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Robert Walter Winfield, by an instrument in writing under go my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. 25 NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Robert Walter Winfield, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say) :— My said Invention consists in treating the iron rods and tubes used in the 30 construction of articles of metallic furniture in the following manner:_I coat or cover the said rods and tubes with zinc, tin, copper, or other metal or alloy, and afterwards pass the said tubes and rods through a draw plate, such as is used for drawing metallic tubes ; or I pass the said coated rods and tubes through a collar of any suitable metal or material, the metal or material of 35 which the said draw plate or collar is composed being varied to suit the metal or alloy with which the rods and tubes are coated; a hard draw plate or collarSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2234. 3 Winfield's Impts. in Tubes fy Rods for the Construction of Metallic . being used with a hard metal or alloy on the coated rods and tubes, and a soft draw plate or collar being used with a soft metal or alloy on the coated rods and tubes; the said draw plates and collars being made, by preference, and where practicable, of a material harder than the metal or alloy on the rod or 5 tube to be drawn through the said draw plates and collars. By this drawing process, a smoothness is given to the coated rod or tube, which has a better appearance when the rods or tubes are made into furniture than the rough surface of uncoated iron tubes and rods, or coated tubes or rods the surface of which has not been smoothed. I sometimes improve the 10 smoothness given by drawing, by afterwards polishing the surface of the coated rods or tubes with rotten stone, or by any of the other well-known methods of polishing metals. I use the rods and tubes made according to my Invention in the manufacture of bedsteads, couches, chairs, and such other articles of furniture as are or may be made of metal. 15 My Invention is applicable to rods and tubes of a cylindrical, prismatic, or other figure, as well as to conical or taper tubes, whether the said conical or taper tubes are fluted with plane, convex, or concave, or other flutes, or any combination of the said flutes. My Invention is also applicable to twisted tubes and rods, and to rods and 20 tubes of all such forms as are or may be produced by the process of drawing. The coating of the said rods and tubes with zinc, tin, copper, and other metals and alloys is effected by processes well known and commonly practised, and as the said coating processes constitute no part of my Invention, I do not con- sider it necessary to describe the same. Where it is thought desirable, the 25 rods and tubes made according to my Invention may be lacquered or varnished for the purpose of preserving the polish; or they may be painted or japanned, the smooth surface of the said rods and tubes being better adapted for painting or japanning upon than the uncoated and rough iron tubes usually employed in the construction of articles of metallic furniture. 30 Having now described the nature of my said Invention, and the manner in which the same is to be performed, I wish it to be understood that I do not limit myself to the precise details herein described, as the same may be varied without departing from the nature of my said Invention; but I claim as my said Invention, manufacturing tubes and rods used in the construction of articles 35 of metallic furniture in the manner herein explained; that is to say, by coating tubes and rods of iron with zinc, tin, copper, or other metal or alloy, and giving a smooth or polished surface to the said coated tubes by drawing the same through draw plates or collars, which said tubes and rods may have a4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2234. Specification. Winfield's Impts. in Tubes $ Rods for the Construction of Metallic Furniture. higher polish given to them by any suitable polishing process, and be lacquered, varnished, painted, japanned, or otherwise ornamented. In witness whereof, I, the said Robert Walter Winfield, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Sixteenth day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. 5 ROBERT WALTER WINFIELD. (l.s.) Witness, Thos Simpson, Accountant. LONDON: Printed by Geobge Edwabd Eyee and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.WW^VVWVNAi\VWWWW>A A.D. 1854 ............N° 2235. Shirt Fronts. LETTERS PATENT to Benjamin Nicoll, of No. 42, Regent Circus, Piccadilly, in the County of Middlesex, and of 46, Lombard Street, in the City of London, Shirt Maker, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Shirt Fronts." Sealed the 18th April 1855, and dated the 19th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Benjamin Nicoll at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 19th October 1854. I, Benjamin Nicoll, of No. 42, Regent Circus, Piccadilly, in the County of 5 Middlesex, and No. 46, Lombard Street, in the City of London, Shut M^aker, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “Improvements in Shirt Fronts ” to be as follows:— These improvements consist in a novel and peculiar mode of manufacturing the fronts of shirts, so as to combine two qualities of linen of different degrees 10 of texture in one and the same piece of material, whereas by the modes here- tofore practised of manufacturing shirt fronts, the material is made of the same texture throughout. But in order to explain the nature of these im- provements more fully, I now proceed to describe the means by which they may be carried into practical effect, and by which the shirt front is rendered 15 more durable, better “setting,” and less expensive than shirt fronts as hereto- fore constructed; that is to say, I manufacture linen in stripes of the width2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2235. Provisional Specification. Nicoll's Improvements in Shirt Fronts. which the plaits or exposed parts of the shirt front are required to be, and these plaits or exposed parts I make of very fine linen, whilst those parts or stripes of the shirt front which are between and underneath the fine stripes, and which are not exposed to view, I make of coarser linen, and thus I render unnecessary the drawing of a thread in making up the front for getting the plait straight and even, as commonly practised, and thereby render the shirt front more durable ; and by making the aforesaid unexposed parts of the front of stouter material than the exposed parts, as above stated, I give solidity to the front, and cause it to “ set ” better than if it were made of the same texture throughout, as before stated. And it is this novel and peculiar mode of manufacturing the fronts of shirts, by making the material of different degrees of texture, which constitutes this Invention of improvements in shirts fronts. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Benjamin Nicoll in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 19th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Benjamin Nicoll, of No. 42, Regent Circus, Piccadilly, in the County of Middlesex, and of 46, Lombard Street, in the City of London, Shirt Maker, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Nineteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Benjamin Nicoll, Her special licence that I, the said Benjamin Nicoll, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Ben- jamin Nicoll, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Shirt Fronts,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Benjamin Nicoll, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in wdiat manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. 10 15 20 25 50 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2235. s Nicoll's Improvements in Shirt Fronts. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Benjamin Nicoll, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say) :— 5 My improvements in shirt fronts relate to a novel and peculiar mode of manufacturing the fronts of shirts, so as to combine two qualities of linen of different texture in one and the same piece of material, whereas by the modes heretofore practised of manufacturing linen for shirt fronts, the material is made of the same texture throughout. But in order to explain the nature 10 and object of these improvements more fully, I will proceed to describe the means by which the same may be carried into practical effect, and by which the shirt front is rendered much more durable, better “ setting,” and less expensive than shirt fronts as heretofore manufactured; that is to say, I manufacture the linen or material in stripes of the width which the plaits 15 (or the exposed or outward part of the plaits) of the shirt front are required to be, and these plaits or the exposed parts thereof I manufacture of very fine linen or material, whilst those parts or stripes of the shirt front which are underneath and between the fine stripes, and are not exposed to view, I manufacture of coarser linen or material, thus economizing the 20 cost of the material, and at the same time saving labor and time in making up the shirt front, by rendering unnecessary the drawing out of threads, as commonly practised, in order to get the plaits straight and even, as the junction of the fine and coarse stripes form a sufficient guide to work by. Shirt fronts thus made are also much more durable than those wherein the 25 threads are drawn, and by making the aforesaid unexposed portions or stripes of a stouter or coarser material, as above stated, I give a greater degree of solidity to the shirt front, and thus cause it to set much better than if it were made of the ordinary linen or material manufactured of the same texture throughout. The method of manufacturing the linen or material in 30 alternate stripes of fine and coarse material for this purpose is by suitably arranging and “ reeding ” the warp threads in the loom, the weft or “ shoot thread being of uniform strength, and the “ beating-up ” remaining the same throughout. Having thus fully described and set forth the nature and object of my said 35 Invention of “ Improvements in Shirt Fronts,” together with the manner of carrying the same into practical effect,” I would remark, in conclusion, that I claim as my Invention, the novel and peculiar mode of making snirt fronts as herein-before described and set forth, by manufacturing the linen or material to be employed therefor in alternate stripes of fine and coarse texture in4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2235. Specification, Nicoll’s Improvements in Shirt Fronts. one and the same piece, in the manner and for the purposes above particularly set forth. In witness whereof, I, the said Benjamin Nicoll, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Nineteenth day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. BENJAMIN NICOLL. (l.s.) Witness, C. R. Hooper, 42, Regent Circus. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2236. Boots, Shoes, &c. LETTERS PATENT to Samuel Mason, Shoe Manufacturer, and William Beeby, Clicker, both of Northampton, in the County of Northampton, for the Invention of “ Certain Improvements in the Manufacture op Coverings tor the Human Leg and Foot.” Sealed the 17th April 1855, and dated the 19th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Samuel Mason and William Beeby at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 19th October 1854. We, Samuel Mason, Shoe Manufacturer, and William Beeby, Clicker, 5 both of Northampton, in the County of Northampton, do hereby declare the nature of our Invention for “ Certain Improvements in the Manufacture of Coverings for the Human Leg and Foot ” to be as follows:— The first part of our Invention is for a blocked “ upper leather.’ We cut out of a skin or hide a peice of leather, the size required, of an egg shape; 10 then make incisions near the centre, to form the tongue or lace peices and back peice, or the tongue and back peice, arranging this as the pattern may require ; we then pass a block of wood, the shape of the human foot, thro the centre incisions when wet, and block out, by means of stretching, an upper leather, or part of an upper leather, with tongues, lace pieces, or back pieces, 15 thrown up by the blocking. To these tongues, lace pieces, and back pieces is attached cloth, elastic material, or leather of various kinds; thus, out of this flat peice of leather when blocked is made a seamless quarter d covering for the human foot, called an “ upper leather.”2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2236. Provisional Specification. Mason Wy3 with/PrevwJxnaZ SjiexxfuxxJjMru wpeerffy colored?. (1 SHEET.) Xfcawti. on Stone i^Malhy k Sons . Loxdojst. ftmted by George Edward Eyke and William. Spoxtiswoore , Printers to the Queen’s jnos t Excellent Majesty. 1855. '&id(1 SHEET) A.J). 1854. Oct.19J*?2237 JWTAINEMOJtEAlT’ S SKECrFlOOKW FI C. 2 FIG. 4 / / 7\ \ FIC. 3 2}lc -/vied/ drYEWiTig is -pocrtfyr colored/. Dram on Stone Ly Malby & Sons lomojr. Pxmtedby George Edward Eyre andWnxiAM Spottiswoode ftiotecstothe Queers most Melleiit Majesty. 1855.library OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2238. Machinery for the Manufacture of Bricks. LETTERS PATENT to John Platt, of Oldham, in the County of Lancaster, Mechanical Engineer, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Making Bricks.” Sealed the 17th April 1855, and dated the 19th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said John Platt at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 19th October 1854. I, John Platt, of Oldham, in the County of Lancaster, Mechanical 5 Engineer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improve- ments in Machinery or Apparatus for Making Bricks,” to be as follows:— My improvements relate to brick-making machinery, in which a series of travelling moulds is employed, and consist, firstly, in supplying the material thereto by an arrangement which allows a sufficient quantity to be admitted 10 to them for the formation of the bricks, and then closes the orifice through which it issues until the said moulds are prepared for the reception of another supply. In order to illustrate my Invention, I will point out an arrangement I adopt, supposing that the machine is upon that principle for which Letters Patent were granted to James M°Henry, dated 20th July 1852. 15 According to my improvements, I divide the hopper into two parts, answering to the two sets of reciprocating moulds employed. Each of these hoppers is capable of being opened and closed at its lower end by a sliding plate or by a door. As a set of moulds advances alternately from each side,2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2238. Provisional Specification. Platt’s Improvements in Machinery for Making Bricks. a cam upon the axis of the pressing roller opens a corresponding slide or door, so as to admit a certain quantity of material, and subsequently closes it. The substance to be moulded I feed through a shoot, capable of being divided by a moveable guide, so as to direct the supply to each hopper alternately. In order to stir the material delivered to the moulds, I apply revolving shafts, furnished with a number of projecting arms. Instead of the slides or doors, above described, I can use other apparatus to accomplish the same object, as, for instance, revolving stops, which may at intervals allow the material to pass in sufficient quantity for one or for a series of bricks. Another part of my Invention applies particularly to that construction and arrangement of machine for which Letters Patent were granted to James McHenry aforesaid, and consists in the use of apparatus for positively drawing down the pistons within the moulds, instead of allowing them to® descend by their own weight, as described in the Specification of the said Patent. I cause the ends of the piston rods to pass into a T groove, formed upon the bar, which raises them for the discharge of the bricks; this groove will therefore draw down the pistons on its return motion. Another improvement relates to the apparatus for sweeping off the pressed bricks, and consists in arranging it so as to cause it to arrive in contact with the bricks one after another. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said John Platt in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 19th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, John Platt, of Oldham, in the County of Lancaster, Mechanical Engineer, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Nineteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said John Platt, Her special license that I, the said John Platt, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said John Platt, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2238. 3 Platt's Improvements in Machinery for Making Pricks. exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Making Bricks,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said John Platt, by an instrument in writing under my 5 hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said John Platt, do hereby declare the 10 nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement and accompanying Drawings (that is to say):— My improvements relate to brick-making machinery in which series of travelling moulds are employed, and consist, firstly, in supplying the material 15 thereto by an arrangement which allows a sufficient quantity to be admitted to them for the formation of the bricks, and then closes the orifice through which it issues until the said moulds are prepared for the reception of another supply. The substance to be moulded is fed through a shoot, capable of being divided by a moveable guide, so as to direct the supply to each of two hoppers 20 alternately ; and in order to stir the material delivered to the moulds, I apply revolving shafts, furnished with projecting arms. Another part of my Invention applies particularly to that construction and arrangement of machine for which Letters Patent were granted to James McHenry, bearing date Twentieth day of July, One thousand eight hundred 25 and fifty-two; and consists in the use of apparatus for positively drawing down the pistons within the moulds, instead of allowing them to descend by their own weight, as described in the Specification of the said Patent. Also, as regards the aforesaid machine of the said James McHenry, another improvement consists in so constructing or arranging the apparatus for 30 sweeping forward the pressed bricks that it shall arrive in contact with them one after another. And in order that my Invention may be fully understood, I have appended to this my Specification a Drawing exhibiting the several improvements combined, and which I will now proceed to describe. 35 Fig. 1 shews in side elevation a portion of a brick-making machine con- structed upon the principle of that patented by James McHenry aforesaid; and Fig. 2is a vertical section of the same. The moulds are shewn at a, constructed in a framing which is supported by the rollers and above them is situate the roller c, for pressing the clay therein. This roller is situate4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2238. Specification. Platt's Improvements in Machinery for Making Bricks. within a trough d, on the top of which are placed two shoots e, f, joining in one at g, and capable of being opened alternately thereto by means of a partition h, mounted so as to turn upon a hinge joint i; to the axis of this joint is affixed a lever j, connected by a link to a lever Jc, turning upon a fixed centre at Z, and provided at bottom with a roller m, situate within a grooved 5 cam n. The centre pin of the roller m passes through a bar o, mounted in guides p, and to this bar are attached two plates q*, placed in grooves formed by divisions of the lower parts of the hoppers. The piston rods r are formed with T ends, which pass as they travel onward into grooves s, formed in the parallel lever, or table w, 'used for discharging the pressed 10 bricks from the moulds by the means described in the Specification of James McHenry aforesaid. The rail for sweeping the bricks forward when elevated is shewn at f, and in the detached plan view, Fig. 3, it is formed in steps, so that the action shall take place upon the line of bricks one after the other, instead of arriving in contact with the whole range at once. 15 According to the position shewn in the Drawing, a supply of material has been allowed to pass down the passage f in sufficient quantity to feed the set of moulds travelling in the direction of the arrow, and the plate q has been caused by the cam n to slide inward and shut off the supply. As the moulds travel onward beneath the pressing roller c, the material is 20 distributed by the action of revolving rollers n, put into motion by con- nection with a suitable moving part. The moulds having been thus filled, their return motion will take place, during which the revolution of the cam n will cause the bar 0 to slide, so as to close the bottom of the passage e by the plate q*, and turn over the partition h, by which means the clay 25 will be allowed to accumulate in the hopper e, beneath which the other set' of moulds (not shewn in the Drawing) will now arrive, and a further revolution of the cam will open the slide q*, in order to admit to them their supply of clay, the partition turning over into the position shewn, in order to prevent a further quantity from passing in that direction, and 30 to permit an accumulation in the hopper f, for the next advance of the moulds. Thus it will be seen that the hoppers e, f, are alternately charged with material ready to be delivered by the opening of the plates q, q*, to the two sets of moulds. A set of bricks having been moulded, the moulds moving in the direction of the dotted arrow, the T ends of the piston rods 35 will enter the groove s, formed in the parallel lever w, which being then caused to rise, will discharge them to be swept off by the apparatus above mentioned, after which the parallel lever w, being caused to descend, will draw down the pistons by the action of the groove upon the T ends of the rods. InSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2238. 5 Platt's Improvements in Machinery for Making BricJcs. order to provide for the discharge of a superabundent quantity of material delivered to the hoppers, openings x, are formed therein, through which it may pass to any convenient receptacle. Having thus described and ascertained the nature of my said Invention, and 5 the manner in which the same is to be performed, I desire it to be understood that I do not confine myself to the precise arrangement and construction of parts shewn, as many modifications may be made which will readily suggest themselves to competent persons; for instance, instead of the sliding plates q, q*, and partition h, revolving stops may be used to effect the same object; also, in 10 the case of the apparatus t, the steps may be made so as to take two or more bricks at a time; also, instead of the T ends being formed on the pistons, they may be provided with grooves, which will pass on to projections formed on the parallel lever; that which I claim as secured to me under the above in part recited Letters Patent being,— 15 Firstly, as applied to brick machines with travelling moulds, the application of hoppers with suitable apparatus for determining the supply of material, by opening and shutting the orifice or orifices through which it passes. Secondly, as applied to the machine patented by James M°Henry aforesaid, the use of suitable apparatus for positively drawing down the pistons within 20 the moulds. Thirdly, sweeping off the pressed bricks by means of an apparatus which arrives in contact with one portion of the range at a time. In witness whereof, I, the said John Platt, have hereunto set my hand and seal, the Eighteenth day of April, in the year of our Lord One 25 thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. JNO. PLATT, (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855..... A.D.1854>. OcxoBER.19.Jf? 2238. PLA/TT’S Specification. y X. The/ filed/ drawuujf is rwt colored/, London. friptedbyGeorge Edward Eyrje OTAlWir.LuvM Sfottiswoode , 1 miters lo the Queen's inost Excellent Majesty. 1855. (i sb'eet.) Dra.w& on Sime-bcMalD\r XSunsUBRARY UN,vt^ onum*A.D. 1854 ............N° 2239. Regulating the Speed of Motive Power Engines. LETTERS PATENT to Thomas Biggart, of Dairy, in the County of Ayr, North Britain, Spinner, and Allan Loudon, of the same Place, Mechanic, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Regulating Motive Power Engines.” Sealed the 27th March 1855, and dated the 19th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Thomas Biggart and Allan Loudon at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 19th October 1854. We, Thomas Biggart, of Dairy, in the County of Ayr, North Britain, 5 Cotton Spinner, and Allan Loudon, of the same Place, Mechanic, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “Improvements in Regulating Motive Power Engines ” to be as follows:— This Invention relates to mechanism to be employed in connection with the ordinary ball or other similar governor of motive power engines, for the 10 purpose of securing a regular and uniform rate of working, and consists in connecting the lever of the throttle valve with a rack in gear with a pinion, which is made to turn in either direction, and so open or shut the throttle valve when the speed varies from the regular rate. The pinion is made in2 Provisional Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2239. Biggart Loudon's Improvements in Regulating Motive Power Engines. one piece with, or is fast on, the same spindle as a wheel or pair of wheels, with two sets of ratchet teeth, set in opposite directions upon their peripheries, or instead of this arrangement, the ratchet wheel may be fixed directly on the spindle or the throttle valve, the bevil wheel and rack being dispensed with. The ratchet wheel is encompassed by a frame, to which a uniform reciprocatory movement is given by suitably connecting it with any moving part of the engine, and this frame carries two catches or palls, which are each arranged to act on one of the sets of ratchet teeth. The reciprocating frame is so connected with the ball or other governor employed that the action of the latter may shift it laterally without interfering with its reciprocating motion; the parts are so arranged, that when the engine is running at its prescribed rate, the reciprocating frame will be in its central position ; and when it is in this position, neither of the palls will be in gear with the ratchet teeth. If, however, the rate of the engine changes, the governor will shift the recipro- cating frame to one side, so as to put one of the palls in gear with the ratchet teeth, and the motion of the frame will turn the ratchet wheel and pinion until the throttle valve is so far acted upon as to bring the engine back to the prescribed rate, by which time the governor will have shifted the reciprocating frame back to its central position, and the pall will cease acting on the ratchet teeth. It follows, with these arrangements, that the return of the governor to its normal position will not, as in the ordinary arrangement, shift back the throttle valve to the position it was in before the change took place; the two sets of ratchet teeth only reach in either direction to a sufficient extent to shift the throttle valve to the positions in which it is either full open or quite shut, so that if from any cause the engine continues to act on the reciprocating frame after either of these points have been attained, this frame will move without acting upon or straining the connections. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Thomas Biggart and Allan Loudon in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 17th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, we, Thomas Biggart, of Dabry, in the County of Ayr, North Britain, Spinner, and Allan Loudon, of the same Place, Mechanic, send greeting. 5 10 15 20 25 30Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2239. 3 Biggart Loudon's Improvements Regulating Motive Power Engines. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Nineteenth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto us, 5 the said Thomas Biggart and Allan Loudon, Her special license that we, the said Thomas Biggart and Allan Loudon, our executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as we, the said Thomas Biggart and Allan Loudon, our executor's, administrators,. or assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term 10 therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Regulating Motive Power Engines,” upon the condition (amongst others) that we, the said Thomas Biggart and Allan Loudon, by an instrument in writing under our 15 hands and seals, or under the hand and seal of one of us, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. 20 NOW KNOW YE, that we, the said Thomas Biggart and Allan Loudon, do hereby declare the nature of our said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement in writing, reference being had to the accompanying Drawings, and to the letters and figures marked thereon, that is to say:— 25 Our said Invention relates to mechanism to be employed in connection with the ordinary ball or other similar governor of motive power engines, for the purpose of securing a regular and uniform rate of working, and consists in connecting the lever of the throttle valve or steam-current regulator with a rack in gear with a pinion, which is made to turn in either direction, and so 30 open or shut the throttle valve when the speed of the engine varies from the regular rate. The pinion is made in one piece with, or is fast on, the same spindle as a wheel or pair of wheels, with two sets of ratchet teeth, set in opposite directions upon their peripheries; or instead of this arrangement, the ratchet wheel may be fixed directly on the spindle of the throttle valve, 31 the pinion and rack being dispensed with. The ratchet wheel is encompassed by a frame, to which a uniform reciprocatory movement is given by suitably connecting it with any moving part of the engine, and this frame carries two catches or palls, which are each arranged to act on one of the sets of4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2239. Specification. Biggart <$f Loudon s Improvements in Regulating Motive Rower Engines. ratchet teeth. The reciprocating frame is so connected with the ball or other governor employed, that the action of the latter may shift it latterally without interfering with its reciprocating motionthe parts are so arranged, that when the engine is running at its prescribed rate, the reciprocating frame will be in its central position; and when it is in this position, neither of the palls 5 will be in gear with the ratchet teeth. If, however, the rate of the engine changes, the governor will shift the reciprocating frame to one side, so as to put one of the palls in gear with the ratchet teeth, and the motion of the frame will turn the ratchet wheel and pinion until the throttle valve is so far acted upon as to bring the engine back to the prescribed rate, by which time 10 the governor will have shifted the reciprocating frame back to its central position, and the pall will cease acting on the ratchet teeth. It follows, with these arrangements, that the return of the governor to its nornial position will not, as in the ordinary arrangement, shift back the throttle valve to the position it was in before the change took place. The two sets of ratchet 15 teeth only reach in either direction to a sufficient extent to shift the throttle valve to the positions in which it is either full open or quite shut, so that if from any cause the engine continues to act on the reciprocating frame after either of these points has been attained, this frame will move without acting upon or straining the connections. 20 And in order that our said Invention may be properly understood, we shall now proceed to describe the explanatory Figures on the Sheet of Drawings hereunto attached. Figure 1 on the Sheet of Drawings is a front elevation of one modification of our improved apparatus, to be applied to motive power engines in connec- 25 tion with the ordinary ball or similar governors; and Figure 2 is an edge or side elevation, corresponding to Figure 1. The details of the apparatus are carried in a light frame, consisting of two cast-iron standards A, tied together by cross rods B. This framing is formed with centres for a horizontal spindle C, upon which are fixed a pair of wheels or discs D, formed with ratchet teeth SO upon the greater portion of their circumferences, the teeth on the two wheels being inclined in opposite directions. These ratchet wheels are acted upon by two weighted palls or catches E, carried by an open frame F. This frame F is jointed to a rod G, which is connected to any reciprocating part of the steam engine, and transmits a reciprocating motion to the frame F in a vertical 35 direction; and the frame is formed with projections II, above which work inside a segmental guide I, screwed by a bracket to the frame A. A rod J is jointed to the frame F at any convenient point, by preference near the level of theSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2239. 5 Biggart df Loudon's Improvements in Regulating Motive Power Engines. spindle C, and this rod is jointed to the end of a lever K, fast on a rocking shaft L, through which the action of the ball or other ordinary governor is transmitted. The connections are so arranged, that when the engine is going at its prescribed rate, the frame F will be in such a position as to keep the 5 two palls E clear of the ratchet wheels D, and these ratchet wheels will not be affected by the vertical reciprocation of the frame F. If the speed of the engine rises or falls, however, the lever K will shift the frame F to one side or the other, so as to bring one of the palls into gear with the ratchet wheels D, when the reciprocating motion of the frame will cause these wheels to 10 turn as long as the pall is in gear with them. The motion of the wheels D, induced in the manner just described, is communicated to the throttle valve connections by means of a pinion fast upon the spindle C of the wheels D, and indicated in dotted lines at M. This pinion M is in gear with an intermediate pinion N, carried loose on a bracket stud pin bolted to the standard A. In 15 the special arrangement, represented in the Drawings, this intermediate pinion is merely requisite to reverse the motion to suit the other parts of the appa- ratus, and it may be dispensed with if the other details are suitably modified. The pinion N is in gear with a rack 0, formed on the upper end of a rod P, which works vertically in a guide Q, cast or fixed upon the framing, being 20 made to move up or down, accordingly as the ratchet wheels D move in one direction or the other. Lower down, a rack R is formed on one side of the rod P, and in gear with this rack is a pinion S, carried loosely on a pin at the upper end of a rod T, which passes down, and is connected to the lever U of the throttle valve. The pinion S is likewise in gear with a rack formed on 25 a rod V in guides W, cast or fixed on the standard, and to the lower end of the rod V is jointed a link X, which connects it to a lever Y, fast on the shaft L. This arrangement of racks, acting upon a pinion on the rod which shifts the valve lever, is adopted in order to combine the rapid action of the ordinary governor with the permanent action of the ratchet wheels and reciprocating 30 frame. If the rate of the engine varies, the ball or other governor will turn the shaft L, and actuate both the levers Y and K. The lever Y at once shifts the rod Y, which causes the pinion S to roll up or down the, as yet, stationary rack R, and so open or close the valve by means of the rod T. When the engine returns to its proper rate, the lever Y returns to its former position, 35 and it would make the valve also return to its former position, were not the rack R in the meantime to descend by the action of the ratchet wheels D and the reciprocating frame F, which frame has been put into gear with the ratchet wheels by the lever K. After the engine resumes its proper rate,6 A.D. 1854.—N° 2239. Specification. Biggart Loudon's Improvements in Regulating Motive Power Engines. the valve stops at the point to which it has been worked by the ratchet wheels and reciprocating frame, and this point may either be a greater or less distance from its original position than that to which it is shifted in the first instance by the lever Y. When the engine is brought back to its proper rate, the levers K and Y assume the positions represented in the Drawings, and the 5 frame F is so situated as to keep both the palls E clear of the ratchet wheels D. The amount of play between the points of the palls E can be regulated with the greatest nicety by means of the guide plates Z, in openings in which projections on the palls are made to fall. These guide plates Z can be adjusted by means of screws a, so as to allow the palls to fall more or less 10 near to the ratchet wheels, that is to say, so that a less or greater lateral movement of the frame F will be requisite to make them act on the ratchet wheels. The ratchet wheels are not made with teeth completely round their peripheries, but there is on each a blank space, as at b, which is so situated that the wheels D will not be urged round after the valve has been fully 15 opened or fully closed, so that if after the valve is so shut or opened, the pall from any cause remains in gear with the ratchet wheels, and the reciprocating motion goes on, none of the parts of the apparatus will thereby be strained or injured. A friction piece c is made to press on the face of one of the wheels D by the. action of a spring d, fixed to the top tie rod B, by which means the 20 wheels D are prevented from being jerked or turned round too far, or other- wise improperly shifted. Having now described and particularly ascertained the nature of our said Invention, and the manner in which the same is or may be used or carried into effect, we may observe, in conclusion, that we do not confine or restrict 25 ourselves to the precise details or arrangements which we have had occasion to describe or refer to, as many variations may be made therefrom without deviating from the principles or main features of our Invention; but what we consider to be novel and original, and therefore claim as the Invention secured to us by the herein-before in part recited Letters Patent, is,— 80 First, the general arrangement and construction of machinery, apparatus, or means to be applied to motive power engines, for the purpose of regulating their motion, as herein-before described. Second, the application and use, in connection with the ordinary ball or other governors of. motive power engines, of a constantly reciprocating frame, 85 carrying a pair of palls or catches, and arranged to act upon a ratchet wheel connected to The throttle valve, in the manner herein-before described. . Third, the system or mode of regulating motive power engines by. the agencySpecification. A.D. 1854.----------N° 2239. 7 Biggart S SPECIFIC AXIOTf. '1 SHEET/ F I 0 F I 0 . I 17w filed cbramng part/4/ colored/. Drawn an StaneTjy-TvfoIby& Sons, London: Printedby George Edward Eyre and'William Spotegswoodh ( Printers to the Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2240. Ventilating Ships and Mines. (Thu Invention received Provisional Protection, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Thomas Higgins at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 19th October 1854. I, Thomas Higgins, of Liverpool, in the County of Lancaster, Commander, Royal Navy, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improved g Apparatus applicable to the Ventilation of Ships and Mines and other useful Purposes,” to be as follows:— This Invention consists of two circular tubes or pipes, in which are placed shafts with screws formed upon them, so as to fill the space within the pipes, or nearly so. The screw shafts are mounted upon suitable bearings, and are jq each provided at the upper end with a fan turncap, which is acted upon by the wind, and which gives motion to the screw shafts. One of the screw shafts rotates so as to carry a current of air down the pipe, and the other, travelling in a reverse direction, will cause a current to travel up the pipe. By this arrangement it will be seen, that if the fan caps be acted upon by the wind, ^ and the lower ends of the pipes be introduced into, say, the hold of a ship, a constant current of air will be carried thereunto by one pipe, and discharged therefrom by the other. A screen (or hood) is attached to the top of the pipes, which is mounted so that it will shift round to protect the portion of the fan cap or wind propeller not required to be acted upon by the wind. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2241. Rocking and Lounging Chair. (This Invention received Provisional Protection, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by William Marsh at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 20th October 1854. I, William Marsh, of No. 11, Bywater Street, King’s Road, Chelsea, in the County of Middlesex, Upholsterer, do hereby declare the nature of the said 5 Invention for “ An Improved Rocking and Lounging Chair ” to be as follows:— This Invention consists of a lounging chair, which is capable of different degress of elevation and inclination, and also of being folded up into a small compass when required. The improved rocking and lounging chair is con- structed as follows:—The curved “ rockers ” are connected together by trans- it) verse rails or spindles, as usual. The hinder or backward ends of the “ rockers ” serve as fulcra, to which are attached two curved pieces, which form the hinder legs and the side rails of the seat. These curved side rails are also connected together by transverse rails or spindles. The back and the front legs of the chair are formed of two curved pieces, connected together by 15 rails. These latter curved pieces are connected to the before-mentioned curved side rails by means of a metal rod, working in slots underneath the chair, at the point of junction of the back and seat. The lower ends of the front legs of the chair are furnished with pins, which, when the chair is fixed for use, take into holes in the front part of the “ rockers.” The cushion or 20 stuffing of the back and seat are in one piece. The elbow rests are hinged to the side rails of the back, and the supports for the same are connected by pins to the side rails of the seat. The inclination of the back of the chair2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2241. Provisional Specification. Marsh's Improved Rocking and Lounging Chair. and tlie elevation of the seat of the same may be altered by placing the pins either forward or backward in the holes, as required. Upon withdrawing the pins from the holes altogether by raising the back, the chair may be folded together into a small compass for convenience of carriage or stowage, as required. When'it is not required as a rocking chair, it is to be steadied, by 5 placing scrolls under the ends of the curved rockers, so as to form them into a firm and solid base. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2242. Preserving Animal Substances. (This Invention received Provisional Protection, hut notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Louis Auguste Chenu and Francois Frederic Pillias at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 20th October 1854. We, Louis Auguste Chenu, Baker, and Francois Frederic Pillias, 5 Contractor, of the Town of Fontainebleau, in the French Empire, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Certain Improvements in Preserving Animal Substances ” to be as follows:— We prefer using for the purposes of our Invention the flesh of the fore and hind quarters of animals, as being the least sinewy and fat. We first cut up 10 the flesh in pieces, and then immerse it in boiling water for about two minutes, in order to deprive it of the portions likely to become putrid. After taking it out of the water, we place it for about a minute in a perforated vessel to allow it to drain. We next just plunge the flesh for about a second in a bath, composed of water and sal-ammoniac, in proportions which may be varied, 35 according to circumstances, and after removing it therefrom we spread it on a sieve or riddle, and leave it to dry for about 24 hours in a stove or drying chamber, maintained at a temperature of about 138° Fahrenheit. The meat is then read)’, and when thus prepared does not even require to be kept in hermetically closed cases, but may be exposed to the open air and JO to contact with other descriptions of food or articles. The meat thus prepared may be either cooked or eaten without further preparation. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2243. Electro-Magnetic Apparatus. LETTERS PATENT to Thomas Allan, of Adelphi Terrace, in the City of Westminster, Civil Engineer, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Applying Electricity.” Sealed the 3rd April 1855, and dated the 20th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Thomas Allan at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 20th October 1854. I, Thomas Allan, of Adelphi Terrace, in the City of Westminster, Civil 5 Engineer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improve- ments in Applying Electricity” to be as follows:— These improvements have reference to the details of an Invention for which former Letters Patent were granted to me, bearing date the 24th day of June 1852, under the title of “ Improvements in Producing and Apply- 10 ing Electricity, and in Apparatus employed therein; ” and consist, firstly, in the mode of transferring the current from one magnet to another; for which purpose I place two upright pieces of metal in front of a spring fixed to the connecting rods, the one being connected with one pole of the battery, and the other divided crossways into sections, each section respec- 15 tively being connected with the magnets, so that, as the connecting rod moves forward and downward, the spring presses on the upright pieces of metal, and2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2243. Provisional Specification. Allans Improvements in Applying Electricity. so forms a circuit through each magnet in succession. This may also be done by placing1 two zones or circles of metal (one divided into sections) on a plane at right angles to the shaft, so that an arm or spring affixed to the shaft will pass over the two zones, and so transfer the current, as before described. A friction roller on the end of the springs may be found necessary and 5 advantageous. Secondly, in a mode of forming the magnets for such purposes. I make them of several upright cores or poles, affixed to a flat plate, and polarized alter- nately as regards each other, and not in pairs, as so many pairs of horse-shoe magnets, by which arrangement I produce a magnet of many poles, with a 10 greater amount of accumulated force. Thirdly, in lieu of connecting rods I propose to use double piston rods with cross-head slides acting direct on the crank pin with or without a sliding bush. Fourthly, in lieu of cranks I propose to use an indented drum or ratchet 15 wheel, actuated by palls affixed to piston rods, so that pairs of magnets acting alternately on the piston rod or rods will cause rotation of the drum or shaft. Fifthly, in lieu of keepers, when the arrangement of the magnets is in pairs* as above, I propose to make one of the magnets of each pair moveable, and so 20 acting attractively and repulsively with the other that, is stationary. Permanent magnets may be substituted for either the moveable or stationary magnets. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Thomas Allan in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 25 20th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Thomas Allan, of Adelphi Terrace, in the City of Westminster, Civil Engineer, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters 30 Patent, bearing date the Twentieth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Thomas Allan, Her special licence that I, the said Thomas Allan, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Thomas gg Allan, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agreeSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2243. 3 Allans Improvements Applying Electricity. with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in 5 Applying Electricity,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Thomas Allan, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately 10 after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Thomas Allan, do hereby declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof, reference being had to the Drawings hereunto annexed, 15 that is to say :— These improvements have reference to the details of an Invention for which former Letters Patent were granted to me, bearing date the 24th day of June 1852, under the title of “ Improvements in Producing and Applying Electricity, and in Apparatus employed therein.” 20 My first improvement consists in a mode of transferring the current of electricity from one magnet to another in the series, when such magnets are arranged for obtaining motive power, according to the method described in the Specification of my former Patent aforesaid. For this purpose, I place two upright pieces of metal (say, of brass,) in the vicinity of each of the con- 25 necting rods in such arrangement, but separated or insulated from each other. The one of each pair of such pieces of metal (there being a pair for each connecting rod) is connected with one pole of the battery, and the other is divided into sections crossways, according to the number of magnets in the series, such sections being apart and insulated from each other, but each 30 section respectively being connected with a corresponding magnet in the series, each to each. On the connecting rod there is placed a spring, the breadth of which is equal to that of the two upright pieces of metal, and this spring is so arranged, that as the connecting rod moves forward and passes downwards by the rotation of the crank shaft, the spring presses forwards, g5 and slips in contact downwards on the strips of metal, and thereby forms the connection between the one pole of the battery terminating in the first- mentioned strip of metal and the sections of the other strip of metal, one after the other, by which means the current is transferred through the whole series of magnets successively. The strips of metal must have the proper4 A.D. 1854.—N” 2243. Specification. Allan's Improvements in Applying Electricity. curvature given to them, and must be planted or fixed on wood, or other non-conducting material. Figure 1 of the Drawings hereunto annexed represents a side, back, and front view of this apparatus, as applicable to vertical engines of the most simple form and arrangement; but for engines so arranged in their electro-magnetic serial parts as to be most suitable for extended purposes, as also for reversing, it will be more advantageous to apply this contrivance in a continuous and circular form, instead of having a distinct arrangement to each connecting rod, as before described. For this circular and continuous action, I fix a plane of wood or other non-conducting material at right angles to the engine shaft, with the shaft passing through its centre. On this plane of wood I place a circle or zone of metal, connected with one pole of a battery, and at a small distance on the same plane I place another zone, divided into sections, according to the number of magnets in each of the several series of the whole engine. An arm, placed on the engine shaft in juxtaposition to the aforesaid plane, and with a sufficient amount of spring in it to keep it in contact with the two zones, will, as the shaft rotates, press and pass over the two zones, and thereby transfer the current to each magnet in the several series successively, in the same manner as is effected by means of the strips of metal, before described. A friction roller may be placed on the sliding face of the spring or arm with great advantage. Figure 2 of the Drawings represents this arrangement; Figure 3 shews a double sectional zone, and by its employment, on shifting the spring or arm, the engine will be reversed; Figure 4 repre- sents two zones placed edgeways, or on the periphery of the plane of wood, in which case the wheel or roller on the arm will come in contact with the two zones sideways, as shewn in the Drawings; this will give the roller on the arm an advantageous sliding contact motion as the shaft moves round. The zones and roller may be so formed as to come in contact at various angles. If the sectional divisions of the strips or zones of metal are made at a slight angle, or in a slanting direction, the sliding face of the spring or roller will be on two sections at the same time, whereby the current will never be entirely broken, and the destruction or deflagration of the contact metals from the spark, when powerful and intense currents are required to be employed, will be prevented. My second improvement consists in a mode of forming electro-magnets for the purpose specially of obtaining motive power. The main feature of the method of obtaining motive power, described in the Specification of the Letters Patent granted to me as aforesaid, consists in the mode of applying and maintaining the maximum forces of electro-magnets exerted through a short space, so as to convert the same into “ stroke,” or to obtain 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2243. 5 Allans Improvements in Applying Electricity. therefrom such an amount of motion as might be rendered practically available in engines on an enlarged scale. The great desideratum in such engines is not to expend the galvanic force vertically, as in large and long-shaped magnets, but to apply and distribute it, so as to produce the greatest power 5 horizontally, although at a decrease of the striking distance. This I effect by taking several bars of iron and securing them to a flat plate, thus having as a magnetic surface the extreme ends or poles of many small and short magnets combined into one, in place of one large and long magnet, and so with the same consumption of battery acquiring an equal force, but over a greatly 10 extended surface. I therefore construct accumulative or compound magnets, having 4, 6, 8, 20, or any number of poles; the greater the number, the greater will be the amount of accumulation of force proportionately. I also find that, by adopting a certain method of arranging their polarities with reference to each other, I can obtain a much greater amount of magnetic 15 force from any given number than by simply arranging them in pairs, as so many horse-shoe magnets. For example: suppose I wish to form a compound magnet with 8 poles, instead of winding the wire so as to make the four poles on one side (norths) and the 4 on the other side (souths), I wind it so that they shall be norths and souths alternately, by which method each north is a 20 north pole to two or more souths, and vice versa, (and in extended arrange- ments to 3 or 4;) I thereby get the compound influence and effect of several magnets instead of 4 only, which is a great advantage for the purposes desired in electro-magnetic engines of the kind mentioned. Figures 5, 6, and 7 shew the arrangements of the magnetic influences. 25 My third improvement consists in employing, in lieu of connecting rods in electro-magnetic engines, double piston rods with cross-head slides, acting direct on the crank pin with or without a sliding bush. Figure 8 represents a double arrangement of magnets, placed face to face, with cross-head slides between them, so that by their alternate attractive 80 forces a reciprocating motion will be produced in the piston rods A, A, and by this means, with a four-throw crank shaft, there will be equivalent to eight pistons working on the shaft, thereby applying the power at the most effective position of the crank. The piston rods, as shewn, will work horizontally, but I do not confine myself to this particular arrangement. 85 My fourth improvement consists in employing, in lieu of cranks in electro- magnetic engines, an indented drum or ratchet wheel, actuated by palls affixed to piston rods, so that pairs of magnets acting alternately on the piston rods will cause rotation of the drum or ratchet wheel, and the shaft on which it is mounted. This will enable a greater amount of magnetic power to be com-6 A.D. 1854.—N" 2243. Specification. Allans Improvements in Applying Electricity. prised in a much smaller cubical space, by reducing the number of magnets required for an engine series, in some instances to two. Figure 10 shews a section of the magnet pillar rods and piston rods; and Figure 9, a side view of an engine having this arrangement adapted thereto. p, p, are the piston rods; m, to, to, the magnets; k, the keeper, affixed to the 5 piston rods; and o, o, the pillar rods of the engine; s is the ratchet wheel arrangement, where the ratchet wheel works between two plates, attached together and to the piston rods between, which are also attached to the pauls. The Drawing is shewn with one of the plates removed. Figure 11 represents another method of working the pauls. 10 My fifth improvement consists in dispensing with keepers when the arrange- ment of the magnets is in pairs, placed face to face, and in making one of the magnets of each pair moveable, and so acting attractively and repulsively with the other magnet that is stationary. Permanent magnets may be substituted for either the moveable or stationary magnets. 15 And having now described the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, I declare that I claim as my “ Improve- ments in Applying Electricity,”— First, the mode of constructing the breaks or valves of electro-magnetic engines, as herein-before described. 20 Second, the mode of arranging the polarities of many-poled or accumulative electro-magnets, applicable to direct-attraction-electro-magnetic engines, as herein-before described. Third, the employment of a cross-head slide and sliding bush in direct- attraction-electro-magnetic engines, as herein-before described. 25 Fourth, the employment of a ratchet wheel and double-paul arrangement for producing rotation in the shaft of an electro-magnetic engine from the direct attractive reciprocating motion of electro-magnets, as herein-before described. And, fifth, the substitution of magnets for keepers in the employment of 80 magnets arranged in pairs, as herein-before described. In witness whereof, I, the said Thomas Allan, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Eighteenth day of April, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. THOMAS ALLAN, (l.s.) 35 LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoodb, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855. A D 1854.0ct.20.N?2243'. ALLAN’S SPEcmcATioir. fl SHEET.) F I C.5. FIC.9. The filed draMang is not colored/ Dracm an Stone by ^Malby &, £>ans London: Pimtedby George Edward Eyre andWilltaai Spottiswo^^ Printers toliie QiifierilsiaostExcelleRtMajest}". 1855.library OF THE university or IllinoisA.D. 1854 N° 2244. Sewing Machines. (This Invention received Provisional Protection, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Julian Bernard at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 21st October 1854. I, Julian Bernaed, of Club Chambers, Regent Street, in the County of Middlesex, Gentleman, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for 5 “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Stitching ” to be as follows:— The first part of this Invention consists in balancing, or nearly so, the arm, slide, or lever which actuates the needle or needles of stitching machines, whether such arms actuate the needle or needles directly or otherwise; one way in which this may be accomplished by increasing the part or side of the 10 centre, marked A in the tracing, Figure 1, hereunto attached. The second part consists in imparting a lateral motion to arms for actuating the needles of stitching machines, whether such arms be worked on the prin- ciple illustrated or otherwise. Figure 2 on the tracing illustrates an example of this part of my Invention, where A marks the bracket, and B the stud, 15 which may also be placed upon a slide. The third part of my Invention consists in attaching or connecting one or both of the jaw pressers or arms for feeding or travelling the material to the arm which actuates the needle or needles. B, at Figure 1, and C, at Figure 2, illustrate modifications of this part of my Invention, and I place such arms or2 A.D. 1854.—N" 2244. Provisional Specification. Bernard's Improvements in Machinery for Stitching. jaws upon the same centre as the bracket; the spring arm B, Figure 1, is made to move laterally or otherwise with the bracket, while the jaw C, Figure 2, is secured fast upon the centre B. The fourth part of my Invention consists of imparting motion to the jaw or feeder by the arm A, Figure 1, whether directly or in combination with other 5 means employed for the purpose. Figure 3 shows an eccentric, on which the pin A, in Figures 2 and 3, acts as the arm moves; the eccentric cam or pin is made to act upon the spring lever C by being secured and placed in proper position in the bed plate for that purpose. Figure 4 shows another view of part of the arrangement, and C marks the spring lever on which the 10 eccentric acts. The fifth part of my Invention consists of the use and application of a slotted lever, cam, or slide in connection with a pin and roller, and I sometimes place the said slotted slide on a centre, so as to be easily actuated by any con- venient adjusting arrangements. D, at Figure 1, marks the slotted lever, 15 which I make curved, as shewn, which has the effect of lessening the friction of said roller ; E marks the centre of motion, and F marks the roller. The sixth part of my Invention consists of moving or travelling stitching machines upwards or laterally in the case, stand, or table which may contain them, and the mode I adopt from preference is illustrated at Fig. 5, where 20 A marks a slide, which moves vertically, and C the leg of the stand or table, shown in section; on the top of the slide is placed the table or platform which carries the machine, and moves up and down as desired. By these means the top D of the table or platform may be quite flat and hinged, so that when turned down, the machine is wound up by the handle F; and I place and 25 secure the arrangements for giving motion to the machine on the slide A, and the arrangements for actuating it may be either wound up before raising the machine or afterwards; and I sometimes place stitching machines in the form of a drawer, so that they may slide in and out of a table, and I place or dispose a work box or drawer in side part of the table, and cover the same 30 with silk, velvet, or other ornamental or fancy material. Figure 6 shows a sectional elevation of these improvements; where a marks the moveable table, screwed to the slide h; C represents the top framing of the stand or table; and d, the drawer; and e, e, the arrangements and place of the work-box; and I sometimes make the top of the table into a writing desk, or put or 35 combine a suitable writing stand or convenience for waiting in the stand or table of such machines. The seventh part of my Invention consists of an improved fly wheel for stitching machines, the object of which is to enable the operator to work theProvisional Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2244. 3 Bernard's Improvements in Machinery for Stitching. machine either by hand or power, at discretion. The half, or part A, at Figure 7, is loose upon the shaft D; but the other half B, and the clutch C, are fast upon said shaft. When the operator wishes or desires the power to drive the machine, he puts the clutch box in contact with the part A, and 5 when he wishes it not to act, withdraws the clutch; the machine then ceases to act. If desirable, he may work it by the handle E. The eighth part of my Invention consists of roughening or marking a number of circumferential grooves in the bed plate of the machine, or that part on which the material bears, or is pressed or lead. I also place or indent 10 circumferential grooves in the jaws of the pressers or travellers. Figures 8 and 9 illustrate this part of my Invention. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Etre and Wiliiam Spottiswoodb, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.I) . 1854 . Oct. 21JS'9 2244. BERKAHD’S Provisional seeciucaiion. (1 SHEET) The. drawing ZefiyyviTh/H-ovincnoT/SpeccHcaticn/ is /' London'; Etintedbj George EdwardandWilu^m SpomswooDE, Riitf crs to me Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855. Drawn on Stone IjrMalby- fr Sons.library OF THE UNIVERSITY OF (WUNOISA.D. 1854 N° 2245. Apparatus for Steering Ships. LETTERS PATENT to Julius Smith, of Gainford Place, Barnsbury Road, and Frank Sandom Thomas, of South Terrace, Walworth, for the Invention of “An Improved Apparatus for Steering Ships and other Vessels.” Sealed the 17th April 1855, and dated the 21st October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Julius Smith and Frank Sandom Thomas at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 21st October 1854. We, Julius Smith, of Gainford Place, Barnsbury Road, & Frank Sandom 5 Thomas, of South Terrace, Walworth, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ An Improved Apparatus for Steering Ships and other Vessels ” to be as follows, that is to say:— Our said Inventon, which has reference to improvements in steering appa- ratus, in which the ordinary screw is employed, has for its object to obviate 10 the dangers to which such apparatus have been hitherto exposed, namely, of being broken or disarranged by the striking of a sea against the rudder. And the mode in which we propose to carry out the aforesaid object is by interposing between the rudder head and the screw a lever composed of a hollow cylinder, which contains a spiral spring acted on by the mechanism 15 connected with the screw; the said spiral spring being of sufficient strength to resist the ordinary pressure from the working of the helm, and to convey the2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2245. Provisional Specification. Smith df Thomas Improved Apparatus for Steering Ships, fc. whole motion from the screw to the rudder head, as if a solid cylinder or other mechanism had been interposed ; at the same time that it will give way to the violent action of a sea upon the rudder, so as to prevent any pressure from being carried back to the screw. We claim the construction and employment in screw-steering apparatus of a cylinder containing a spiral spring, in the manner and for the purposes herein-before set forth and described. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Julius Smith and Frank Sandom Thomas in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 21st April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, we, Julius Smith, of Gainford Place, Barnsbury Road, and Frank Sandom Thomas, of South Terrace, Walworth, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-first day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto us, the said Julius Smith and Frank Sandom Thomas, Her special licence that we, the said Julius Smith and Frank Sandom Thomas, our executors, admi- nistrators, and assigns, or such others as we, the said Julius Smith and Frank Sandom Thomas, our executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “An Improved Apparatus for Steering Ships and other Vessels,” upon the condition (amongst others) that we, the said Julius Smith and Frank Sandom Thomas, by an instrument in writing under our hands and seals, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that we, the said Julius Smith and Frank Sandom Thomas, do hereby declare the nature of our said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascer- tained in and bv the following statement (that is to say):— 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2245. 3 Smith Thomas Improved Apparatus for Steering Ships, <$fc. Our said improvements, having reference to screw or ordinary steering apparatus, have for their object to obviate the dangers to which such steering apparatus have hitherto been exposed from the violent action of a wave or sea upon the rudder, by which the man at the helm was liable to be violently 5 impelled from his place by the reflex action of the said steering wheel, or the machinery to be disarranged in those cases where this contingency was provided against by locking the wheel. And the mode in which we propose to carry out the aforesaid objects is by interposing between the rudder head and the screw or the tiller a hollow cylinder containing a conical spring, of 10 the sort patented and known as the volute spring, which is actuated by the mechanism connected with the screw or the tiller; the said volute spring being of sufficient sti’ength to resist the ordinary pressure from the working of the helm, and to convey the whole motion from the screw or tiller to the rudder head, as if a solid cylinder or other solid mechanism had been interposed, 15 notwithstanding that the said spring will give way to the violent action of a sea upon the rudder, so as to take upon itself the strain otherwise thrown upon the screw or tiller. But in order that these our said improvements may be more fully understood and readily carried into effect, we now proceed to describe them by the aid of 20 the accompanying Drawings, reference being had to the letters and figures thereon marked (that is to say):— Fig. 1 represents a side elevation of our improved screw-steering apparatus; Fig. 2, a back or end elevation; Fig. 3, a top or plan view; Fig. 4, a transverse or vertical section, taken through the dotted line in Fig. 3 ; Fig. 5, a longitudinal 25 section of the cylinder, showing the working of the spring, and the several mechanical arrangements in connection therewith; Fig. 6, a top or plan view of a steering apparatus of the ordinary tiller construction, with our improve- ments attached; Figs. 7 and 8, front and side views of a simple mechanical contrivance, to be used in conjunction with the other portions of the said tiller- 30 steering apparatus, for the purpose of fixing or locking the steering wheel, so that the danger of the rudder and tiller chains being injured by the action of a heavy sea or wave may by the aid of the said springs be provided against, while the said steering wheel is so fixed or locked, at the discretion of the steersman, for the purpose of relieving him of much labor. Figs. 9 and 10, 35 side and top views, showing a modification of the said contrivance, the steering- wheel being removed in Fig. 10. In each Figure the same letters of reference denote similar corresponding parts. A, A, floor or deck of the vessel; B, B, vertical standards; C, C, steering- wheel; D, D, steering screw shaft; E, E, traversing nut through which the4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2245. Specification. Smith § Thomas Improved Apparatus for $c._________ said screw shaft works; F, F, link motion moving from pivot centres on the traversing nut; G, G, slide rod or guide pin, working through the boss of the intermediate shaft and cross head H, H, in connection with the rudder head; I, I, bracket standards; J, J, intermediate shaft; K, K, crank arm, firmly keyed to the said shaft, as shewn in the accompanying Drawings; 5 L, L, reacting spring cylinder; M, M, pronged tiller or lever, firmly fixed or fitted upon the bead of the rudder N, N ; 0, 0, screw nuts, upon which the reacting spring cylinder is mounted; P, P, cylinder rod, connecting the steer- ing wheel with the rudder through the intervention of the reacting spring; Q, Q,, reacting pressure spring, of any suitable strength; R, R, sliding 10 disks or washers, against which the ends of the reacting spring alternately press when the apparatus is in motion; S, S, regulating nuts, for shortening or lengthening the set of the spring ; T, T, flooring cap, through which the shaft of the rudder head works. In the apparatus shown at Fig. 6, a represents the rudder head; b, b, the 15 tiller; c, c, the tiller chains; d, d, the sheath blocks, through which the said tiller chains run in the ordinary manner; e, e, spring boxes or cylinders, secured to the deck or flooring of the ship or vessel; /, /, single-acting springs, one of which is placed in each box or cylinder; g, g, piston; h, h, piston or spring- rod ; i, i, ring head, for the purpose of attaching the said piston or spring rod 20 to the sheath blocks. In the apparatus for locking the wheel, shown at 'Figs. 7, 8, 9, and 10, j, j, represents a standard bracket, bolted to the deck or steering platform; k, k, stop or bolt turning on pivot Z, Z; m, foot bar acting on the same; n, n, detached portion of the steering wheel, showing the manner in which one 25 of the handles may be acted on by the said stop or bolt; o, o, shank, by which the said handle is secured to the steering wheel, and which should be made of metal, for use in conjunction with our locking apparatus; p, p, spring. I now proceed to describe the action of the apparatus under the first head of our Invention, shown in Figs. 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5, which is as follows:—The 30 steering wheel C being put in motion, the nut E is caused to traverse longitudinally by the movement of the screw shaft, and actuates the mechanism in conjunction with the cross arm K, through the intervention of the slide rod or guide pin G, working through the boss of the intermediate shaft and cross head H, H. This motion is communicated to the rudder head by the rigidity 85 of the spring, which, on the other hand, is so regulated as to give way to the violent action of a wave or sea upon the rudder, so that no backward motion may thence be communicated to the steering wheel. And in like manner, in the method of adapting our spring to the ordinary tiller-steering apparatus referredSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2245. 5 Smith , B5, the chambers or spaces in which the slides work ; B6, B6, the ports, which lead to the interior of the cylinder; B7, the eduction passage, which leads to the con- denser. The valve rod and consequently the slides are actuated by a cam or eccentric in the usual manner. This construction and arrangement enables 10 me to get the eduction valves close to the steam cylinder, by which much space is saved, and a considerable economy of steam is effected; and at the same time the induction and eduction valves are made to operate entirely independent of each other, by which means I am enabled to work the steam expansively to any extent without interfering with the egress of it from the cylinder. 15 My third improvement relates to steam engines in which the cylinder or cylinders are in an inclined or horizontal position, and refers to the mode of giving motion to the piston of the air pump. This I effect by attaching to the crank pin (or one of the crank pins) a short bar of metal, on which I fix another crank pin, nearer to the centre of motion than the one first mentioned. 20 On this second crank pin works the connecting rod, which actuates the piston of the air pumps. The nature of this improvement is shewn more particularly in Fig. 7, where C, a portion of the crank shaft; C\ the main crank; C2, crank pin, on which is fixed the bar of metal (or counter crank) C3, which carries the smaller crank pin C4, on which works the connecting rod which 25 actuates the piston of the air pump. The application of this improvement is further shewn in Figs. 10 and 11. This arrangement simplifies the construc- tion, and enables me to vary and regulate the motion of the piston of the air pump, and to place the air pump in a more convenient and secure position than is usual with the above class of engines. g0 My fourth improvement relates to compound steam engines in which the steam is worked expansively, and consists in the arrangement and relative positions of the cylinders and cranks, combined with a new and improved con- struction and arrangement of the valves, steam passages, and eccentrics of such steam engines, by which they are rendered more simple and effective 35 than by the common methods of construction. Fig. 8 represents a portion of a compound steam engine made according to my fourth improvement, the crank shaft, fly-wheel, and eccentrics being omitted, as not important, to the eluci- dation ; Fig. 9, a section through the line W, X, or Y, Z, in Fig. 8, to shewSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2248. 7 Jamieson's Improvements Steam Engines. more clearly tlie arrangement and position of tlie steam passages, valves, &c.; D, D, &c. the framework which supports the cylinders and working parts of the engine; E, E, high-pressure or non-condensing cylinder; E1, E1, piston rod; E2, E2, guide bar, the ends of which move in slides attached to the frame- 5 work, by which the parallelism of the piston rod is preserved ; E3, E3, connect- ing rod; F, F, valve casing, into which the steam is admitted from the boiler; F1, one of the induction slides (the other being of the same construction); F2, valve rod; F3, rocking shaft; F4, crank on rocking shaft; Fs, eccentric rod, by which motion is communicated from the eccentric through the rocking 10 shaft, &c. to the slide F1, &c.; G, G, low-pressure or condensing cylinder; G1, piston rod; G2, G3, guide bar, the ends of which move in slides attached to the framework ; G3, G3, connecting rod ; H, II, steam passages or ports, by which the steam passes from the high-pressure to the low-pressure cylinder ; I, I, intermediate slides or valves betwixt the two cylinders; I1, I1, valve rod ; 15 I2, lever on the rocking shaft I3, l3; I4, crank at the end of the rocking shaft I3; Is, I5, eccentric rod, by which motion is communicated from the eccentric through the rocking shaft, &c. to the slide I, I; K, eduction port; K1, eduction slide ; K2, valve rod. This valve, it will be seen, is of the same construction as that shewn in Figs. 4, 5, and 6. The valve rod K2 receives 20 motion from a rocking shaft, which has on it the crank K3, to which motion is communicated from the eccentric by means of the eccentric rod K4. L, educ- tion passage to the condenser. The position of the main cranks, acted upon by the connecting rods E3 and G3, is nearly the reverse the one of the other, a certain amount of lead (say, about one-eighth of the whole revolution,) being 25 given to the low-pressure crank, acted upon by the connection rod G3, and the positions of the eccentrics and slides regulated to correspond thereto. The cylinders are represented as being placed horizontally, but may obviously be placed vertically or inclined, if required. My fifth improvement consists in the construction, arrangement, and com- 30 bination of the cylinders, cranks, valves, steam passages, and eccentrics of compound steam engines in which the steam is worked expansively. First, I construct the high-pressure or non-condensing cylinder of a larger proportional size than usual, that is to say, about one-third to one-half the size or content of the low-pressure or condensing cylinder. Second, I construct and arrange 35 the induction valves and eccentrics at the high-pressure cylinder so as to cut off the steam when the piston has performed a part only of the stroke (more or less), according to the pressure of the steam and the resistance to be over- come. Third, I dispose the cranks with respect to each other so that a certain amount of lead, say, one-eighth to one-sixth of the whole revolution, or8 A.13. 1854.----------N° 2248. Specification. Jamiesons Improvements in Steam Engines. thereabouts, shall be given to the crank of the condensing or low-pressure cylinder, and at the same time arrange the valves and eccentrics so that the exhaust from the high-pressure cylinder to the low-pressure cylinder takes place precisely, or nearly so, at the instant the low-pressure crank is passing the dead centres. The nature of this improvement will be understood from Figs. 10 and 11 ; Fig. 11 representing aside view (a portion of the framework being removed to shew the interior); and Fig. 10, an oblique view, as seen from above. M, M, &c., framework by which the cylinders and moving parts are supported; N, N, high-pressure cylinder; N1, N1, piston rod ; N2, guide bar, the ends of which move in slides on the framework M, M, &c.; N3, con- necting rod; N4, crank; 0, 0, valve casing, which receives steam from the boiler, and which contains the induction valve, which is of the ordinary con- struction ; O', valve rod; O2, rocking shaft; O3, crank on rocking shaft, by ■which it receives motion from the eccentric O5, by means of the rod O4. The eccentric O5 is put in motion by the crank O6, which is connected to the main crank N4. P, low-pressure cylinder; P1, piston rod, the motion of which is kept parallel by means of a guide bar and slides; P2, connecting rod; P3, main crank on the crank axis P4, at the other of which is the high-pressure crank N4; P’, fly wheel; Q, Q, induction valve casings at low-pressure cylinder, which receive the steam from the valve of the high-pressure cylinder N, N, through the steam passages Q,1, Q,1. These induction valves are of the similar construction to the valves shewn at F1 and I, Fig. 9, and are con- nected to the valve rod Q2, which receives motion from the rocking shaft Q,3, which again receives motion from the eccentric Q/1 by means of the eccentric rod Q,4. It, R, eduction valve casing which contains the eduction valves, which are of the same construction as that shewn at K1, Fig. 9, and in Figs. 4, 5, and 6; R1, valve rod; R2, rocking shaft, which receives motion from the eccentric R:’ by means of the eccentric rod It4 and crank R3; S, eduction passage to the condenser S1; S2, hot well; S3, feed pump ; S4, injection pipe ; T, air pump; T1, air pump rod; T2, parallel motion to ditto; T:i, connecting- rod, which receives motion from a pin on the counter crank or bar T4, which is attached to the pin of the main crank P3, and is of the same construction as the counter crank or bar C3, Fig. 7 ; V, small crank on the short shaft V1, which has on it the eccentrics Q5 and R5. It will be seen that the cranks N4 and P3 are nearly in a reverse position one to the other. This arrangement is necessary, in order to allow the steam to pass directly across through the steam passages Q1, Q,1. A certain amount of lead is, however, given to the low-pressure crank P3 over the high-pressure crank N4, (say, one-eighth to one-sixth of the whole revolution,) and the relative positions of the eccentrics 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2248. 9 Jamiesons Improvements in Steam Engines. and valves regulated to correspond thereto, as before mentioned. The cylin- ders are represented as being in an inclined position, but may be placed in a vertical or horizontal position, if required. By combining and arranging the several parts in the manner described, I am enabled to construct steam engines 5 in which smoothness and ease of action is combined, with superior economy of steam. Figs. 1, 2, and 3, and Fig. 7, are on a scale of 1 inch to 1 foot; Figs. 8 and 9, on a scale of § inch to 1 foot; and Figs. 10 and 11, on a scale of -g inch to 1 foot; but it is obvious that the size of the several parts must be adapted to the power of the engine to be constructed. 10 Having thus described the nature of my Invention, and the manner in which the same is to be performed, I hereby declare that what I claim as new, and of my Invention, is as follows :— Under the head of my first improvement, I claim the application and adaptation of springs under the nuts which hold down the lids or covers of 15 metallic pistons, as set forth and described. I also claim the arrangement and construction of the metallic pistons, as set forth in Figs. 1, 2, and 3, and described. Under the head of my second improvement, I claim the application and construction of the eduction valve and eduction valve casing, as set forth in 20 Figs. 4, 5, and 6, and described. Under the head of my third improvement, I claim the mode of actuating the piston of the air pump, as set forth in Fig. 7, and described. Under the head of my fourth improvement, I claim the arrangement and construction of steam engines, as set forth in Figs. 8 and 9, and described. 25 Under the head of my fifth improvement, I claim the arrangement and construction of steam engines, as set forth in Figs. 10 and 11, and described. In witness whereof, I, the said John Jamieson, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twentieth day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. SO JOHN JAMIESON, (l.s.) Signed by the within-named John Jamieson, in the presence of John Potter, C. E., 9, Corporation Street, 35 Manchester. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Exoellent Majesty. 1855.A. D. 1854. Oct.. 21. JST? 2251. GREEN" & PICKETT’S Specification'. (1 SHEET) F I C . I . FIG. 2 . X . aMI The/ iUab; chawing w rwt colored;. LoN D oir: Printedly George Edward Eyre andlfeiiAM Spottiswoode , Pouters to the Queetis most Excellent Majesty. 1855. •, • ’ Drawn on $tone hy Kalby &. Sons.library OF THE UNIVERSITY Of ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2249. Gas Fittings. (This Invention did not proceed to the Great Seal.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Abraham Gerard Brade at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 21st October 1854.—A communication. I, Abraham Gerard Brade, of Paris, France, and 133, Salisbury Square, 5 London, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in the Manufacture of Gas Fittings ” to be as follows:— These improvements consist in making the body of the fittings in brass, iron, or any other suitable metal tubing in the ordinary manner, and afterwards affixing to this tubing the ornaments in the following manner :—Suitable 10 hollow moulds, offering in their interior the form of the ornament to be cast, are provided, and being formed of two, three, or more pieces, according to the form of the ornament, they permit of inserting the tube in them, leaving a space round the latter in such a way that zinc or any other suitable metal or material being cast into the moulds, the melted metal, embodying entirely 15 certain parts of the tube, make those castings adhere firmly to the said tubing; and in order to give more strength to these castings, iron or other suitable wire is laid in the same manner as the tube itself in the interior of the moulds, which wires will consequently be covered entirely by the metal or other | material. The ornaments being thus cast in metal or other suitable material, 20 the moulds are removed, and the castings may be further lacquered, gilded, or ornamented in any of the known methods. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N°2250. Apparatus for Affixing Stamps to Letters, &c. ( This Invention did not proceed to the Great Seal.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Bennett Johns Hey wood at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 21st October 1854. I, Bennett Johns Heywood, of Green Mount Cottage, Dalkey, near Dublin, 5 in the Kingdom of Ireland, Gentleman, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “Improved Apparatus for Affixing Postage and other Stamps to Enveiopes, Letters, and other Documents,” to be as follows :— The object of this Invention is to facilitate the attachment of postage and other stamps to envelopes, letters, and other documents. The damping of the 10 letter or other document I effect by any one of the ordinary plans, or by the following contrivance:—Mounted on a pillar or other support is a pad kept damp by capillary attraction, and over this pillar slides a frame which carries a flat pressing piece, and is supported by bearing springs. The paper to be damped is laid on the pad, and the pressing piece being brought down upon it 15 by the hand of the operator, moisture from the pad is imparted to the paper. The stamps are piled up with the gummed face upwards in a rectangular box open at both ends, and capable of sliding up and down upon a piljar which contains a spring for pressing the box upwards. Surrounding this box is a sliding rectangular frame, which is borne upwards by bearing springs. This 20 frame carries a pressing piece covered on its under face with some elastic substance, and is intended to be pressed down upon the letter or other document to be stamped.2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2250. Provisional Specification. Hey wood's Improved Apparatus for Affixing Postage Stamps to <$rc. The letter with the damped part downwards is placed over the pile of stamps, and the sliding frame is depressed by the hand of the operator, whereby the letter is brought into close contact with the gummed surface of the stamp, and the adhesion of the stamp thereto is effected. The damping may also be effected by fitting a box containing a sponge on the top of the pressing piece; 5 or the under face of the pressing piece may be covered by a piece of cotton tape, which is kept damp by capillary attraction, one end of the tape being immersed in water in a box adjoining. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D.1854 N°2251 Ornamenting Textile Fabrics, Paper, &c. LETTERS PATENT to William Green, of Howard Buildings, Brick Lane, St. Luke, in tlie County of Middlesex, Engineer, and Joseph Pickett, of Duke Street, in the City of London, Manufacturer, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Treating or Ornamenting Textile Materials or Fabrics and Paper, and in Machinery or Apparatus por Effecting the same.” Sealed the 20th April 1855, and dated the 21st October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said William Green and Joseph Pickett at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Peti- tion, on the 21st October 1854. We, William Green, of Howard Buildings, Brick Lane, St. Luke, in the 5 County of Middlesex, Engineer, and Joseph Pickett, of Duke Street, in the City of London, Manufacturer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in Treating or Ornamenting Textile Materials or Fabrics and Paper, and in Machinery or Apparatus por Effecting the same,” to bo as follows:— 10 The first part of our Invention relates to covering or ornamenting textile materials or fabrics and paper with “ flock,” metallic powder, or other dry colors generally ; and consists,— First, in producing upon paper hangings, or upon continuous lengths of paper, effects similar to those which on silk goods are designated “ watered ” 15 and “shot.” This is done by printing with varnish, gold size, or other2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2251. Provisional Speciiication. Green cj- Pickett's Improvements in Ornamenting Textile Fabrics, Paper, cj'C. adhesive matter a series of fine lines (say, for example, from about fifteen to thirty to the inch), either carved or straight, and applying thereto metallic powder or other dry colors. The paper may afterwards be embossed, so as to break up the continuity of the printed lines, whereby a great variety of “shot” or silk-like effects may be produced. Secondly, our Invention consists in producing upon paper, and upon textile materials or fabrics and paper, bv printing, effects similar to those which are produced by the jacquard apparatus.. This object we effect by cutting up the pattern by which the materials are to be printed into a series of fine lines ox- dots, corresponding in size to those portions of the warp or weft which are thrown up upon the surface of the fabric to be imitated by the weaving operation. Patterns so formed may then be printed with an adhesive matter and metallic powder applied thereto. When so desired, we produce a fictitious color on the metal by doing it over with colored lacquer. Thirdly, our Invention consists in rendering the surface of paper and textile fabrics or materials capable of receiving a pattern or design in metal or in dry colors by the application of px-essure, by printing upon the same a series of fine lines or dots with a matter which will become adhesive when subjected to the action of heat or moisture and pressure. Fourthly, our Invention consists in applying metallic powders to paper and to textile materials or fabrics, by charging or doing over cold rollers or blocks with the said metallic powder, and then pressing them upon the material to be ornamented, which material is to be slightly moistened with glaire ox- other adhesive matter previous to the pattern beixxg impressed thereon.. Fifthly, our Invention consists in producing watered effects upon paper or upon fabrics which are not ribbed bypassing them under pressure between ribbed surfaces. Sixthly, our Invention consists in covering the entire surface of textile matex-ials or fabrics on either side with “ flock ” and other fibrous dust ox- powder. The second part of our Invention relates to machinery or apparatus fox- carrying into effect the several parts of our said improvements in treating or ornamenting textile materials or fabrics and paper ; and consists,_ Fix-st, in combining in one machirxe apparatus for applying “ gold size ” or other similar adhesive matter to paper and textile fabrics, for applying metallic powder to the surfaces so printed, and for removing any superfluous powder resulting fx-om such operation. Secondly, in the use of printers’ inking rollers, whether composed of “com- position ” or of other matter, for applying “ gold size ” or similar adhesive 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Provisional Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2251. 3 Green- e per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the ft, blowing statement:-— 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2253. 3 Rales Improvements in Machinery for Propelling Vessels. This Invention has for its object improvements in the machinery for pro- pelling vessels, and consists,— First, in a combination or combinations of machinery or apparatus by means of which the screw and the paddle wheels, where both these means of 5 propulsion are used in the same vessel, may be worked by one steam engine or other motive agent. And, secondly, in the application of two screw propellers fixed upon one and the same shaft, one of such screw propellers being made to work in the dead wood of the vessel in the ordinary manner, and the second fixed, as before said, upon 10 the same shaft, and working abaft the stern post, at such distance as may be found expedient; the rudder of the vessel being carried upon a false stern or rudder post, firmly bolted to that which carries the screw shaft, and abaft which the second screw propeller works. Having thus stated the nature of my Invention, I will proceed to describe 15 the manner of carrying the same into effect. One of the objects to be effected by the Invention, as before stated, is to work the screw propeller or propellers and the paddle wheels, when both these means of propelling are used in the same vessel, by one steam engine or other motive agent; and I would observe that the difficulty which has heretofore been experienced in carrying this object 20 into effect has arisen, not only from the different rates of speed at which the motive agent has been required to work to adapt it for either mode of pro- pulsion, but also from the difference between the transverse position of the engine required to work the paddle wheels and the longitudinal position which has been almost essential to the working of the screw. In carrying out this 25 part of my Invention, I propose, in the first place, to fix two eccentrics upon the main or paddle shaft of the engine, one at each side of the vessel, and at the points which may be found most convenient in practice. Each of these eccentrics I propose to fit with a metallic band or hoop in the usual manner, which metallic band or hoop must be attached to a connecting rod, working 30 horizontally under the deck timbers of the vessel, through slot or other guides, and communicating with an apparatus usually called a bell-crank motion. To the opposite extremity of this bell-crank motion other connecting rods are attached, which, working in a vertical position, Convey the motion to the lower part of the vessel, in which situation the screw shaft is usually fixed and works. 35 These connecting rods, before described, which work vertically, and which must be fitted with a parallel motion, as herein-after described, communicate at their lower extremity with a crank attached to a horizontal shaft, which shaft I call a drum shaft. This shaft works parallel to the screw shaft, and4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2253. Specification. Hales Improvements in Machinery for Propelling Vessels. upon it one or more drums are fixed, tlie motion being communicated from this drum shaft to the screw shaft by as many straps or bands, herein-after described, as may be required, the velocity of the motion of the screw shaft being regulated by the ratio of the diameter of the drum or drums upon the drum shaft to the drum or drums upon the screw shaft. Another mode of 5 carrying out this part of my Invention (that is, of communicating the motion of the main or paddle shaft of the engine to the screw shaft,) is to connect the eccentric upon the paddle or main shaft of the engine with the crank pin on the drum shaft by two rods, working vertically beneath the eccentric, the first rod extending any required distance between these points, and working at 10 its lower extremity on a pin attached to the upper side of a short horizontal shaft. The motion of this portion of the connecting rod would be in a line with the keel of the vessel, or at right angles to the main shaft; the second or lower portion of the rod would be attached by a D or other joint to the lower side of the short horizontal shaft before mentioned, and, working 15 below it, would connect it with the crank pin upon the drum shaft. The motion of this lower rod would be at right angles to the plane of motion of the upper rod and to the keel, and parallel to the main shaft of the engine. The ends of the short horizontal shaft which unites the connecting rods must be fitted with brasses, working upon guides in the ordinary manner, 20 forming together a parallel motion, which may be fixed to any convenient part of the vessel or framework of the machinery. In carrying out this part of my Invention, I would observe that considerable difficulty has hitherto been experienced in giving to straps or bands of large size an uniform and equal bite or hold upon the surface of the drum or rigger, through which the power 25 is communicated. This difficulty I propose to obviate by using several narrow straps or bands, each being provided with a tightening pulley, instead of using one or more wide ones, by which arrangement several important advantages would be gained; thus, equal areas of strap or band would not be so expensive, the probability of the working machinery being interrupted by the breaking 50 of a strap would be considerably decreased, and the hole or bite of each strap upon the drum or rigger might be accurately adjusted at the discretion of the superintendent; but I do not claim protection for this arrangement as a part of my Invention, for which Letters Patent have been granted to me. The accompanying Drawing will further explain and illustrate these arrangements ; 35 wherein A is the main shaft of the steam engine or other motive agent; B, the eccentric; C, the horizontal connecting rod working under the deck timbers of the vessel; D, the bell-crank motion; E, the upper vertical connecting rod;Sj>ecification. A.D. 1854.—N" 2253. 5 Hales Improvements in Machinery for Propelling Vessels. F, the lower vertical connecting rod, working on the crank pin G of the drum shaft; II, the short horizontal shaft hearing the parallel motion brasses; I, I, the guides; K, the drum shaft; L, the screw shaft; M, M, tightening pulleys, to regulate the friction or bite of the straps or bands N, N. A cor- 5 responding system of eccentrics, connecting rods, and drum shafts to either of those herein-before described must of course be carried out on each side of the vessel. It will be seen that by this arrangement, the speed at which the steam engine or other motive agent employed to work the paddle wheels being determined, any required velocity can be given to the screw propeller by 10 properly proportioning the diameters of the drums upon the drum shaft to those upon the screw shaft. The second part of my Invention relates to the use of two screw propellers fixed upon the same shaft, one working in the dead wood of the vessel in the ordinary manner, and the second working abaft the rudder post, the shaft 15 which carries such screw passing through the rudder post, and its extremity being supported upon a false post, which post also may carry the rudder of the vessel. The blades of these screw propellers I propose to place at right angles to each other on the shaft, that is, the blades of the screw propeller working in the dead wood of the vessel, I propose to set at right angles to 20 the blades of the screw propeller working abaft the rudder post, but I do not limit myself to this arrangement. The ordinary means may be applied of throwing out of gear either the paddle wheels or screw shaft, should it be found desirable at any time to employ either mode of propulsion alone. Having thus described my Invention of improvements in the machinery for 25 propelling vessels, and the best means with which I am at present acquainted for carrying the same into effect, I would observe, in conclusion, that although in the foregoing Specification I have described various matters which have been long known and in use, yet I do not mean or intend to claim any such parts as of my Invention; but that which I consider to be new in the above 30 described machinery, and therefore wish to claim as the Invention secured to me by Letters Patent, is,— First, the arrangements or combinations of eccentrics, connecting rods, and drum shafts, by which the power of the motive agent employed to work the paddle wheels of a vessel may be also applied to work a screw propeller or 35 propellers in jhe same vessel. And, secondly, the use of two screw propellers of any description fixed upon the same shaft, one working, as aforesaid, in the dead wood of the vessel, and the second in any situation abaft the rudder post that may be found most6 A.D. 1854.—N° 2253. Specification. Sales’ Improvements in Machinery for Propdling Vessels. convenient, whether such screw propeller or propellers be used in conjunction with paddle wheels or any other propellers. In witness whereof, I, the said Henry Hales, have heretofore set my hand and seal, this Twentieth day of April, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. HENRY HALES. (l.s.) Witness, JosH. Hy. Riddell. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William: Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.SIDE ELEVATION SHEWING MOTION DIRECT SIDE ELEVATION SHEWING MOTION CARRIED ABAFT. END ELEVATION SHEWINC METHOD OF TIGHTENING STRAPS 15JFee& The H(tjj rtj'a\yuiq is-partly colored/. DryAvn an Staae’byivralbj^ Sans London. PriptedbyGeorge EdwardEyre HndWixiiAM Spottiswoode , Printers to the Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855.LIBRARY Of THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.I). 1854 N° 2254. Singeing Lamp. LETTERS PATENT to George Savage, of Adderbury, in the County of Oxford, Horse Breaker and Clipper, for the Invention of “A New oe Improved Singeing Lamp.” Sealed the 20th April 1855, and dated the 23rd October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said George Savage at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 23rd October 1854. I, George Savage, of Adderbury, in the County of Oxford, Horse Breaker 5 and Clipper, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ A New oa Improved Singeing Lamp ” to be as follows :— My Invention consists of a lamp to be used for singeing horses, constructed in the following manner :—The body of the lamp consists of a flat or wedge- shaped vessel, divided by a partition into two compartments, one of the said 10 compartments constituting the wick chamber, and the other compartment being a reservoir to contain the wood naptha or other combustible liquid. The handle of the lamp through which the naphtha is introduced opens into the last-named compartment, and itself constitutes a part of the reservoir. The communication between the reservoir and the wick chamber is effected by means of a stop-cock, which may be opened and closed at pleasure. A second2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2254. Provisional Specification. Savages Improved Singeing Lamp. stop-cock is fixed on the reservoir, for the purpose of admitting air into the reservoir when the naphtha passes into the wick chamber. Lamps constructed according to my Invention are much more uniform in working, and more convenient to use, than singeing lamps of the ordinary construction. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said George Savage in the Great Seal Patent Office cn the 23rd April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, George Savage, of Adderbury, in the County of Oxford, Horse Breaker and Clipper, 10 send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-third day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, 15 the said George Savage, Her special licence that I, the said George Savage, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said George Savage, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and 20 vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “A New or Improved Singeing Lamp,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said George Savage, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner 25 the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said George Savage, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- SO formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say):— My Invention consists of a lamp for singeing horses, constructed in the manner herein-after explained and illustrated in the accompanying Drawing. Figure 1 represents, in front elevation, a lamp constructed according to my 35 Invention ; and Figure 2 represents a section of the same, taken through theSpecification. 3 A D. 1854.—N° 2254. Savage's Improved Singeing Lamp. line a in Figure 1. The body of the lamp consists of a flat or wedge-shaped vessel, divided by the partition b into two compartments c, d. The compart- ment d is the wick chamber, and the compartment is a reservoir to contain the wood naptha or other combustible liquid to be burned in the lamp. The 5 handle e of the lam]) is hollow, and opens into the chamber c by its forked extremities f, g; the ends of the extremities /, g, are open. is a stop-cock, which, when in the position represented in Figure 2, opens a communica- tion between the chambers c, d. When the stop-cock is in the position represented in Figure 1, the communication between the said chambers c, d, 10 is closed. The reservoir c and handle e are filled with wood naptha by unscrewing the cap i at the bottom of the handle e, and inverting the lamp so as to bring the lower end h of the handle uppermost. The stop-cock h being in the position indicated in Figure 1, by pouring the wood naptha in the end k of the handle, the reservoir c and handle e may be filled therewith, and the 15 cap i screwed on the end Jc of the handle e. By opening the stop-cock h, a portion of the wood naptha will pass from the reservoir c to the wick chamber d, and supply the wick l with combustible matter. The stop-cock h must now be closed, and the wick may be ignited. Portions of wood naptha are allowed to enter the wick chamber d from time to time by occasionally 20 opening the stop-cock h, and inclining the lamp into a nearly horizontal position. A stop-cock may be situated at the upper part of the reservoir c, opening outside the lamp, so as to permit air to enter the said reservoir when the wood naptha passes from the said reservoir to the wick chamber; but the last-mentioned stop-cock may without much inconvenience be dispensed with; 25 for after the lamp has been lighted and the metal has become warm, the vapour of the wood naptha which accumulates in the upper part of the reservoir c has sufficient pressure to force the said wood naptha into the wick chamber d when the stop-cock h is opened. In order more rapidly to transfer the w’ood naptha from the reservoir c to the wick chamber d, I sometimes 30 employ two stop-cocks, as indicated at m, n, Figure 3, instead of one stop- cock h, Figures 1 and 2. When I use two stop-cocks the handle e need not be forked at that extremity which enters the reservoir. Instead of filling the lamp from the bottom of the handle, I sometimes introduce a feeder at the upper part of the reservoir, as represented at o, Figure 3, the said feeder con- 35 sisting of an opening, closed by a plug or screw, or otherwise. When I place a feeder on the reservoir, the bottom of the handle is not made moveable, as the naptha is not introduced at the handle. When the lamp is fed from a feeder on the reservoir, as at o, Figure 3, the handle of the lamp is not made to project into the reservoir so far as to rise to4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2254. Specification. Savages Improved Singeing Lamp. ... " 11 ■ 1 ■■ ■' - ■ ~— ---- ' • ' ~ ~~ the level of the said feeder, otherwise there would be difficulty in filling the handle with wood naptha. When the feeder o is used, the handle need not project beyond the line jp, Figure 3. Having now described the nature ot my said Invention, and the manner of carrying the same into effect, I wish it to be understood that I do not limit 5 myself to the precise details herein described, as the same may be varied without departing from the nature of my said Invention. But I claim as my Invention, the method or methods herein described and illustrated in the accompanying Drawing of constructing singeing lamps. In witness whereof, I, the said George Savage, have hereunto set my 10 hand and seal, this Twentieth day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. GEORGE SAVAGE, (l.s.) Witness, Albert White, 15 Adderbury, April 20th, 1855. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A..D.1854>. October.23 .IT? 2254< SAVAGE'S Specification. % (1 SHEE F I c . i. r_i / i^i ■ ■ l \* M' 7* I . I a/ ^ f'My draivauf is nob colored/. FI G . II . London: PiintedbyGEonGE Eward Eyre niidWim^vi Spottiswoode ; Printers to die Queens most ExedLent Majesty. 1855. F I G . ill . Drawn oil S toneljrMalby 8c. S onslibrary OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISAiWNAAAAWVWWVVVWWWVV' N°2255. A.D. 1854 Manufacture of Plate and Thread for Lace and Bullion. LETTERS PATENT to Abraham Gerard Brade, of Paris, and 133, Salisbury Square, London, for the Invention of “ Improvements in the Manufacture of Plate and Thread for Gold and Silver Lace and Bullion.”—A communication. Sealed the 20th April 1855, and dated the 23rd October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Abraham Gerard Brade at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 23rd October 1854. I, Abraham Gerard Brade, of Paris, and 133, Salisbury Square, London, 5 do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “Improvements in the Manufacture of Plate and Thread for Gold and Silver Lace and Bullion ” to be as follows:— These improvements relate to the manufacture of plate or flattened wire einployed in gold and silver lace and bullion, and also to the manufacture of 10 gold and silver thread; they are applicable to silver as well as to copper or any other wire employed in the manufacture of gold and silver lace. The first part of the Invention, relating to plate, consist in methods for gilding, silvering, or covering with any other suitable precious metal one side or surface of the plate, and leaving the opposite surface uncovered, or covering one side2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2255. Provisional Specification. Brade's Impts. in the Manufacture of Plate and Thread for Lace and Bullion. or surface with a thin layer of the precious metal, whereas the other surface receives a thicker layer. The first part I effect either by putting over one side or surface of the plate a reserving substance; thus, by passing the plate through a suitable solution of the precious metal, this latter adheres firmly only to the surface requiring to be covered; or, by applying that surface of the plate which 5 is not to receive a metallic coating by the solution firmly against the smooth surface of a suitable solid body, in such manner, that by immersing the whole into a metallic solution, this latter may only come in contact with the outer surface of the plate, and not with that applied against the solid body. By either method, or combining them, the plate may have one of its surfaces covered 10 with one precious metal, and the opposite with another, or receive two or more coatings of different metals; or the plate may be coated with a thin layer of precious metal by the common wire-drawing process, and afterwards have one surface receive a further coating by my process. The second part of the Invention consists in applying the thus obtained 15 plate to the manufacture of thread used in the manufacture of gold and silver lace, which thread consists of a silk or other suitable core, round which my plate is to be wound by any of the gold thread manufacturing processes. Another improvement in the manufacture of the said thread consists in forming the same with a plate covered on both sides with a thin layer of precious metal, 20 and afterwards passing this thread through a solution of precious metal, and in this manner depositing on the outer side of the thread one or more coatings of the precious metal. By this method the plate of the thread will consequently offer a thin coating of the precious metal on that surface of the plate which is laying against the core, or what may be termed the inside of the thread; 25 whereas a thicker coating will be on the outer side, which is that coming into sight and exposed to wear and tear. The metallic coating by means of solutions may be obtained by any suitable immersing or galvanic process. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Abraham Gerard Brade in the Great Seal Patent Office on 30 the 23rd April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Abraham Gerard Brade, of Paris, and 133, Salisbury Square, London, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-third day of October, in the year of our Lord 35 One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign,Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2255. 3 Brade's Impts. in the Manufacture of Plate and Thread for Lace and Bullion. did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Abraham Gerard Brade, Her special licence that I, the said Abraham Gerard Brade, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Abraham Gerard Brade, my executors, administrators, and 5 assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in the Manufacture of Plate and Thread for Gold and 10 Silver Lace and Bullion,” a communication, upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Abraham Gerard Brade, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar 15 months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Abraham Gerard Brade, do hereby declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement, that is to say:— 20 These improvements are a communication from Ambroise Auguste Masson, of Paris, and form an addition to his Patent, dated the Eleventh January, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, for improvements in the manufacture of thread or wire to be used for making gold or silver lace. The present improve- ments relate to silver as well as copper or any other suitable wire plate or 25 thread for manufacturing gold and silver lace and bullion, and not only to gilding or silvering, but also to coating, with any other precious metal or metals. In Masson’s Patent, of the Eleventh of January, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, his mode of gilding or silvering silver or copper wire or thread, by causing them to pass through suitable metallic solutions, with or without 30 the aid of a galvanic current, and a machine for performing this gilding or silvering, are described. One of the present improvements consists in applying Masson’s mode and machine to the gilding, silvering, or covering with any other suitable precious metal, of silver, copper, or any other suitable metallic plate, which is a name given by gold lace manufacturers to flattened wire. 35 Another part of the improvements consists in gilding, silvering, or covering with any other suitable precious metal one side or surface of the plate, and leaving the opposite surface uncovered, or giving a thin coating of precious metal to one surface of such plate, and a thicker or several coatings to the4 A.D. 1854—N° 2255. Specification. Erodes Impts. in the Manufacture of Plate and Thread for Lace and Bullion. opposite surface of the same, which coatings may be of one or of different metals. This part of the Invention is performed by drawing, according to Masson’s aforesaid mode, the plate through a suitable metallic solution with or without the aid of a galvanic current, having previously applied over that surface of the plate which is not to be acted upon by the metallic solution any 5 suitable reserving or resist varnish, or other suitable coating which is not attacked by the metallic solution, and which may be afterwards removed from the plate by any suitable solvent; or instead of having one surface of the plate covered with such a resist coating, this surface may be applied against the surface of any suitable smooth body partly immersed in the metallic solution, 10 such, for instance, as a roller or cylinder of glass, china, vulcanized india-rubber, gutta percha, or any other suitable material, in such manner that the surface of the plate applied against the roller is prevented from coming in contact with the metallic solution, and this latter is consequently permitted to act only on the opposite or free surface of the plate. In performing this part it is prefer- 15 able to employ a horizontal revolving roller, part of the diameter of which is kept immersed in the metallic solution, and having the plate applied against that part of the surface of the roller which is immersed in the solution, by which means the plate may travel through the bath, having one surface prevented from contact with the solution, whereas a metallic coating is con- go tinuously depositing on the free surface of the same. The plate coated in this manner may be used by itself for weaving, or any other suitable purposes, or be employed for manufacturing gold or silver thread, by enrolling the same round a silk or other core. Another part of the improvements relates to the manufacture of bullion, 25 which may be manufactured at once with the plate gilded or silvered according to the above-described modes; or which, being made by plate gilded or silvered on one side only, may afterwards be drawn or immersed in a suitable metallic solution with or without the aid of a galvanic current, and in this mode receive a further coating on both surfaces. 30 Having thus described the nature of the Invention, and the manner of performing the same, what is claimed consists of,— First, the mode of gilding, silvering, or coating with any other precious metal or metals plate obtained from silver, copper, or any other suitable metallic wire, causing the said plate to be drawn through a suitable metallic S5 solution, with or without the aid of a galvanic current. Second, the modes described for gilding, silvering, or coating with any other precious metal or metals of one side of such plate, leaving the other side free;Specification, A.D. 1854.—N° 2255. 5 Brade s Impts. in the Manufacture of Plate and Thread for Lace and Bullion. or covering one side with a thin coating of precious metal and the other side with a thicker coating or coatings; and the employing of such plate to gold lace manufacturing, and other purposes. Third, the mode of covering with a coating or coatings of precious metal or 5 metals, by immersion in a suitable metallic solution or solutions, of bullion manufactured from plate, coated with precious metal on one side only, or plate having a thin coating upon one side and a thicker coating on the other. In witness whereof, I, the said Abraham Gerard Brade, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twenty-third day of April, in the year of our 10 Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. A. G. BRADE. (l.s.) Witness, Geo. White. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Etre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2256. ArvWVA, Weaving Fringes. LETTERS PATENT to John Maddox, of Thomas Street, Brick Lane, Edward Gardner, of Buxton Street, and George Dyer Green, of Weaver Street, all in the County of Middlesex, for the Invention of “ Improve- ments in Weaving Fringes.” Sealed the 16th January 1855, and dated the 23rd October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said John Maddox, Edward Gardner, and George Dyer Green at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 23rd October 1854. We, John Maddox, of Thomas Street, Brick Lane, Edward Gardner, cf 5 Buxton Street, and George Dyer Green, of Weaver Street, all in the County of Middlesex, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention for “ Improve- ments in Weaving Fringes ” to be as follows:— This Invention has for its object the weaving of fringes in comparatively narrow spaces in a loom to what have hitherto been required for weaving like 10 widths of fringes, the weft which forms the fringe in each case being acted on by adjustable instruments, so as to be capable of being set or adjusted for varying the width of fringe produced, and thus to admit of weaving various widths of fringe at different times in the same spaces in the loom. For this purpose the warps for two pieces of fringe are arranged side by side at a 15 short distance apart, and several pairs of such warps are so arranged in2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2256. Provisional Specification. Maddox, Gardner, df Green sImprovements in Weaving Fringes. number, according to the width of the loom employed. Each shuttle carries the weft to weave two pieces of fringe, which are afterwards divided, by cutting through the weft threads which connect them together, as is well understood. The width of fringe to each pair of warps is governed by the action of an adjustable instrument or pusher (there being one of such instruments to each 5 pair of warps), in connection with a frame which receives a to and fro move- ment by means of cords and pullies, connected to a lever arm fixed to the batten, or in any other convenient manner. After each weft is thrown across, the instrument or pusher moves, and, by taking hold of or pressing against the weft thread, carries it with it, so as to extend the quantity thereof 10 between the warp threads to such an extent as the width of fringe may require. The instrument or pusher is capable of adjustment on the frame, so as to produce at different times various widths of fringe in the same loom. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said John Maddox, Edward Gardner, and George Dyer Green in 15 the Great Seal Patent Office on the 23rd April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, we, John Maddox, of Thomas Street, Brick Lane, Edward Gardner, of Buxton Street, and George Dyer Green, of Weaver Street, all in the County of Middlesex, send greeting. 20 WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-third day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto us, the said John Maddox, Edward Gardner, and George Dyer Green, Her 25 special licence that we, the said John Maddox, Edward Gardner, and George Dyer Green, our executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as we, the said John Maddox, Edward Gardner, and George Dyer Green, our execu- tors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, 30 should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Weaving Fringes,” upon the con- dition (amongst others) that we, the said John Maddox, Edward Gardner, and George Dyer Green, by an instrument in writing under our hands and seals, 35 or under the hand and seal of one of us, should particularly describe andSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2256. 8 Maddox, Gardner, $ Greens Improvements in Weaving Fringes. ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. 5 NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Edward Gardner, on behalf of myself and the said John Maddox and George Dyer Green, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof, that is to say:— 10 This Invention has for its object the weaving of fringes in comparatively narrow spaces in a loom to what have hitherto been required for weaving like widths of fringes, the weft which forms the fringe in each case being acted on by adjustable instruments, so as to be capable of being set or adjusted for varying the width of fringe produced, and thus to admit of weaving various 15 widths of fringe at different times in the same spaces in the loom. For this purpose the warps for two pieces of fringe are arranged side by side at a short distance apart, and several pairs of such warps are so arranged in number according to the width of the loom employed. Each shuttle carries the weft to weave two pieces of fringe, which are afterwards divided, by cutting through 20 the weft threads which connect them together, as is well understood. The width of fringe to each pair of warps is governed by the action of an adjust- able instrument or pusher (there being one of such instruments to each pair of warps), in connection with a frame which receives a to and fro movement by means of cords and pullies, connected to a lever arm fixed to the batten, or 25 in any other convenient manner. After each weft is thrown across, the instru- ment or pusher moves, and, by taking hold of or pressing against the weft thread, carries it with it, so as to extend the quantity thereof between the warp threads to such an extent as the width of fringe may require. The instrument or pusher is capable of adjustment on the frame, so as to produce 30 at different times various widths of fringe in the same loom. Having thus stated the nature of the Invention, we will proceed to describe the manner of performing the same. Description op the Drawings. Figure 1 shows a transverse section of a loom suitably arranged for weaving 35 fringes of various widths according to our Invention; Figures 2 and 3 show detached views of some of the parts on a larger scale. The arrangement and construction of looms for weaving narrow fabrics, such as ribbons and fringes, being well understood, it will only be necessary to describe the nature4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2256. Specification. Maddox, Gardner, E, Drawn on.Stune Inr ~KMbv 8cSons.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY or ILLINOISSurgical Apparatus. LETTERS PATENT to James Scott, of Argyle Square, Edinburgh, M.D., for the Invention of “ Improvements in Apparatus for Facilitating Surgical Operations and Teaching Anatomy.” Sealed the 2nd February 1855, and dated the 23rd October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said James Scott at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 23rd October 1854. I, James Scott, of Argyle Square, Edinburgh, M.D., do hereby declare the 5 nature of the Invention for “Improvements in Apparatus for Facilitating Surgical Operations and Teaching Anatomy ” to be as follows:— This Invention consists of the following arrangement and combination of apparatus:—A strong table of oak, mahogany, or any other proper material is made; the legs screw in their places, or are made otherwise moveable, 10 for the convenience of being packed in a small compass; the table itself to consist of a firm board or boards of a convenient length and breadth, with a brass, iron, or hard wood plate screwed upon each border of its upper surface, and rising a little above the plane of the table, so as to diminish the friction. Upon this board another board is to be placed, of equal or nearly 15 equal length, but narrower, and divided across into three parts at a proper distance from the ends of the table, but joined by hinges, so that any one of its2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2259. Provisional Specification. Scott's Improvements in Apparatus for Facilitating Surgical Operations, <$fc. portions may be raised to any necessary angle, by means of a screw directed upwards through the lower board of the table, and the joints so constructed as to admit of two of the divisions of the upper board being raised together from the lower board, which is necessary in certain operations where the nates of a patient should be elevated, and the head and lower extremities depressed. The lower board is to have a broad channel cut completely through nearly its whole length and thickness. The middle portion of the divided slab or board is to be pierced by a strong metallic bolt, with a square or diamond-shaped head, countersunk into the wood, so as to admit of its being easily forced up, but to prevent it from turning; and the bolt is to pass freely through the channel of the lower board, so that, by means of a thumb-screw applied at its lower extremity, the two boards may be at pleasure made moveable or fixed together. This bolt is to be perforated transversely by a long metallic screw proceeding horizontally through a groove from the upper end of the lower slab to the above-mentioned channel, through which the bolt descends per- pendicularly, so that by slackening the perpendicular bolt, and turning the horizontal screw by a winch handle or by other means, the upper board may be moved along the lower slab, either towards or from the head of the table. The lower board is to be grooved through its whole thickness on each side, for the reception of a right and left hand pillar of metal or wood, and the said pillars are to rise to a convenient height above the plane of the table, their lower ends passing through the lower slab only, and secured by “washers” and thumb-screws in the usual manner, so as to admit of their being placed either directly opposite each other or obliquely. These pillai-s are to be connected above their capitals by means of a metallic or wooden cross beam, secured to the tops of the pillars by screws, which can be easily turned by the hand, so that the connecting beam can be easily removed from its place. This cross beam is to be perforated perpendicularly at its centre, and through the perforation a long screw is to pass downward, carrying on its top a stage, on which a mirror or mirrors may be placed, capable of a variety of movements. Other perforations may be made through the beam for other mirrors, and when the beam is removed on any occasion, one or more of the mirrors may be applied to the top of each of the pillars. Through the lateral grooves in the lower portion of the upper slab, a sort of stirrup may be applied for the patient’s foot, and capable of being raised or lowered, to suit the length of the leg. At the lower end of the screw which pierces the beam a swivel is attached, for the purpose of making extension upwards, in certain cases of dislocation; and underneath the lower slab may be nests of drawers or boxes, for the reception 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Provisional Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2259. 3 Scott's Improvements in Apparatus for Facilitating Surgical Operations, fc. of surgical instruments, books, bandages, plasters, lint, sponge, and wine, or other cordials and medicines. And for the reduction of dislocations and fractures, or even for the extraction of teeth, it is only necessary to secure the patient firmly in the upper slabs; to 5 have proper counter-extension, non-elastic straps applied to a post or posts in convenient places of the lower or fixed slab; and then it is evident, that by turning the long horizontal screw, a power may be deliberately applied. Concave mirrors as well as plain may be used, and in that case spectators will have a view of the objects magnified to any necessary degree, a thing of much 10 importance in teaching the anatomy of the brain, the eye, the testicle, or other minute and complicated organs, and in demonstrating the course and ramifi- cations of blood vessels, nerves, &c. Also, as by this means a person looking on at surgical operations will easily perceive and trace the various parts that are divided by the operator, which they cannot easily or perfectly see under the 15 present mode of operating. Lanterns or lamps, enclosed in proper cases for security, may be attached to the mirror or mirrors in such a way that their light may be reflected upon the part subjected to operation, which it is believed will be of incalculable value in the cock-pit of a ship of war. According to my plan no pulleys are required, and are indeed superseded; 20 and it is well known that by pulleys a steady uniform extending power cannot be applied, because persons employed in drawing the cords do not and cannot pull equably. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said James Scott in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 25 23rd April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, James Scott, of Argyle Square, Edinburgh, M.D., send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-third day of October, in the year of our 30 Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said James Scott, Her special licence that I, the said James Scott, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said James Scott, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at 35 any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2259. Specification. Scott's Improvements in Apparatus for Facilitating Surgical Operations, thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Apparatus eor Facilitating Surgical Operations and Teach- ing Anatomy,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said James Scott, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. KOW KNOW YE, that I, the said James Scott, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say):— This Invention consists of the following arrangement and combination of apparatus:—A strong table a, of oak, mahogany, or any other proper material is made; the legs b, b, b, b, screw in their places, or are made otherwise moveable, for the convenience of being packed in a small compass. The table a itself consists of a firm board or boards of a convenient length and breadth, with a brass, iron, or hard wood plate c, c, screwed upon each border of its upper surface, and rising a little above the plane of the table, so as to diminish the friction. Upon this board another board d is to be placed, of equal or nearly equal length, but narrower, and divided across into three parts at a proper distance from the ends of the table, but joined by hinges d\ d\ so that any one of its portions may be raised to any necessary angle by means of a screw, directed upwards through the lower board of the table; or wedges may be used in lieu thereof, and the joints so constructed as to admit of two of the divisions of the upper board being raised together from the lower board, which is necessary in certain operations where the nates of a patient should be elevated, and the head and lower extremities depressed. The lower board is to have a broad channel e cut completely through nearly its whole length and thickness. The middle portion of the divided slab or board is to be pierced by a strong metallic bolt f with a square or diamond- shaped head, countersunk into the aperture of table cl, so as to admit of its being easily forced up, and yet prevent it from turning; and the bolt is to pass freely through the channel e of the lower board, so that, by means of a thumb- screw and washer applied at its lower extremity, the two boards may be at pleasure made moveable or fixed together. This bolt is to be perforated transversely by a long metallic screw g, proceeding horizontally beneath the 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2259. 5 Scott’s Improvements in Apparatus for Facilitating Surgical Operations, hus Somerby and Charles William Fogg, of the State of Massa- chusetts, of the United of America, send greeting. 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2263. 3 Somerby $ Fogg's Improved Bralce Apparatus for Railway Carriages. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-fourth day of October, in the year of our One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto 5 us, the said Gustavus Adolphus Somerby and Charles William Fogg, Her special license that we, the said Gustavus Adolphus Somerby and Charles William Fogg, our executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as we, the Gustavus Adolphus Somerby and Charles ‘ W. Fogg, our exe- cutors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no 10 others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention of “As Improved Brake Apparatus ros Railway Carriages,” upon the condition [amongst others] that we, the 15 said Gustavus Adolphus Somerby and Charles William Fogg, by an instru- ment in writing under our hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause. the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office, or Office of Her Majesty’s Commissioners of Patents, within six 20 calendar months next and immediately after the date of the Letters Patent. HOW KNOW YE, that we, the said Gustavus Adolphus Somerby and Charles William Fogg, do hereby declare the nature of our said Invention to be fully described and ascertained in and by the following Specification and the accompanying Drawings, letters, figures, and references thereof:__ 25 Of the said Drawings, Figure 1 exhibits a top view of a railway carriage truck frame, having our improvement applied to it; Figure 2 is a side elevation of the same; Figure 3 is a vertical, central, and longitudinal section of the same; Figure 4 is a front end elevation of the same. In the said Drawings, A denotes the truck frame, supported by four wheels 30 B, C, D, E, whose axles are seen at F and G. The journals a, a, of these axles are supported in sliding or pendulous bars or bearings b, b, so applied to the truck frame as to enable the wheel axles to be moved towards one another a very short distance, or such as will be amply sufficient to carry the wheels into contact with the rubbers of their working brakes, and put such brakes in 35 operation, as will be herein-after described. To each wheel there is applied a working brake or rubber H, which is arranged with respect to the wheel, as seen in Figures 2 and 3. Each of these working brakes is hinged or jointed to one of four levers I, I, I, I, such working brake or rubber being connected or hinged to one -end of the lever,4 A.D. 1854—N° 2263. Specification. Somerby $ Fogg's Improved Brahe Apparatus for Railway Carriages. while the fulcrum c of the lever is at its opposite end, the lever being there jointed to the framework, so as to admit of free play of it in vertical direc- tions. Between its fulcrum and brake rubber each lever bears against the lower end of a spring d, such spring being made to envelope the rod e, pro- jecting downward from the lever K of a second brake or rubber L, which is 5 applied to the upper part of the periphery of each wheel, and above its working brake, as seen in Figure 3. Each of the brake levers K has its fulcrum f arranged between its two extremities, and connected with the truck frame, in such manner as to allow the lever to play freely in a vertical plane, dr of being moved so as to move its brake or rubber either into contact with or away from 10 the tread or periphery of its wheel. The two brake levers K, K, of each two wheels on either side of the truck frame should be so connected, joined, or made to overlap one another at their inner ends, that an upward or downward movement of either lever may pro- duce a corresponding movement of the other lever, the same being for the 15 purpose of enabling the upper brakes of both wheels to be simultaneously put in operation by either of their working brakes, whether the carriage may be in the act of running forward or backward on the railway track. We will now suppose the carriage to be in motion forwards on its track, and that while it is so in motion, we suffer the forward wheels of the truck frame to 20 move back against their working brake rubbers, such back movement being produced by the momentum of the carriage. When the treads of the wheels come in contact with the working brakes, they will at once force said working brakes upward, and cause them to put in action the upper brakes or brake mechanism of the wheels; and thus the working brakes or brake mechanism 25 not only by its friction against the wheel will aid in arresting the forward motion of the carriage, but it mil put in operation the upper brake mechanism, and cause its rubber to be forced with great power downwards upon the wheel, bringing the weight and momentum of the carriage into action, to arrest the progress of said carriage upon the track. 30 From the above description of the manner in which each working brake is applied to its wheel and the lever of the upper brake mechanism or appa- ratus, viz., by a hinged lever I, and a spring d (or the equivalent or equivalents therefor), it will be seen that this method admits of the ready adoptation of the brake to the irregularities in the periphery of the wheel, and also causes 35 it to fit in close contact with the wheel under any elevation or upward move- ment of said rubber. And besides this, such mode imparts to the brake mechanism a very advantageous elasticity of action, as the upper end of the spring d is made to work against a shoulder or its equivalent formed on theSpecification. 5 A.D. 1854.—N° 2263. Somerby <$f Foggs Improved Brake Apparatus for Railway Carriages. rod e. In connection with wheels made to move toward and away from their brake rubbers or working brakes as specified, we employ a mechanism, which by means of the power that produces draft of the carriage, or puts it in motion on its track, shall move said wheels away from their brakes, so as to relieve •5 said brakes from being moved or pressed by their respective wheels. This mechanism, or such as we have devised, may be described as follows:— Each of the hanging bearings b of the wheel journal is provided with a horizontal friction roller g, against which a a cam h (see Figure 5, which is a top view of the cam and roller, and the lower arm of the lever on which said 10 cam is formed,) is made to operate. The said cam is constructed upon the end of an arm i, that projects horizontally from a vertical shaft k (see Figure 2), supported in suitable bearings, so as to be capable of a horizontal rotation on its axis. From this shaft an arm l extends inwards towards the middle of the truck frame; each wheel having its shaft provided with two arms, as 15 seen at i and Z. Figure 6 is a vertical and transverse of the truck frame, the same being taken through two adjacent arms Z, Z, when they are in a line with, or about in line with, one another. One of said arms has a vertical pin m extended through and fastened to it, and made to rest on a cam n, the said pin being provided upon its upper end with a catch o, as seen in 20 Figure 3. The said cam n is raised on a cylinder or barrel p, as seen in Figures 7 and 8, which respectively are end and side views of said cylinder. There are two of such barrels p, which are arranged and fixed upon the long shaft q, as seen in Figure 3. The object of the cam of each barrel is to elevate the catch o of the arm Z, Z, into the path of a tripping catch r, which 25 is arranged above the catch o, and affixed to a sliding buffer shaft s. There are two of these buffer shafts, arranged as seen in Figures 1 and 3, each being provided with a draw spring by which it is forced backwards. A hand lever u extends upwards from the long shaft q. This hand lever serves to enable the shaft q to be turned transversely in its bearings. The cam m on one of 30 the barrels p should be so arranged that while the lever is being moved upward into a vertical position, such cam shall elevate the catch o into the path of the tripping catch. The other cam of the other barrel p should also be so arranged as to cause the catch o over said barrel to be elevated to its highest position when the said lever it is in a vertical position, and also so that 35 while said lever is being depressed from a vertical into an inclined position, on the opposite side of the shaft s, such cam shall admit of the fall or descent of its catch o, below the path of movement of the tripping catch directly over it. The arms Z, Z, are severally made capable of being sprung or moved either upwards or downwards, those directly over each cam barrel p being so6 A.D. 1854.—N” 2263. Specification. Somerby Foggs Improved Brake Apparatus for Railway Carnages. connected that a simultaneous movement of them may always take place when either is moved either vertically or horizontally. The said arms are connected by a spring v interposed between them, as seen in Figure 1, such spring serving to retract them whenever necessary. In case we should desire to relieve the wheels from the action of the brakes, the hand lever u is moved 5 so as to cause the forward catch o to be raised upward. As soon as this takes place, the forward draft upon the front draw bar will so carry the tripping catch of said draw bar into action with the catch o directly beneath it, as to move the lever arms of said catch forwards, and thereby cause the cams h of the forward arms i,i, to press upon their friction rollers g, so as to cause the 10 wheels to be moved away from their working brakes. In case the carriage is moving backward on a railway, the wheels are relieved from the brakes in a similar manner, and by the action of the rear draft bar and its tripping catch upon the rear catch o. The front end of the long shaft q is provided with a clutch dog M, as seen in Figures 1, 2, 3, and 4. 15 This clutch dog consists of a cross bar x affixed to the shaft, and not only having a pin y projecting from one arm of it, but a slot or hole formed through the other arm of it. Now, when two carriages are brought together, end to end, the pins y of their clutch dogs are made to pass into their respective slots z,and so that a person when moving either lever u of any carriage shall 20 simultaneously put in motion all the shafts q of the carriages of the train, and so as to enable him either to throw all the brakes of the train into or out of action upon their wheels; thus giving one man on any carriage of the train full command of all the brakes of the train, so that in case of accident or any necessity of a sudden stoppage of the train, he can readily arrest the motion 25 of it,' A windlass R, and chain or rope T, may be arranged on the carriage, as seen in the Drawings, the rope or chain being attached both to the windlass and the arms l, as seen in Figure 1. By such windlass and chain, the wheels may be moved away from the working brakes at any time whenever the carriage is 30 not in a train, but is running by power that may have been suddenly removed from it. We do not claim the application of a brake to the wheel of a carriage in such manner that while the wheel is stationary in other respects than being made to revolve, the brake shall be moveable either towards or away from the 35 wheel; but what we do claim is, applying the wheel to the brake in such manner that the former may be moved either towards or away from the latter, and by the momentum or by the weight of the car or carriage when in move- ment, as specified.Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2263. 7 Somerby§ Fogg's Improved Brake Apparatus for Railway Carriages. We claim, in combination with a brake mechanism and a wheel, made to move or made capable of being moved against and away from its rubber, as described, another brake mechanism so applied to the first brake mechanism and the wheel, or to another wheel, as to be simultaneously set in action on 5 its wheel, with and by the other brake mechanism, the wheel thereof, and the momentum of the carriage of said wheel, while such carriage is in movement on its road or railway. We also claim, the manner in which we have applied the working brake to its wheel and the lever of the brake worked by it, viz., by a hinged lever and a 10 spring, or the equivalent therefor, as specified, the same admitting of the adaptation of the brake to the irregularity of the periphery of the wheel, and imparting to the brake mechanism a very advantageous elasticity of action. We also claim, in combination with the wheels made to move towards and away from their brake rubbers or brakes, as specified, a mechanism, which by 15 means of the power that produces draft of the carriage or puts it in motion, as described, shall move such wheels away from their brakes, so as to release the said brakes from being moved or pressed by their respective wheels. We also claim, so combining the woi-king and main brake mechanisms of the two sets of wheels, that whenever the working brakes of either set are put 20 in operation by their wheels, the main brakes of all four of the wheels, or those of both sets, shall simultaneously be put in operation on their wheels. We also claim, in combination with the working rod of the working brakes, a shaft and its turning lever (or its equivalent), a clutch dog, or equivalent connection, of such nature as to so connect with a similar contrivance applied 25 to the w’orking rod or shaft of another carriage, as to cause both rods to be moved or rotated whenever either is .put in rotation by its lever, the same enabling all the brakes of the train of cars to be simultaneously put in action by the movement of any lever and its shaft of their working shafts. In testimony whereof, we have hereunto set our hands and seals, the 30 Sixteenth day of February, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. GUSTAVUS ADOLPHUS SOMERBY. (l.s.) CHARLES WILLIAM FOGG. (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.r A.D.1854. Oct. 24.JS? 2263. SOMEKBY & FOGG'S Specific^xion-. (l SHEET F I C . I FIG. 7 s ■; 1 r' ;>■ ,Fj ; ' c . 8 . III ' Y_ p 4 —W F I C . 5 F I C - 6 . The filed ch'mrriruj ifi not . rvlvred. Drawn on Slone by Malby & Sons. London: Prhilotlbv(»ivoi?"K Ivdwaud Hyuk nml William Svottlsvoodl , IVinUTs’l.o tho-Queens most Iai'cIIahI Majo-slv. I8.J-Vlibrary Of THE UNIVERSITY Of ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2264. Machinery for Printing. LETTERS PATENT to Isaac Adams, of the State of Massachusetts, of the United States of America, for the Invention of “New and Useful Improvements in Machinery for Printing.” Sealed the 3rd April 1855, and dated the 24th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Isaac Adams at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 24th October 1854. I, Isaac Adams, of the State of Massachusetts, of the United States of 5 America, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention for “New and Useful Improvements in Machinery for Printing ” to be as follows:— Firstly, it consists in a mechanical combination by which the motion pro- duced by a crank and pitman or connecting' rod is so modified and commu- nicated by an alternate or rocking lever to the toggle joints as to produce the 10 impressions, and so as to give the same toggle joints the necessary intervals of rest and reciprocating motion; the same consisting of the alternator and a connecting rod or pitman in combination with said crank and said toggle joints, or any other mechanical equivalents, acting substantially as specified, the said toggles having a roller, or any mechanical substitute therefor. 15 Secondly, it further consists in a mechanical combination employed to operate the frisket carriage, or impart to it with the inking rollers and nippers A2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. Provisional Specification. Adams Improvements in Machinery for Printing. their peculiar intervals of rest and reciprocating’ motions towards and away from the form of types; the same consisting, first, of an alternator or rocking lever; second, a lever or arms, their rocking shaft and roller connected with the alternator or rocking lever and frisket carriage ; third, a rocking shaft arm, connecting rod, and the crank, or any mechanical equivalent or equiva- lents therefor. By such combination of mechanical parts the inking rollers move over the type, the paper is placed on the frisket, then brought over the type, the inking rollers receive more ink, and during the dwell the impression is taken by the apparatus first described. Thirdly, it further consists in combining with the alternator and pitman, above mentioned, a slide, operated by a treadle, whereby the pressman at any time while the said alternator is in motion is enabled by the treadle to prevent the alternator from being thrown or moved against the toggles (or rollers thereof), sufficiently to straighten or move the said toggles into line with one another. Fourthly, it further consists in a combination of a rod and its arm springs, ketches, grooves, stops, and a rotating cam to actuate the nippers, to cause them to take a sheet of paper when the frisket moves towards the platten. Fifthly, it further consists in a combination of the said nippers with a frisket carriage, operated in the peculiar manner above described. Sixthly, it further consists in a combination of mechanism for obtaining register by a moveable stock, points, levers, cams, and a spring. Seventhly, it further consists in a means or method of changing the position of the register points, so as to range with each other across the feed board and the sheet, either in one direction or the other, in order to enable the pressman to turn the sheet, and point its second side in another direction. Eighthly, it further consists in causing the nippers to rest from their hori- zontal motion (or from that motion by which they are carried towards the sheets of paper) while they are being closed on the said sheets of paper, and while the carriage or part from which they receive said motion continues its movement. Ninthly, it further consists in a manner or means of constructing the nippers, that is to say, the making the upper blades somewhat longer than the lower blades thereof, whereby the said upper blades are made to project beyond the said lower blades, in order that they the said upper blades may be pressed down upon the edge of the sheet of paper on the tympan or feed board, so as to hold the paper still thereon while the said lower blades are being brought up to secure said paper in the nippers, the same being, of importance for the security of good register. 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Provisional Specification. A.D. 1854—N° 2264. s Adams' Improvements in Machinery for Printing. Tenthly, and for the additional security of good register, my Invention further consists in withdrawing the register points from the paper after it has been seized by the nippers, but previously to its being started from the place in which it has been adjusted or pointed, the same being necessary to secure good 5 register, and prevent any enlargement of the point holes or tearing of the paper at the point holes made through it. Eleventhly, it further consists in so constructing the tympan that it may be altered in width, so as to make it correspond with sheets of various widths, of nippers of various lengths, while the register points in the mean time are still 10 preserved in their central position. Twelfthly, it further consists in delivering bands and rollers, or mechanical equivalents, for either or all of them, in combination with the frisket or any equivalent therefor, the same being for the purpose of receiving a sheet of paper from said frisket, and delivering it upon a fly frame or any contrivance 15 destined to receive it. Thirteenthly, it further consists in the combination of bellows, or other equi- valent, with the frisket or support of the sheet of paper, and the two series of receiving and delivering endless bands or tapes. Fourteenthly, it further consists in a delivering fly frame, or its equivalent, 20 in combination with delivering bands, and also with delivering rollers, and also with a shaft and pullies, or any equivalent or equivalents for either or all of them. Fifteenthly, it further consists in the fly, or means for receiving and piling the sheets. 25 Sixteenthly, it further consists in arranging and operating the fly frame, so that its motions may be in directions perpendicular or thereabouts to the side of the press; the same enabling me to deposit the imprinted paper in a heap close to, or directly by, the side of the pressman, and thus afford him the opportunity of more readily examining each sheet after it is printed than he 30 would enjoy if the frame operated in any other direction. Seventeenthly, it further consists in the manner of operating the nippers, above described. Eighteenthly, it further consists in the combination of the delivering fly frame of mechanism employed to give said fly its proper motions and intervals 35 of rest, such parts consisting of a cajn, a lever, a rack, pinion, and a spring, with means of adjustment and government of the motions. Nineteenthly, it further consists in constructing and arranging the deliver- ing fly frame, that it may be depressed below the bands, rollers, and pullies, by means of which the sheets of paper are successively presented to the action4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. Provisional Specification. Adams Improvements in Machinery for Printing. of the said fly, in such manner that said fly shall not itself obstruct its reception of the said sheets preparatory to delivering them on the pile. Twentiethly, it further consists in arranging the delivering bands, pullies, and rollers, by which I am enabled to give any required velocity to them or any of them, and in that way to govern the time of the final delivery of the 5 sheets successively with reference to the times of action of other parts of the machine, and thus to gain a saving of time, which could not be gained were the velocities of said bands, rollers, and pullies arbitrarily governed by the motion of the frisket or frisket carriage, or any other part of a flat surface press, or by the velocity of the cylinder, or any other part of a 10 cylinder press. Twenty-firstly, it further consists in a combination of a heating apparatus with one or more of the distribution cylinders, so as to make it capable of receiving steam or hot or cold water, by which its temperature, as well as that of the ink upon it, maybe governed. 15 SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Isaac Adams in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 19th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Isaac Adams, of the State of Massachusetts, of the United States of America, send 20 greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-fourth day of October, A.D. 1854, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Isaac- Adams, Her special license that I, the said 25 Isaac Adams, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Isaac Adams, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, 30 the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention of “ New and Useful Improvements in Machinery tor Printing,” upon the condition [amongst others] that 1, the said Isaac Adams, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and 85Specification, A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. 5 Adams' Improvements in Machinery for Printing. cause the same to be filed iu the Great Seal Patent Office, or Office of Her Majesty’s Commissioners of Patents, within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Isaac Adams, do hereby declare the 5 nature of my said Invention to be fully described and ascertained in and by the following Specification, and the accompanying Drawings, letters, figures, and references thereof:— The printing machine embodying my Invention may be described as made up of five different systems or aggregations of parts, each system being used 10 for the performance of a distinct part of the process of,printing, to wit:— 1st, the distribution of the ink ; 2nd, pointing the sheets on the feed board or tympan; 3rd, taking the sheets from the feed board, and conveying them in between the platen and form of types ; 4th, producing the impression; and, 5th, removing the sheets from the press and laying them on the pile, or a 15 table, or other convenience provided for the purpose. Each system being so calculated and arranged within itself, and so arranged and combined with all the others, that whiie each performs its office in a distinct and complete manner successively, they all receive their appropriate motions from the same motive agent; and though some parts are in constant 20 operation while other parts move and stop alternately, the said systems severally complete the performance proper to each of them in consecutive order. Figure 1 is a sectional elevation of the whole machine as it would appear provided the front side piece of the frame could be removed, and the several 25 operative parts be made to still maintain their relative working positions. A, A, and C denote the opposite or fly wheel side of the frame. Figure 2 exhibits an end elevation of the inner face of the same part of the frame as it appears when separated from most of the operating parts of the machine. 30 Figure 3 denotes an inner side view of the front side piece of the frame. Figure 4 denotes a projection of the end piece of the right-hand end of the frame. Figure 5 denotes a projection of the end piece of the left-hand end of the frame. 35 And Figure 6 denotes a projection of a cross bar, which is secured to the two sides of the frame at a, a, Figures 2 and 3; see a section of said bar at a, Figure 1. b denotes the fly-wheel shaft, from which motion is communicated to all the moving parts of the machine. For a side view of this shaft, see b, Figure 7. c denotes the fly wheel. The fly-wheel shaft is6 A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. Specification. Adams Improvements in Machinery for Printing. sustained in the frame in bearings, one of which is seen at d, Figure and the other at e, Figure 4. The end /, Figure 7, may be supported by any proper bearings affixed to the inside of the front side piece of the frame. The outline of the right-hand end of the machine is exhibited in Figure 7 by the dotted lines, Figures 1 5 and 7, denotes a toothed wheel, whose office is to carry the crank h, and to rotate the shaft i,and the several pieces secured to said shaft. The shaft runs on the journals k, l, the former of which runs in the box m, attached to the end piece of the frame, and the latter in the box n, in the side piece of the frame, see Figure 2. o, Figures 1 and 7, denotes a toothed pinion, secured on the 10 fly-wheel shaft, its object being to give rotary motion to the wheel g, into which it geers. p, Figure 7, denotes a handle, secured to an arm of the fly wheel, so as to enable a person to put the machine in motion by hand. Pulleys and bands or other devices may be used to connect the machine with any other power. The process of distributing the ink is performed by means 15 of a system of rollers, as follows :—q denotes a section of the ink fountain. This is made upon the principle of those in common use, and is principally composed of a trough for the ink, a roller, and a scraper, r denotes the foun- tain roller, which is turned in the usual manner by means of a ratchet wheel on one end of it, and a pawl s, Figure 3, connected to the lever t, which is 20 attached by the fulcrum u to the side of the frame, Figure 3. v denotes a feed roller, which is provided with an elastic composition surface; its office is to take the ink from the fountain roller, and convey it to the distribution cylinder w; said feed roller is suspended by pivots in bearings [one of which is seen at x, Figure 3,] on the levers t, t, Figures 1 & 3, and it is brought 2a down in contact with the fountain roller [in order to take from it a portion of ink every time an impression is given] by means of a projection from each of two guide pieces, [one of which is seen at y, Figure 1,] which are attached to the ends of the bed; said projections when the bed is raised up to produce au impression come up under the ends of the levers t, t, and by forcing said 30 ends up, cause the opposite ends with the roller suspended upon them to move down, until said roller is brought into contact with the fountain roller, which imparts to it along its whole length a small quantity of ink. When the bed is lowered downwards, the weight of the levers t, [one of which [weights] is seen at z, Figure 1,] cause the feed roller to rise up and 33 come in contact with the distribution cylinder w, upon the surface of which the ink thus taken from the fountain will afterwards be distributed by the rolling together of the peripheries of said cylinder and said roller. The cylinder w should be sustained by its journals ^ in boxes, so attached to theSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. 7 Adams' Improvements in Machinery for Printing. ends of the two side pieces of the frame, Figures and 3, as to be adjustable vertically by means of slots or otherwise. The said cylinder receives constant rotary motion from the fly-wheel shaft, by means of an endless band, which runs over the pullies a1 on the fly-wheel shaft, and b1 on the shaft of the 5 cylinder. When the press is very large, or more than two rollers are used for spreading the ink on the “ form,” it is best to use bevelled toothed wheels to communicate motion to the distribution rollers, as represented in Figure 33; in which a10 is a bevelled geer on the fly-wheel shaft; 610 is a similar geer on the main distribution cylinder; and c10 and are bevelled wheels on a shaft e10, 10 which is made to run along by the side of the frame of the machine, in order that motion may be communicated from the fly-wheel shaft to the distribution cylinder. In order to make a perfect distribution of the ink from end to end over the surface of the cylinder w, a short roller c\ [see Figure 1 and Figure 8, [the latter Figure being a rear elevation of it, and the parts adjacent to it,] 15 is made to travel from end to end of said cylinder alternately. The surface of the said travelling roller is composed of an elastic composition, such as that in common use for making distribution rollers of printing machines, and is made to travel in a lateral direction on the surface of the cylinder, by being held against it with its axis in an angular position to the axis of the cylinder 20 while the said cylinder is revolving. The effect of this is to cause the travel- ling roller to gradually approach one end of the cylinder until its inclination is inverted, which taking place, said roller will travel towards the other end of the said cylinder, d1 denotes the frame of the carriage to which the travel- ling roller is attached; e\ e\ are wheels or friction rollers on which the said 25 frame rests; f1 is a transverse horizontal rod on which the carriage travels; and gl denotes a similar rod, which serves to keep the carriage in its proper position. The travelling roller revolves on a small rod or axle in a frame h1, which is secured to the end of a spindle or rocker shaft i\ which rocker shaft rests in a bearing formed by a hole made through the frame ¥ denotes 30 another spindle or rocker shaft, resting in another bearing, formed by another hole made through the lower part of said frame. To the end of this spindle is secured a cross piece p\ one end of which is connected to one end of the roller frame by means of the connecting rod m1. n1 is a weighted lever, which is attached to the end of the rocker ¥; o1 is a flat spring, which is 35 secured to the frame d1 by its lower end, while its upper end is made to bear against a collar or shoulder on the rocker shaft i1; its use is to press the travelling roller against the cylinder w. The diagonal or oblique bearing of the travelling roller against the cylin- der w is successively changed as followsSupposing the cylinder to be in8 A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. Specification, Adams Improvements in Machinery for Printing. motion, and the travelling roller to be in contact with it, as shown in the Drawings, Figure 1, the said travelling roller will advance towards one end of the cylinder until it shall have approached near to it, when the lever nx will be brought in contact with a projection which proceeds from the lower part /, Figure 2, of the scroll or framework w hich supports the parallel rods f1 and 5 and is near the said end of the said cylinder. The said projection, by means of the continued advancement of the traveller towards and against it, elevates the said weighted lever n\ and forces it over, so as to throw its center of gravity on the opposite side of the rocker shaft k\ to which it is attached. The said weighted lever in falling over will turn said rocker shaft in its bearing, and by 10 so doing will elevate the cross piece l\ and so as to carry the pin or screw rl, which goes through the slot s1, Figure 8, made through the connection rod m\ in coutact with the upper end of the said slot, and thereby raise the con- necting rod m1, and the end or part of the frame of the roller c\ and reverse the angular position of the said roller, whereby it will be caused, by the rota- 15 tion of the cylinder w, to travel towards the other end of the said cylinder. Having reached the said end, the said weighted lever will meet another projection from the opposite scroll or framework, w hich supports the opposite ends of the said parallel rods/1 and /; said projection will in its turn reverse the position of the said weighted lever and the travelling roller, or move the 20 same back again into their original positions. The distribution cylinder w may be made of wood, or it may be constructed of metal, and be hollow and tight, so as to be capable of holding water or steam. It may be provided with a faucet, or some other equivalent, through which cold or heated water may be introduced into said cylinder; or it may 25 have pipe and cock, or their equivalents, w'hich pipe may be connected with the interior of said cylinder by means of a hole made through the shaft thereof. Through said pipe steam, instead of hot water, may be introduced into the cylinder ; by these means the temperature of the ink and the distribution rollers may be regulated. 30 Two or more cylinders may be used instead of the said cylinder. The ink being thus properly distributed over the surface of the cylinder w, is trans- ferred by the said cylinder to the elastic composition surfaces of one, two, or more rollers s1, s1, which are made to transfer the same to the printing surface of the form of types c5. 35 The said two rollers s1, s1, are suspended in the usual manner by their journals, which are made to run in boxes properly fixed to the front part of a sliding frame t1, which I call the frisket carriage. Figure 9 denotes a top view of said carriage, the roller, boxes, and certain other parts attached to it; seeSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 9 Adams' Improvements in Machinery for Printing. also Figures 10 and 11, which are respectively a top and side view of one half of a frisket carriage, having certain other parts, to be herein-after described, attached to it. In Figure 34 may be seen a system or arrangement of elastic distribution 5 rollers s\ s', s\ s1, such as may be used when four rollers are hung in the frisket carriage, and by it are to be passed over the form of4 types. In these Draw- ings the dotted lines represent toothed wheels which connect the distribution rollers and cylinders together. In Figure 341 may be seen the boxes /10, /°, d11, d11, in which the journals of the distribution cylinders run. The boxes of 10 those hung in the frisket carriage are screwed on to perpendicular spindles, which are put into holes in the framework of the carriage in such manner as to allow of their playing up and down, and they are held down with the proper force by spiral springs on said spindles. The boxes are raised or lowered by the screws on the spindles, said spindles being turned for the purpose. In order 15 to prevent said spindles from turning at improper times, there may be nicks in the edges of their heads, and springs with little perpendicular projections to act in said “nicks,” and made to bear against them. Figure 35 represents a system of distribution rollers arranged as required when six rollers are used to spread the ink upon the form of types. In this 20 Drawing the dotted lines indicate the toothed wheels which transmit motion from one elastic roller or cylinder to another. The surfaces of the several cylinders c10, c10, c10, are elastic; the surfaces of those cylinders against which they bear beiftg made of wood or material inelastic, comparatively speaking. Figure 351 shows the boxes in which the journals of the cylinders run. 25 The boxes/10, gn, gw, glt>, should be set upon springs in holes in the frame- work, so that they may be capable of rising and falling. They may be adjusted at the proper height by screws hw, hw, hw, h10. The box /10 may have a joint or some suitable contrivance by which it may be allowed to be moved laterally, in order that the roller which it supports may be made to conform to 30 the cylinders against which it may run. The box /10, shown in Figure 341, should be provided with similar means of adjustment, and the same may be said of the boxes gw, gw, of said Figure 341. v\ v\ Figures 1, 2, and 3, denote rails having grooves in their top sides; the said rails are secured to the inner sides of the press frame, their said grooves being for the frisket carriage to 35 slide in. When the impression is being produced, the position of the frisket carriage is such as to bring the rollers s\ in a central position on the cylinder w, whereon they lay, and roll in contact with said cylinder during most of the time that the bed is in the act of rising and falling. By these means the ink is evenly communicated from said cylinder to the whole surface10 A.D. 1854.----------N° 2264. Specification. Adams' Improvements in Machinery for Printing. of the rollers s\ s1, the said rollers by means of a proper movement of the frisket carriage being afterwards caused to roll entirely over the form of types, first from left to right, and next back again to their places on the distribution cylinder w, thus rolling twice over the form. This motion of the frisket carriage and the parts attached to it is produced by means of the vertical levers or arms w\ wx, (see Figures 1 and 12,) which are attached to it by means of two connecting rods x\ that are properly jointed to said arms and to the arms projecting from said carriage, as seen at yl, y\ in Figures 1 and 9, The said arms or levers w1, w\ proceed upward from near each end of a transverse rocker shaft z\ which is supported in the machine by gudgeons a2, a2, Figure 12, which are supported in bearings b2, (see Figures 2 and 3,) made on the inner surfaces of the two side pieces of the frame, c2, Figure 1, denotes another rocker shaft, which lays parallel to the one just described, and rests in bearings on the inside surfaces of the frame in the same manner as those represented at b2, b2. From near the middle of the shaft an arm or lever d2 proceeds upwards, and is connected, by means of the con- necting rod or shackle bar er (see Figure 1) and proper joints, to the crank pin h, which projects from the side of the toothed wheel g. It may be seen that the crank pin h stands off sideways somewhat from the crank pin/2; this is for the purpose of timing the motions produced by the crank h2 with that produced by the crank f2. g\ Figure 1, denotes an instrument which I call an alternator; it is fixed to the rocker shaft c2, near to its front end, and in such manner as to receive in the excentric slot or groove h2, made through the friction roller i2,Figure 12, said roller being affixed to the front arm w1, and upon the projecting pin ¥ thereof in such position and manner, that when motion is given to the rocker shaft c2 by the crank and the intermediate parts, it will cause the aforesaid alternator to have a reciprocating motion, and carry the roller i2 through all parts of the said slot or excentric groove h2, through or in said alternator. This operation will give a regular and progressive motion to the roller i2, the arms iu1, wl, and the frisket carriage, to which they are attached, and will hold said arms and carriage still at and during the proper time, according as the direction of said slot in its different parts varies more or less from, or coincides with, the arc of a circle, whose center is the center of the rocker shaft c2. The alternator g2 is made to perforin its office as follows:—When the various operating parts of the machine occupy the positions in which they are represented in Figure 1, the friction roller i2 will be in the upper extremity of the slot of the alternator, and the frisket carriage and the two ink rollers s\ s1, will be drawn to their extreme limit of motion towards the right-hand 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. 11 Adams Improvements in Machinery for Printing. end of the machine. Now, supposing the machine in operation, the operating parts being situated as just mentioned, the moment the axis of the crank h passes its line of centers, it will cause, by its operation on the connecting rod e2 and lever d2 and rocker shaft c2, the alternator to begin its motion towards 5 the left-hand end of the machine, which motion being continued, causes the friction roller i2, while moving along with the alternator, and carrying with it the arms w\ w\ and the frisket carriage and the inking rollers s1, s\ to descend gradually in the slot of the alternator, until the center reaches the dotted line l2, where said slot begins to be an arc of a circle, whose center is 10 in the axis of the rocker shaft c2. The motion thus produced to this extent will have given the frisket carriage its entire motion towards the left, and have brought the inking rollers s\ s\ to a central position on the distribution cylinder w, where they remain and receive a distribution of ink, until the crank h shall have caused the alternator to perform the remaining part of its 15 motion towards the left, and a reversed motion, such as to carry the centre of the roller r again to the dotted line P. This having taken place, the said roller will begin to rise towards the upper part of the slot of the alternator, and to move towards the right-hand end of the machine, and carry with it the said arms, frisket carriage, and inking rollers, until these parts have all 20 received their requisite motions in that direction. On completion of the same, the crank h will again pass its said line of centers, and produce the motion in the opposite direction, as before described. During the progress of the process of distribution, the sheets to be printed must be successively laid upon the tympan, and pointed so as to make register. 25 The following is a description of the tympan, and the parts intended to govern the register, m2, Figure 1, denotes the tympan or feed board; and Figure 13 exhibits a view of the underside of it, together with the parts which sustain and operate the register points n2, ri\ Figure 1. This tympan or feed consists of a rectangular frame o2, covered on its 30 upper side with a sheet-iron plate p'\ which extends from end to end of said frame, and from its upper or right-hand edge down into the cross bar q2, thus constituting a regular inclined plane, upon which the sheets of paper to be printed are to be successively laid. Its lower edge rests upon the top edges of the two sides of the press frame. Its upper part is supported by 35 the gudgeons r2, r2, Figure 13, which rest in bearings in the upper ends of the standards s\ s2,which are raised respectively above the upper edges of the two sides of the press frame, see Figures 1, 2, 3. The tympan is thus supported in order that it may be turned up nearly12 Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. Adams Improvements in Machinery for Printing. to a vertical position, so as to make room for the platen to be moved off from over the bed. I, t'\ Figure 1, denote small holes or cavities made in the inside edge or face of the further side piece u2 of the frame of the said tympan. These holes are made for the reception of one end of a rod, which it is neces- sary to put across the said tympan frame, for the purpose of sustaining the 5 edges or lower parts of such sheets of paper as may be too wide for said tympan 'without such or a similar provision. The end of said rod which comes next to the person who points the sheets may be secured to the tympan, by passing a pin through one of a number of holes made horizontally through the rear end rail of said tympan, opposite to the holes said pin being made to 10 enter a hole drilled into the end of said rod. This mode of securing the rod is adopted in order that it may be changed conveniently and quickly from one place to another, or be taken out and dispensed with, as circumstances may require. The sheets, after they have been pointed, are seized by nippers and dragged 15 from the tympan in a manner hereafter to be described. In order to prevent the tearing of the paper sheets at the point holes, it becomes necessary for the points to be drawn down below the surface of the tympan the moment after the sheets have been fastened upon by said nippers, and a moment before they begin to be moved from said tympan. This is performed, and the points again 20 thrust out successively, as follows:—The points n2, nr, consist of small spindles, each of which is pointed at one end, but otherwise of uniform size, except- ing in the middle, which is enlarged, and has a groove turned or formed in it, the said groove being made to receive the forked end of one of two little levers v\ w2. x2, x2, denote stocks or frames which sustain the points and 25 their levers. Each of the points rests and moves up and down freely through two projections z2, y2, made upon the outer end of each of the said stocks. Each of the lovers v2, w2, which operate said points is secured to one of the said stocks by means of a fulcrum screw or pin and each of the said stocks is secured to the iron plate of the tympan by a little screw bolt Is, 30 and a confining nut .. ..1-.. ■ -...- _ ... ... ________________________________ Adams Improvements in Machinery, for Printing. • of steel, bent nearly into a right angle, as seen in Figure 11,) and a lower half, which has a hinged joint at r\ the part below said joint being rivetted or other- wise secured to that part of the upper half which is below the angle thereof. This said lower part of said upper half is that by which the nipper is secured 5 (by means of the screw s4, Figure 11,) to the middle bar of the said inner frame Z4, see Figure 11.' t\ &c., Figures 14 and 16, are screw holes in said bar, in which the screws which secure the nippers to it are inserted. u\ Figures 21 and 11, is a flat bar, which is fixed upon the outer face of the bar to which the nippers are attached. Its duty, which is to close the nippers, 10 is performed as follows:— - Screws, such as are denoted by Figure 22, and having friction rollers (as seen in Figure 23], are put through peculiar diagonal-shaped slots v% v'i, v\ &c. of said bar, and are screwed into corresponding holes in the middle bar of the frame l\ in such manner as to allow the bar u* to be slipped back and forth 15 endwise, in order to - cause said friction rollers and screws to work freely through the whole length of-the’slotsw Now, the end w4 of the bar rt4 is fitted to the inside of the forward end of ■ ■ , p the right-hand end piece of the stock, in the manner of a mitre, [that is to say, both are made angular or bevelled, as seen in Figures 14 and 15,] so that when 20 the inner frame is pressed in towards the .main body of the stock, the bevelled, end of the said end piece of said stock operates against the end of the sliding bar, in the manner of a cam or wedge, and causes it to slip along on the middle bar of the frame Z4, whereby the friction rollers, Figure 23, and screws, Figure 22, are caused to operate through the said diagonal slots 25 The upper sides of said slots move over and upon said friction rollers and screws in the manner of inclined planes, and so as to cause said bar w4 to rise up, and bear or crowd its upper edge against the lower blades of the nippers, and so as to force or turn said lower blades upwards against the upper ones, and cause both of said blades to take firm hold of the paper which is laid upon 30 and to be drawn off the tympan or feed board. The manner in which these nippers perform their office is as follows:— Let it be supposed that a sheet has been properly pointed on the feed board and,the nippers are being moved towards it: just as said nippers emerge from under the platen, the friction roller f4 on the nipper frame will enter the 35 crooked groove 5* on the side of the frame. This groove or slot, operating on the said friction roller, will cause the nipper frame to rise up and, elevate the nippers as they advance, until .the. forward, ends of their upper blades shall be . presented above the edge of the paper on the tympan, when, by a sudden bend or turn . downwards in said groove, or by the operation of a cam, or other20 A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. Specification. Adams' Improvements in Machinery for Printing. mechanical equivalent, as before mentioned, the ends of said upper part or parts of the nippers will be brought suddenly down upon the lower edge of the tympan, and the sheet which may have been laid on it. At the instant this occurs, projections v9, Figures 11, 16, 17, and 18, from the corners of the inner frame, meet projections c\ d\ Figures 2 and 3, from the sides of the 5 frame, which arrests the further progress of that part of the nipper frame and the nippers; but the frisket carriage, and consequently the main stock of the nipper frame, continuing to move on for a short space further, the said inner frame \Jd, Figure 16,] is pressed in towards the main part of the stock suffi- ciently to cause the bevelled end tn9 of the end piece a;9 of said stock to operate 10 on the sliding bar id, and cause it to close the nippers upon the sheet, as above described. The movement of the frisket carriage in the opposite direction carries the sheet in between the bed and platen, the same as in the case of the nippers first described. The bar id is thrown back, so as to relieve the pressure of 15 nippers upon the paper, as follows :—if, Figure 2, denotes a wedge or cam, affixed by one end, by means of a screw pin or pivot z\ to the side of the frame of the machine, in the manner of a latch or click ; its place on the side of the frame being such, that very soon after the nipper frame shall begin its motion towards the right-hand end of the machine, the end of the bar id will be 20 brought against the wedging part a5, which will cause said bar to slide back endwise, its diagonal slots at the same time allowing it to drop down, and thus to relieve the lower blades of the nippers, so that said nippers shall open to receive the sheet as the nipper frame shall be elevated, as before described. When the nipper frame with the nippers closed shall be in motion towards 25 the left-hand end of the machine, the end y9 of said bar vd will be brought in contact with the under side of the wedge and will elevate it, so as to pass under it. As soon as the bar passes beyond the wedge click, the latter will drop back to its place of rest, where it will be ready at the proper moment again to operate on the bar vd, as aforesaid. SO The bed on which the form of types is placed is represented at If, Figure 1, the said form also being exhibited at c\The bed'is constructed in the usual manner, and must be strong enough to sustain the impression. While it rises or falls, it is kept steady in its place by means of projections from its ends, which slide in grooves dJ\ Figures 2 and 3, formed on the side pieces of the 35 frame, and also by a guide piece V (Figure 1), firmly secured to said bed, and made to project into other vertical grooves formed on the sides of the frame at f~‘, Figures 2 and 3. The bracing rods g5, Figure 1, also serve to preserve the horizontal positionSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. 21 Adams Improvements in Machinery for Printing. of the bed. The platen is represented at lv\ Figure 1. Figure 24 is a pro- jection of the same, showing its top side, together with certain parts attached to it, to be herein-after described, t denotes the bottom bar, which sustains the impression. It extends across the machine, and is connected by its ends to the 5 platen by strong iron bolts, which pass up by the sides of the press frame from the said ends, and are received in the openings P, P, Figure 24, prepared for the purpose in the side and near the ends of the strong rib piece Z3, which passes over the top of the platen, and forms a part of it. m5, n5, (Figure 1.) are progressive levers, called toggle joints, by which the bed is successively raised 10 up, so as to bring the types in contact with the sheets against the face of the platen with suitable force to produce the impressions. The lower end of the lower one, n5, rests on a ledge o5, projecting from the side of the bottom bar at its lower edge. The upper end of the upper one, mr>, is made to operate against the under side of the bed, as seen at (Figure 1). The toggle 15 joints are operated by means of the alternator which is in principle of con- struction and operation very similar to that described for operating the frisket carriage, r5 is a friction roller, against which the alternator acts to throw up and straighten the toggle levers. Said roller is placed on the center joint pin s3, and in a slot t3, about four inches wide (the length of the roller) 20 in the middle part of the toggles, said slot being made to extend from vf‘ in the upper lever to v1 in the lower one, and forms a suitable opening for the alternator , so as to raise said pin out of the depression of the slot in the upper part of the alternator, in order that when the'pitman is thrown forward, said pin shall slip through the remaining or curved part of the 15 slot, and thereby, in order to prevent an impression being produced, allow the alternator to stop short of the place it is carried to when impressions are produced. This slide is operated by means of two arms or levers fe, ge, affixed to the two ends of a rocker shaft h6 (see dotted lines in Figure 6), one end of which 20 has a bearing in the box i® (Figure 6), and the other end a bearing in the hole ¥, Figure 3, made in the side of the frame. The arm /c at one' end of said shaft has a friction roller Is affixed near to its outer end; said shaft is so placed as to bring said friction roller under the curved part m8 of said slide. The arm ge on the other end of said shaft should be made of the necessary 25 length and shape to bring its outer end into close proximity with the foot of the person who may be employed to lay the sheets on thetympan. When it may be necessary to prevent an impression, such .person may, with the foot upon the outer end of said arm, depress it, so as to raise the said friction roller against the said curved part of said slide, and thereby elevate the said slide 30 and the pitman, so as to cause said pin a? to pass into the upper part bf the slot, as aforesaid. ' ■ * < ' n* (Figure 1) denotes one of two or more spiral springs, which are made to counterbalance the weight of the bed and the form of types; they rest at the bottom upon a sort of frame 0®, the rock shaft or bar ;/, which constitutes 35 one side of said frame, forming a rocker shaft, with gudgeons at its ends, which rest in bearings cf, 6, which constitutes a bearing for 10 the said pin; the same being for the purpose of lessening or increasing the impression, by increasing or lessening the distance between the upper joint of the toggles and the face of the bed upon which the form of types rest. yG, ya, ye, y6, Figures 1 and 24, are wheels which sustain the platen upon the horizontal railways, formed of the upper edges of the two side pieces 15 (Figures 2 and 3) of the frame. These wheels which sustain the platen are fixed to the end of shafts z\ A, which have journals that run in bearings at a7, a7, a7, a7, (Figure24.) The object of said shafts and wheels is to serve as a carriage, by which the platen may be easily moved from over the form of types and back, when such 20 form is to be changed or another put on, or for any other purpose. The parch- ment tympan is secured to the face of the platen by means of a frame V (Figures 1 and 24), which is made to surround the edge of the platen, and is secured in its place by slide bolts or other proper contrivances. The blanketing is put within this tympan, and between the parchment and platen. The tympan 25 sheet d~ (Figure 25) consists of a long sheet of paper, or other suitable material, which is to be rolled upon a roller c7 (Figures 24 and 25), which roller is suspended by its journals in bearings attached to one side of the platen. From this roller the end of the sheet is taken and passed under the platen, so as to cover that part which the types are to be pressed against when an impression 30 is produced, and secured to another similar roller 7, situated at the other edge of the platen; said roller e7 being suspended by its journals in bearings which rest on springs a10, and are jointed to the platen at b10. The said springs are for the purpose of causing the roller to take up any slack which may occur in consequence of a stretching of the sheet, and also to allow of the rollers con- 35 forming to any difference of length which there may be in the two edges of the said sheet. These rollers, together with the parts connected with them, constitute a convenient device by which the tympan sheet is well secured over the face of the platen, and easily and quickly exchanged from place to place, whenever that part of it against which the impression may be produced mayA.D 1854.—N“ 2264. Specification. Adams' Improvements in Machinery for Printing. become ■ soiled. When a place on said tympan has become, soiled, the rollers c\ e\ are to be turned in such manner as to unwind the tympan sheet from one roller, and to wind up the soiled part of said sheet on the other roller. Thus, a clean part of.said tympan sheet may be successively drawn over the face of the platen, according as circumstances may require. . When 5 said sheet has been drawn smoothly by said rollers, they are secured from turning back (so as to unwind or loosen said tympan sheet) by means of pawls y7, /7, (or other suitable means,) said pawls being affixed to the platen, and respectively dropped into the teeth of the ratchet wheel g1, g\ fixed on the ends of said rollers. , . Figure 25 is a separate projection of the tympan sheet and the rollers c7, e7, for operating it. h\ h\are handles by which said rollers may be, turned around. The ends of the sheets are secured to said rollers by putting each of them into a groove c7 and e\ Figure 1, [made along in the side of each of said rollers,] and afterwards pressing a red into each of said grooves, so 15 as to wedge and confine the said sheet to the rollers. In Figure 33 is represented a mode or means of operating the tympan sheet rollers c7, e7, (shown at Figures 1, 24, 25, and 36,) and said sheet, such being by means of a crank iw, on the cuter end of the main .shaft (i). To effect this, a lever (F°), (Figure 33,) is suspended loosely upon the outer end of the 20 journal of one of said rollers (viz., 8, by means of which the fly is brought back to the proper position for receiving the sheets from the delivering rollers; said fly is com- 5 posed of the arm or stock q8, Figures 1 and 27, and a series of fingers or prongs Is, r8, &c. which project from said stock, as seen in Figures 1 and 27. Every succeeding pair of said fingers except the two outer should be covered with light cloth or other suitable material, as seen in Figure 27, so as to form a species of web from one finger to the other. The object of this is to enable 10 the air to act against said webs when the fly is put in motion, and modify or retard the velocity which it would otherwise receive. A friction spring s8, Figure 27, is made to co-operate in the same object; this it does when the fly is thrown over, by sliding along against a sort of curved and stationary cam or inclined plane t8, attached to the frame of the press, as shown by the 15 dotted lines in Figure 7. When the fly is in its proper position for receiving the sheets, as shown in Figure 1, and by the dotted lines in Figure 7, the several endless bands of the lower set of rollers and pullies enter the spaces id, id, &c. between the fingers. The rocker shaft ns, to which the fly is attached, is sustained in bearings on 20 the top of the front side of the machine. The winding, or, as it is sometimes called, the spiral, spring o8, on the rocker shaft ns, is secured to said shaft by means of the collar w8 and the set screw t's. By means of said collar and set screw, the former may be turned around and secured in any place which may be necessary to adjust or temper the force of the spring to the labor 25 it may have to perform, in successively throwing over the fly, in order to lay the sheets on the pile. The other end of said spring o8 is secured to the press frame by inserting it in a hole made in the side of the collar 8, which collar is held fast by means of the pin if, which projects from it, and is made to enter a hole made in the side of the bearing for the journal of the said rocker shaft. 30 The fly should be capable of swinging through an arc of one hundred and eighty degrees, more or less, as circumstances may require. The rotating cam A (Figures 1 and 7) operates the vertical lever a9, which in its turn moves the horizontal slide and rack la; said slide rack gears into and turns the pinion p8, and consequently the rocker shaft and fly to 35 which said pinion is attached, the same being done in such manner as to carry said fly over and into the position it must occupy in order to receive a printed sheet of paper from the delivering rollers and pullies, herein-before described.Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2264. 29 Adams Improvements in Machinery for Printing. c9, Figure 7, denotes a connecting rod, which by proper joints connects the top end of the lever a? to the slide rack b'\ The fulcrum of said lever is seen at d9, Figure 7. Said fulcrum may be affixed to a bracket, which may be bolted to any convenient part of : and Will lam Spotti swoon e , Printers to the Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855.LIBRAS OF THfc «Hwtwnv «' UAW0‘*SHEET 2 . AD. 1854, OCT. 24, N? 2264. ADAMS’ SPECIFICATION, (IE SHEETS. ) TJw filed/ drcttvwjj is not/ colored/. Drawn on. Stone by Malty &. Soils . LojS'jjOn ; Printed by George Edward Etke andlVmxAM Spottiswoode , Printers to the Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 18 54, Oct. 24, N?2264. AD AM S ’ S PECIFICATION, (m SHEETS.) This fCUcL draMing not coloreds. _ Brawn on. Stone BytlylHbj 8c Sons . London: Pnntedbj George Edward Eyre and. William Spottiswoode , Printers to the Queens mostExce]leiit Majest)T- 1855-library OF TH£ UNIVERSITY 01SHEET E. A.D. 1854, Oct. 24.N?2264. A])AM S ’ Specification. (IE SHEETS.) The/ filed/ drojvir^ ig colored/. JWvm ' 1855.library OF THE wewwn «"A"1018SHEET 5. AD. 1854, Oct. 24, N?2264. ADAM S ’ SPECrFICATTOJNF. FI C .26. F I C . 7 . (14 SHEETS.) 1---------------- FI 0 . 2 7 . Tl/jv f/Ud-' Jr faring wrwb oolorad/. i___________________________________________:______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ London: Priiitedby George Ewafjd E'er*: aadWixiiAM. Spottiswgode ; Printers to die Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855 • Drawn.oilStmie lay l/talby Sc SonsLIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISw A.D. 1834 , OCT. 24k,N?226^. ADAMS Specification. IT SHEETS. F 1 C . 8 . /V ' ^ V 2, ' Jr \ J SHEETS.) Th# fUad/ irawing ie nob colored/. Drawn, on. 5 tone Dy Ifafljjr 8c. S oils . London; PrintedbyGeokge Edward Exri and Wtt.tttam Spoxxlswoodi: , ' Printers!*) the Queers most Excellent Majesty: 1855.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF IUIH0I*SHEET 11*. i,? A.D. 1854.Oct. 24. N? 2264; ADAMS’ Specification. (lE SHEETS.) F I G The filed/eb't&vau/isTWl riiUrrMl/. London. famtedbyfaoR&E EpwAjm^^ro aiidVmiAM Spottiswoode .library Of THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D 1854 .............N° 2265. Tubular Steam Boilers. LETTERS PATENT to Ferdinand Charles Warlich, of Suffolk Street, in the County of Middlesex, Gentleman, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Generating Steam.” Sealed tlie 19th December 1854, and dated the 24th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Ferdinand Charles Warlich at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 24th October 1854. T, Ferdinand Charles Warlich, of Suffolk Street, in the County of 5 Middlesex, Gentleman, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention for “ Improvements in Generating Steam,” to be as follows:— This Invention is peculiarly applicable to boilers with tubular flues, and consists of employing fluid iron in combination with phosphorous, sal-ammoniac, sulphur, and fluxes, as the means of producing the requisite heat in the tubes 10 for evaporating the water which surrounds them. For this purpose, a com- position consisting of melted iron, phosphorous, sal-ammoniac, sulphur, and fluxes is introduced into metal tubes, which will fit within the tubular flues of the boiler, and these combined matters will for a time give off considerable heat, and evaporate the water in the boiler. It is not essential that all the 15 ingredients above mentioned should be used together, but it is preferred that such should be the case.2 A.D. 1854.---------N° 2265. Specification. _____________________________________________________ ) ____________________ Warlich's Improvements in Generating Steam. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of tlie Letters Patent, filed by the said Ferdinand Charles Warlich in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 24th April 1,855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Ferdinand Charles Warlich, of Suffolk Street, in the County of Middlesex, Gentleman, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-fourth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Ferdinand Charles Warlich, Her special licence that I, the said Ferdinand Charles Warlich, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Ferdinand Charles Warlich, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improve- ments in Generating Steam,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Ferdinand Charles Warlich, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Ferdinand Charles Warlich, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say):— This Invention consists of employing tubular heaters (containing fluid, now combined with other matters), which are introduced into the tubular flues of steam boilers, or the tubular flues of other forms of vessels used for boiling or evaporating water or other fluids. For this purpose, strong iron tubes are used for the heaters, one end of each of which is closed, the other end of each of which is opened, to admit of being filled, as here- after explained, and of being closed by a screw plug or by a cap when filled ; these tubes or heaters are made of such size as to fit closely the tubular flues of the steam or other boilers or vessels in which they are to be used, admitting, however, of such heaters being drawn out and slided into such tubular flues ith facility. The heaters are lined with loam, mixed and prepared as usual 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. 3 A.D. 1854.—N° 2265. Warlich’sImprovements in Generating Steam. in foundries, before they are filled with melted materials or compound hereafter stated, or the loam liniug may have mixed therewith graphit; the loam, whether mixed or not, being made into the consistency of dough or a stiff cream, and applied so as to get a good coating of about one-eighth of an inch 5 thick to the interior of each of the tubes or heaters. These tubular heaters when in use are filled with a melted composition, prepared in the following manner ^ to f per cent, of saltpetre, b to | „ „ of sulphur, 10 lJ? per cent. of gypsum, all in a powdered state, to one hundredweight of melted iron; the three first being previously mixed by itself with water, and allowed to set and dry into a hard stony mass, which is then broken into small pieces or powder. To give this material or compound a higher degree of hardness, and to withstand 15 a-higher temperature before melting, the gypsum may be- roasted with about ten per cent, of alum in an iron pot or vessel, or in an ordinary crucible used for melting metals to a red heat in an even temperature; then this is mixed in a powdered state with the saltpetre and sulphur, as before mentioned, and stirred well with a solution of alum, the latter being 20 about one-thirteenth or one-fourteenth part, and cast into cakes not exceed- ing the thickness of half an inch. When perfectly set and dry, it is packed in casks or boxes to prevent access of moisture, and is ready for use when required, either broken up in small particles or powder. The quantity of cast iron to be used is melted in a small portable or fixed cupola furnace, into 25 which the materials of the compound above described are stirred, and then the melted metal is run into the tubes or heaters, care being taken to keep the atmosphere from contact with the melted metal as much as possible. The iron most suitable for the mixture or compound I have found to be grey iron, No. 1, of coarse grain, also iron called cold short iron. The tubes or heaters 30 as they are filled and closed are introduced into the tubular flues of the boiler or vessel containing the fluid to be boiled or evaporated. By these means heat will be applied with greater advantage than heretofore; and when the composition in the heaters have parted with its heat, the heaters are to be removed, and fresh ones introduced into the tubular flues in their place. The 35 composition in cooling and setting will be found to contract, and will con- sequently readily come out of the heaters, and may be again broken up and melted, and prepared for further use. In regard to the cupola furnace used for smelting the metal, I recommend the furnace not to exceed the height above four feet on board ship, and two feet in diameter, tapering towards the top;4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2265. Specification. I Varlich'sImprovements in Generating Steam. but when anthracite coal is used instead of coke, it should be at least two and a half feet diameter. The lining inside should be from nine to twelve inches, avoiding, however, the use of iron and lime in such lining. On board ship the cupola is best to be topped by a sheet-iron bell-shaped cover, with a common pipe as a mouth-piece, to lead the hot gases off. I would 5 remark that although I have been particular in mentioning the quantities or proportions of the materials used by me, I do not confine myself thereto. In witness whereof, I, the said Ferdinand Charles Warlich, have here- unto set my hand and seal, this Twenty-first day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. 10 F. C. WARLICH. (l.s.) Witness, S. Carpmael. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2266. Steam Engines and Boilers. LETTERS PATENT to Joseph Hopkinson the younger, of Huddersfield, in the County of York, Engineer, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Steam Engine Boilers and Safety Valves, and in Apparatus for Indi- cating the Vacuum in Steam Engine Condensers in Relation to the Existing Atmospheric Pressure.” Sealed the 20th April 1855, and dated the 24th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Joseph Hopkinson at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 24th October 1854. I, Joseph Hopkinson the younger, of Huddersfield, in the County of 5 York, Engineer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Im- provements in Steam Engine Boilers and Safety Valves, and in Apparatus for Indicating the Vacuum in Steam Engine Condensers in Relation to the Existing Atmospheric Pressure,” to be as follows :— My improvements relate, firstly, to an arrangement of boilers placed side by 10 side, the furnaces being so adapted that the products of combustion pass over their surfaces in a transverse direction, and consist in so combining them that two levels are formed by carrying the bottoms of a portion of the said boilers lower down than the others, by which means occasional spaces are formed, into which the products of combustion are directed by means of corresponding2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2266. Provisional Specification. Hopkinson s Improvements in Steam Engine Boiler's, Safety Valves, cj'C. bridges; this effect I practically accomplish by placing one or more boilers of comparatively small diameter between two or more of larger diameter, or I use boilers of the same dimensions, and place them at different heights. My improvement in safety valves for steam boilers consists in using one valve for the seat of another; the one being loaded within the boiler or a casing, so 5 as to be beyond the control of the attendant, and the other by usual external apparatus; thus I adapt an ordinary flat valve, and load it by means of a weighted lever. Within this valve I form an aperture for the second valve, by which a dead weight is suspended. My improvement in guages for condensers consists in using the same column 10 of mercury for ascertaining the existing pressure of the atmosphere and for indicating the vacuum. To accomplish this, I use a cock or cocks capable of alternately opening a communication between the atmosphere and the mercury, and between the mercury and condenser. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed 15 by the said Joseph Hopkinson in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 24th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Joseph Hopkinson the younger, of Huddersfield, in the County of York, Engineer, send greeting. 20 WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-fourth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Joseph Hopkinson, Her special license that I, the said Joseph Hopkinson, 25 my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Joseph Hopkinson, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel 30 Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Steam Engine Boilers and Safety Valves, and in Apparatus for Indicating the Vacuum in Steam Engine Condensers in Relation to the Existing Atmospheric Pressure,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Joseph Hopkinson, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should par- 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2266. 3 Hopkinsons Improvements in Steam Engine Boilers, Safety Valves, <$(c. ticularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. 5 NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Joseph Hopkinson, do hereby declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement and accompanying Drawings (that is to say):— My improvements relate, firstly, to an arrangement of boilers placed side by 10 side; the furnaces being so adapted that the products of combustion pass over their surfaces in a transverse direction, and consists in so combining them that two levels are formed by carrying the bottoms of a portion of the said boilers lower down than the others, so as to form" occasional spaces, into which the products of combustion pass. 15 My improvement in safety valves consists in using one valve for the seat of another; the one being loaded within the boiler or a casing, so as to be beyond the control of the attendant, and the other by the usual external apparatus. My improvement in guages for condensers consists in using the same column of mercury for ascertaining the existing pressure of the atmosphere and for 20 indicating the vacuum. And in order that my Invention may be fully understood, I have appended to this my Specification two Sheets of Drawings, which I will now proceed to describe. Fig. 1 is a longitudinal vertical section of a stationary steam boiler con- 25 structed according to my Invention ; and Fig. 2 is a cross section of the same. A series of boilers a\ a2, a3, b\ b2, 53, of two diameters are set in masonry c1. The upper parts of those shewn at a\ a2, a3, are provided with passages d, communicating with a steam chamber e, extending throughout the range. The smaller boilers communicate with the passages d by means of pipes/, excepting 30 the last of the series, which has a pipe g communicating with the force pump or other source from which water is supplied. The boilers a\ a2, a3, have man- holes, as at g, and access to those shewn at b\ is provided for by passages h, h. The fire bars are shewn at i, divided by masonry, so as to constitute three furnaces, and behind them is a bridge j, extending throughout their 35 width; between the boilers a2, a3, and a3, ¥, are other bridges k. The flue communicating with the chimney is shewn at l. The lower part of the boiler a1 is furnished with two water chambers m, extending downward in the masonry, which divides the sets of fire bars. These chambers are connected by a cross pipe, to which is joined a central pipe n, communicating with chambers o, p, I4 A.D. 1854.----------N° 2266. Specification. Hoplcinsons Improvements in Steam Engine Boilers, Safety Valves, 6fc. open to the lower ends of the boilers a a3, by which arrangement water is supplied to the larger series, and through the passages h to the smaller. Safety valves according to my improvement, hereafter to be described, or on any of the ordinary plans, may be adapted to the steam chest, as at p*, or to one of the boilers. By this improved form of boiler the products of combustion arising 5 from the several furnaces will be directed by the bridges into the spaces formed by the two levels of boilers, and will curl around the bottoms thereof as they pass onward along the entire series. Figs. 3 and 4 shew this part of my Invention applied to a boiler for marine purposes. The outward shell of the boiler, forming a water chamber, is shewn at a,secured by stays in the ordinary 10 manner. Within the chamber thus formed are placed a series of cylindrical boilers b, of different diameters, as before. These boilers are connected to the outer water chamber by passages d, divided into two compartments, and imme- diately behind them is a bridge g, which directs the products of combustion, as before described, from whence they pass into the flue h. In order, however, 15 to take up the remaining heat, transverse water chambers, as at c, may be adapted, arranged as shewn, or in any other ordinary manner. The upper tier, according; to the Drawing, is connected to the outer casing by a passage e, and to the boilers b by man-holes/. In concluding the description of this part of my Invention, I would observe 20 that I am aware of steam-generating apparatus having been constructed with a series of cylindrical boilers placed side by side. An arrangement of this description is known as “ Woolf’s boiler; ” but in such case the products of combustion wrere prevented from traversing the under sides of the several boilers, there having been intervening masonry, which compelled them to pass 25 upward and return downward through spaces existing between the boilers; whereas according to my Invention the said products are prevented from passing over the tops, and are directed so as to lap around the under parts. Other steam-generating apparatus have also been constructed with series of cylindrical boilers, arranged in such a manner as to prevent the products of 80 combustion from passing over the tops thereof; but the said boilers have been placed side by side, so that their bottom parts have been on a level instead of forming two lines, as in the case of my improvements. The second part of my Invention is shewn in the sectional view, Fig. 5. A part of the shell of a boiler is shewn at a, upon which is a mounting b, pro- 35 vided with a seat for a valve c. This valve is surrounded by a cover, carrying a lever d, by which the valve c is loaded, after the ordinary manner. The valve c is formed with a central aperture, constructed as a seat for a second valve e, kept thereon by a weight f, situate within the boiler. By this arrangement theSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2266. 5 HopJcinson s Improvements in Steam Engine Boilers, Safety Valves, eye. larger valve c is loaded, not only by its own weight d, but also through the medium of the smaller valve by the interior weight f. Suppose the pressure in the boiler to have arrived at the point at which the steam is intended to blow off, the valve e will be lifted from its seat, and as the weight/will then 5 be raised, a portion of the loading will be removed from the valve c, so as to enable it to rise, and furnish a larger orifice for the escape of steam. According to my last improvement, I use a column of mercury as ordinarily employed for ascertaining the atmospheric pressure, but with the addition of suitable passages or cock ways, for opening it at pleasure to the condenser of a 10 steam engine or to the atmosphere, so that the pressure in the former may be compared to that of the latter at corresponding periods. Having thus described and ascertained the nature of my said Invention, and the manner in which the same is to be performed, 1 desire it to be under- stood that I claim, as secured to me under the above in part recited Letters 15 Patent,— Firstly, so arranging a series of boilers in communication with each other that their lower parts shall constitute two or more levels, forming a wavy line, so as to expose the sides of the boilers, against which the products of combustion are caused to impinge, by means of bridges, such products of 20 combustion being prevented from passing between the boilers. Secondly, the double safety valve above described, the one constituting a seat for the other. Thirdly, the use of a column of mercury with communications capable of being opened at pleasure to the atmosphere and to the condenser. 25 In witness whereof, I, the said Joseph Hopkinson, have hereunto set my hand and seal, the Twenty-third day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. JOSEPH HOPKINSON. (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.SHEET 1. A-.D.1854k October 24-.IT? 2266 HOPKINS ON’S Specification . llw ftML cbrccwitig 7> -partbf ooIotmL/. XtrawiL oil Stone by Malty 8c. So] Lokbon: Erintedby George Edward Eyre and William Srottiswoode , Rioters to the Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855.library OF THE university of iuinoisSHEET 2 AJ). 1854. OCTOBER- 24. IN1? 2266. HOPKWSOlfS Seecieicateof. 'c (2 SHEET Tlw iiUd/'draww^ isp&rlty colored'. ^ ^ ;:vS' ■’*/* -;k ' f .DramonStone k Sons. LotVDor. -Prio.lcd brGeoixgi- Edward Evrk amWiuJAM Spottiswoodj; * | Pmteslotb.e Queers mostly 1855. 1LIBRARY OF THE , UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOIS^aa/'7v\aaaaaaaa/n/^aaa^\aaaaaaa(,vaaaaaaaaaaaaaa/\aaaaaaaaaaaaaa^ A.D. 1854 ............N° 2267. Extracting the Syrup from Sugar, &c. LETTERS PATENT to John Welsh, of Greenock, in the County of Renfrew, North Britain, Sergeant of Police, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Extracting Liquids erom Saccharine and other Matters.” Sealed the 17th April 1855, and dated the 24th October 1854. PR0VT' L SPECIFICATION left by the said John Welsh at the Office oi ommissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 24th October 1854. I, John Welsh, of Greenock, in the County of Renfrew, North Britain, 5 Sergeant of Police, do. hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in Extracting Liquids from Saccharine and other Matters to be as follows :— This Invention relates more particularly to the extraction of the syrup or treacle from sugar in the process of refining the same, and it consists in sub- 10 jecting the loaves or cones of sugar which are to be drained to the action of an air pump, thereby effecting the drainage of the sugar in a much superior and more complete manner, and in a much shorter time and with less reduction in the weight of the sugar, than in the processes hitherto in use. According to one modification of the apparatus, an air-tight chamber oi- ls vessel is employed, which is put in communication with the suction pipe of the air pump, and also with the bottom of the mould in which the sugar is put.2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2267. Provisional Specification. Welsh's Impts. in Extracting Liquids from Saccharine and other Matters. The communication with the latter is preferred to be by a pipe, provided with a stop-cock, to regulate the sucking action. A mouth-piece may be fixed on the end of this pipe, such mouth-piece being composed of gutta percha, or some other suitable flexible material, so that when the point of the mould is introduced, the atmospheric pressure will cause the mouth-piece to clasp it, 5 and so form an air-tight or nearly air-tight joint. The communication of the air-tight receptacle with the air pump is to be contrived so that the syrup may not obtain access to the pump; and the receptacle is provided with a suitable outlet, with a stop-cock or valve, to discharge the syrup which is drawn from the sugar. Two or more pipes may be fitted to the air-tight receptacle, in 10 order that two or more moulds may be operated upon at once, or so that the pump may be kept continually working, the moulds being changed in suc- cession. It is obvious that other forms of sugar moulds may be used in this apparatus besides those already in use. And it is also obvious that this general system of treatment is applicable to the extraction of liquids from 15 various other matters besides sugar. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said John Welsh in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 23rd April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, John 20 Welsh, of Greenock, in the County of Renfrew, North Britain, Sergeant of Police, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-fourth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her 25 reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said John Welsh, Her special license that I, the said John Welsh, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said John Welsh, my executors, administrators, or assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter 30 during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Extracting Liquids prom Saccharine and other Matters,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said John Welsh, by an instrument in writing 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2267. 3 Welsh's Jmpts. in Extracting Liquids from Saccharine and other Matters. under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascei’tain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. 5 NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said John Welsh, do hereby declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement in writing, referance being had to the accompanying Drawings, and to the letters and figures marked thereon, that is to say:— 10 My said Invention relates more particularly to the extraction of the syrup or treacle and moisture from sugar in the process of refining the same, and it consists in subjecting the loaves or cones of sugar which are to be drained to the action of an air pump or exhauster, thereby effecting the drainage of the sugar in a much superior and more complete manner, and in a much shorter 15 time and with less reduction in the weight of the sugar, than ordinarily arises in the processes hitherto in use. According to one modification of the appa- ratus, an air-tight chamber or vessel is employed, this vessel being put in communication with the suction pipe of the air pump, and also with the bottom of the mould in which the sugar is put. The communication with the latter 20 is preferred to be by a pipe, provided with a stop-cock, to regulate the sucking or exhausting action. A mouth-piece may be fixed on the end of this pipe, such mouth-piece being composed of caoutchouc, gutta percha, or some other suitable flexible material, so that when the point of the mould is introduced, the atmospheric pressure will cause the mouth-piece to clasp it, and so form 25 an air-tight or nearly air-tight joint. The communication of the air-tight receptacle with the air pump is to be contrived so that the syrup may not obtain access to the pump; and the receptacle is provided with a suitable outlet with a stop-cock or valve, to discharge the syrup which is drawn from the sugar. Two or more pipes may be fitted to the air-tight receptacle, in order 30 that two or more moulds may be operated upon at once, or so that the pump may be kept continually working, the moulds being changed in succession or otherwise. It is obvious that other forms of sugar moulds may be used in this apparatus besides those already in use, and it is also obvious that this general system of treatment is applicable to the extraction of liquids from 35 various other matters besides sugar. And in order that my said Invention may be properly understood, I shall now proceed to describe the explanatory Figures on the Sheet of Drawings hereunto attached. Figure 1 on the Sheet of Drawings is a side elevation, and Figure 2 is a4 A.D. 1854.——N°' 2267. Specification. Welsh's Impts. in Extracting Liquids from Saccharine and other Matters. plan, of one modification of exhausting vessel which may be employed in working out my Invention. This exhauster is a closed vessel A, of cast iron, fitted with two pipes or funnels B, which are made to communicate with the suction valve or valves of the air pump or pumps. These air pumps are not represented in the Drawings, but they may be constructed according to any of ;5 the systems at present in use; or, for example, they may be similar to those alfedy employed in connection with vacuum sugar pans. The funnels B are provided with overflow escape ducts C to carry off the syrup, if by any chance it should be pumped up into the funnels B. The cover of the vessel A is east with.a number of pipes D,into each of which is screwed a separate month- T(i piece E. This mouth-piece is fitted with a stop-cock F, and its open funnel- shaped mouth is furnished with a lining of caoutchouc, or other suitable soft and elastic material, capable of forming an air-tight joint with the apex or lower pointed end of the conical sugar mould G. The sugar from which the syrup is to be drawn olf being placed in the conical moulds G in the usual manner, 15 these moulds are inserted in their several mouth-pieces E, as represented in the Drawings; and the stop-cocks F being opened to form a communication with the interior of the vessel A, from which the air is being exhausted by the air pumps, the consequent atmospheric pressure on the surface of the sugar at the upper open ends of the conical moulds rapidly carries down the syrup 20 into the vessel A, leaving the sugar in the moulds in a fine dry crystallised condition. When the draining process is completed, the stop-cocks F are closed, and the moulds are removed, and are replaced by others containing fresh sugar, upon which the same treatment is repeated. The syrup is periodically taken from the exhaust vessel or receiver A as this vessel becomes 25 filled by means of a bottom discharge pipe at H. Having now described and particularly ascertained the nature of my said Invention, and the manner in which the same is or may be used or carried into effect, I may observe, in conclusion, that I do not confine or restrict myself to the precise details or arrangements which I have had occasion to describe or refer SO to, as many variations may be made therefrom without deviating from the principles or main features of my Invention; but what I consider to be novel and original, and therefore claim as the Invention secured to me by the herein- before in part recited Letters Patent, is,— First, the general arrangement and construction of machinery, apparatus, or 85 means for extracting liquids from saccharine and other matters, as herein- before described. Second, the system or mode of extracting liquids from saccharine and other matters by exhausting or partially exhausting the air from one side, end, orSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2267,' Welsh's Impts. in Extracting Liquids from Saccharine and other Matters. 5 part of the mass or portion of matter under treatment, so as to cause a pre- ponderance of atmospheric pressure, on any exposed part of such mass, and thereby cause the syrup or liquid to drain through in the direction of the exhaust action, as herein-before described. In witness whereof, I, the said John Welsh, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twenty-first day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. JOHN WELSH. (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.AJU854-. October 2207. WELSH’S SPECIFICATION. (J SHEET.) F I C . I Y f f •i i i i i i i i i 3 e I i i i x I iFter, Tbt ffad drawauf is net wlorcd Drawn on Stone by "Maiby & S ons London, ftintedby George Reward Eyre and William Sputti swoons . ftiuters to the Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855.library OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 ............N° 2268. Manufacture of Parian, Porcelain, Earthenware, &c. LETTERS PATENT to John Rickhuss, of the City of Worcester, China Potter, and Charles Toft, of the Parish of Saint John, Bedwardine, in the County of Worcester, Modeller, for the Invention of “ Improvements in the Manufacture of Parian, Porcelain, China, and Earthenware.” Sealed the 5th April 1855, and dated the 25th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said John Rickhuss and Charles Toft at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 25tli October 1854. We, John Rickhuss and Charles Toft, do hereby declare the nature 5 of the said Invention for “Improvements in the Manufacture of Parian, Porcelain, China, and Earthenware,” to be as follows: — Instead of baking the parian, &c., and then colouring it (by painting or printing), we propose to prepare a mould with raised patterns or ridges, so that when the parian, &c. before baking is pressed into or on it, it indents the 10 pattern in the soft material. The colour is then rubbed into the indentations, and the article is then turned in the lathe down to a smooth surface, and then presents the pattern as though it had been printed. The article is then2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2268. Provisional Specification. j Rickhuss § Toft's Impts. in the Manufacture of Porcelain, China, r. the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Treating certain Ores and Aiioys, and in Obtaining Products there- erom,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said William Henderson, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and 5 in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said William Henderson, do hereby declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be 10 performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof, that is to say : — My improvements refer to the more economical and certain separation of the several metals contained in what are commonly called mixed ores, that is to say, ores containing several metals, the separation and realization of each 15 or all being desirable; also to the treatment of the alloys of several metals, obtained sometimes as by-products, in the manufacture or reduction, by methods now in use, of copper, lead, tin, and several other metals; and also to the separation of gold and silver, when they occur as an alloy with copper, either as native copper, or any of the ores of copper, or in any of its stages of 20 manufacture or its finished state. My improvements also refer to the special treatment of ores containing a large proportion of zinc, arsenic, or other volatile metal, so as to obtain the zinc with the other metal or metals associated in the ore. My first improvement consists in a method of separating silver and gold 25 from copper and other ores when they contain very little or no arsenic, zinc, or other volatile metal. I first calcine the ore in the usual or any other con- venient manner until it is as free as is practicable from sulphur, and then add to the calcined ore as much sand, silica, cobbing, or stiff ore (all free from sulphur and carbonaceous matter) as will be required to form proto-silicates 30 of all the oxides of metals and earths contained in the calcined ore ; I also add before fusion from about 10 lbs. to 15 lbs. of nitrate of soda, or a proportionate quantity of peroxide of manganese, or other oxidizing agent, to every ton of the calcined ore. The charge of mixed ores and other matters is then smelted in a common reverberatory furnace, in which it is gradually brought to the 35 melting point with a partially open fire. If the ore has been absolutely freed from sulphur, the result will be gold or silver at the bottom of the furnace, and all the other metals as a slag or scoria, which is skimmed or tapped from the furnace. As sulphur, however, is generally present, the result will then beSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2270. 5 Henderson's Improvements in Treating Ores and Alloys, ij'C, a small proportion of regulus containing all the precious metals. This may be calcined and treated as before described, and about 10 lbs. of lead added for every estimated pound of the precious metals, the whole charge well stirred and allowed to settle, the slag skimmed off, and the lead tapped into a pot, 5 ladled out into moulds, and refined in the usual manner. Reguluses of copper or other metal containing silver or gold, cr both, are treated in the same manner. Carbonates or oxides of copper or other ore require no calcination, but are mixed with silica, &c. as above directed, and smelted at once. Metallic copper, either native, rough, or finished, may be treated in two ways; either 10 melted with a sulphuret or sulphur and iron, so as to convert it into a rich regulus, which is crushed, calcined, mixed with silica, and otherwise treated as above mentioned; or the copper may be melted and ladled into water, the shots mixed with silica, and an oxidizing agent, as above directed, and gra- dually brought to the melting point in a reverberatory furnace. The copper 15 or other metal is afterwards obtained from the slag thus produced by melting with a suitable flux, such as lime, fluor spar, or soda ash, and carbonaceous matter, or in the same manner as refinery slags are usually reduced in the ordinary process of copper smelting. My second improvement relates to the treatment of ores containing a pro- 20 portion of zinc or arsenic of sufficient amount to be considered worth saving, besides another metal or metals. In this case I proceed as follows:—I ascertain by analysis the composition of the ore, and if I find that it contains a large proportion of sulphur I calcine it in the furnace, and in the manner particularly described in the Specification of a Patent, granted to me the 14th 25 day of July 1853, using a low heat, and withdrawing the ore from the furnace when the proportion of sulphur is reduced as nearly as possible to half the amount of all the metals contained in the ore, reckoning all except iron. When the ore is removed from the furnace it is thoroughly moistened with water, and well exposed to the air for a few days; it is then ground SO fine enough to pass through a sieve of at least 100 meshes to the square inch, and is afterwards treated as will be presently described. When an ore of this class is found to contain without preparation the proportion of sulphur indi- cated above, it is at once reduced to powder without the previous calcination, but when it is found to contain less than the requisite amount of sulphur, 35 sulphur must be added. This can be done by admixture with an ore richer in sulphur, or by adding iron pyrites, or, preferably, by adding sulphuric acid to the powdered ore. The ores prepared by any of the above methods are first thoroughly dried and mixed intimately with a proportion of alkaline chloride, preferably common salt, and when the ore has not been previously calcined, or6 A.D. 1854.—N° 2270. Specification, Hendersons Improvements in Treating Ores and Alloys, Qc. had sulphuric acid or a sulphate added to it, a proportion of nitrate of soda, equal to 10 per cent, of the contained sulphur, must be added to the mixture. Peroxide of iron, peroxide of manganese, and several other oxidizing agents, if added in proportion, may be used, instead of the nitrate of soda, but I prefer the latter. In all cases, however, where gold exists in the ore, the addition of 5 nitrate of soda is recommended. The proportion of alkaline chloride is very variable, depending entirely upon the preponderance of any particular metal in the ore. When a large quantity of lead exists in the ore, the proportion of chloride necessary decreases. As a general rule, I find a proportion, varying from 3 to 4 times the amount of sulphur in the ore, to work very well, an 10 excess being preferable to a deficiency. When the mixture has been adjusted as above described, a charge of about 5 tons is placed upon the third bed of the patent furnace, described in the Specification before mentioned, and calcined as there directed. The mixture must be carefully and incessantly stirred, especially on the bottom bed; from 12 to 18 hours on each bed will, if 15 properly managed, be sufficient to decompose the ore. The result of the cal- cination is as follows:—Arsenic and iron with a few other metals of rarer occurrence pass off as chlorides in vapor, and, if necessary or desirable, may be condensed by water or steam. All the other metals with the silica and some oxide of iron remain in the furnace as chlorides and sulphates. The 20 calcination must be continued until all the iron and arsenic salts are either decomposed or sublimed; when this has been accomplished, the ore is removed from the furnace, and while still hot is put into a deep tank of boiling water. The solution thus obtained is treated while hot with moist carbonate or oxide of zinc, and well agitated; the carbonate or oxide of zinc is added until no 25 precipitate falls ; the vessel is then covered over and allowed to settle, and the clear liquor, which contains chlorides of zinc and alkali and sulphate of alkali, is run into coolers, and the alkaline salts crystallised out, leaving the chloride of zinc nearly pure as the mother liquor. The chloride of zinc may be further purified by concentration, when any remaining alkaline salts will io drop to the bottom of the evaporator, as anhydrous crystals. Pure carbonate or oxide of zinc may be obtained from the chloride by precipitating with carbonate or hydrate of lime, or carbonate or hydrate of any of the earths or alkalies. The insoluble matter left in the bottom of the vessel into which the decomposed ore is put, consists of silica and oxide of iron, and if lead "exists 35 in the ore, a proportion of sulphate of lead, which, if found in sufficient quantity to warrant the expense, is calcined with a little carbonaceous matter, and smelted for lead in the usual manner. The precipitate produced by the addition of the carbonate or oxide of zinc to the original solution may containSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2270. 7 Henderson sImprovements in Treating Ores and Alloys, dfc. copper, lead, silver, gold, and several other metals of rare occurrence. These metals may be separated by several methods. That which I prefer is to gradually raise the mixture to a low red heat in a small furnace, with constant stirring, and then dissolve in sulphuric acid, of about T35 specific gravity, in 5 a vessel lined with lead and heated by steam. The copper only is dissolved, and oxide of lead and a little sulphate of lead and metallic silver and gold are left as a residue ; this is smelted with carbonaceous matter, and about 20 lbs. of soda ash to the ton of mixture. The lead obtained is cupelled in the usual manner. When the ore to be treated does not contain sufficient 10 zinc or arsenic, but, on the other hand, contains a large proportion of silica and iron, I calcine it for a few hours, and then smelt for regulus as is usually done with copper ores. The regulus obtained is treated exactly as has been described. My third improvement consists in a means of separating from each other 15 the deposited oxides of arsenic and zinc, obtained as a by-product, in the manufacture of sulphuric acid, from mundics and copper and zinc ores, and in the calcination of such ores generally. I first convert the mixed oxides into sulphates (if not already in that state), by means of sulphuric acid, and after- wards carefully dry them, and mix with about twice their weight of common 20 salt or other alkaline chloride, and calcine them in the furnace and manner already described, taking care that a low red heat is never exceeded. The products are volatile chloride of arsenic, which passes off and is condensed, and soluble chloride of zinc and sulphate of alkali, which remain in the furnace, and are afterwards separated by solution and crystallization, as already 25 described. The oxides of arsenic and zinc can be obtained in great purity from these solutions by precipitating with lime or alkali. This process is also applicable to several alloys and mixtures of the oxides or salts of several metals, such as tin and copper, lead and tin, and lead or copper and anti- mony ; the tin and antimony being volatilized as chlorides, while the copper 30 and lead as chlorides, with the sulphate of alkali, remain in the furnace. Having now described the nature of my Invention, and the manner in which the same is to be performed, I declare that I do not confine myself to the precise details herein described, provided the peculiar character of any part of my Invention is retained; but what I claim is,— 35 First, the separation of the precious metals, such as gold, silver, and platinum, when one or more of them occur in the ores, reguluses, or alloys of other metals, by converting the associated metals into oxides by the several methods described, if such, metals do not already exist in that state; and after- wards by fusion with silica or matters containing silica, converting these metals8 A.D. 1854.---------N° 2270. Specification. Hendersons Improvements in Trea Ores 4'c.____________________________ into silicates, whilst the precious metals, being reduced by heat alone, are separated from the scoria or slag in a nearly pure state. Second, the preparation of the ores of zinc and other volatile metals when they contain an excess or deficiency of sulphur, as described. Third, the use of a mixture of chlorides and nitrates of alkali, or other 5 oxidizing agents, for the purpose of decomposing ores in the process of calcination. Fourth, the means described for separating and obtaining arsenic, antimony, tin, and several other metals, or the oxides or salts of arsenic, antimony, tin, and several other metals, from zinc, copper, lead, silver, gold, and other metals 10 whose chlorides are not volatile at a low red heat. And, fifth, the manufacture of chloride, oxide, or carbonate of zinc in the manner described. In witness whereof, I, the said William Henderson, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twentieth day of April, One thousand eight 15 hundred and fifty-five. WILLIAM HENDERSON, (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2271. Manufacture of Gas and other Tubes. (This Invention received Provisional Protection, hut notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Alexander Southwood Stocker at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 25th October 1854. I, Alexander Southwood Stocker, of Number 11, the Poultry, Cheapside, in 5 the City of London, Manufacturer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Certain Improvements in the Manufacture of Tubes, applicable to Gas and other Purposes ; also in the Construction of certain Engineering Machinery and Apparatus, and the Application of the Whole or Part of the SAME TO, AND OTHER MEANS TO BE USED OR EMPLOYED IN, THE MANUFACTURE OF 10 Tubes; also in the Mode of Manufacturing and the Application of certain Articles Connected with or Necessary to the Completion of such or other Tubes,” to be as follows, that is to say :— My improvements consist in manufacturing tubes in their circular form of such diameter that one shall fit one within the other, like telescope fittings, and 15 when two or more are placed one within another, I submit them to a bath of soldering or other material, when all the interstices will be filled up, and the whole, when taken from the bath and allowed to cool, will become, as it were, one solid tube of immense strength. This tube may or may not be mounted with a coil of wire in its outer diameter from end to end, “ excepting leaving ^ sufficient space at each end for length of screws, for the purpose of connecting2 A.D. 1854.—N" 2271. Provisional Specification. Stockers Improvements in the Manufacture of for Gas, o®r:- Pimteiby George Eotobd Eyre aad WmiAM Spottiswgode , Poolers to die Queeaajs most ExcelleatMaje sty. 1855. F 1 GLIBRARY Of THE UNIVERSITY OF IOUNOISA.D.1854.0ct25J$r?2272. ROBERTS’ SEEdFicATiapr. ( 2 SHEET.J SHEET Z.Lt&ii.-RY OF THE UNIVERSITY Of ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2273. Screening Machines. LETTERS PATENT to William Thomas Smith, of New Hampstead Road, Kentish Town, in the County of Middlesex, Surveyor, and George Hill, of the City Road, in the same County, Gentleman, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus por Winnowing, Washing, Sifting, or Seperating Corn, Gravel, Minerals, and other Materials.” Sealed the 24th April 1855, and dated the 25th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said William Thomas Smith and George Hill at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 25th October 1854. We, William Thomas Smith and George Hill, do hereby declare the 5 nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Winnowing, Washing, Sifting, or Seperating Corn, Gravel, Minerals, and other Materials,” to be as follows:— We propose constructing one or a series of screws something in the shape of an ordinary sieve; if more than one, the frames will work parallel 10 above each other, (not so the bottom of the screen itself, that being inclined towards a shoot, with which each will be provided,) to which we propose to impart a motion similar to that which a man would exert in the ordinary process of hand screening. This screen or screens will work on rollers or otherwise, attached to uprights, so as to keep each in its place. In the centre2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2273. Provisional Specification. Smith $ Hill's Impts. in Winnowing, W in the same place; but the arrangement for this purpose- is varied from what was formerly described. In the present machinery a somewhat twisted bar of a square section is used, and an iintvvisted portion of which causes a pillion 35 to revolve, when the twisted portion is turned;by moving 'thtbu^h f ?sbfckdl;. These cutters, in place of being Worked in'Combination with a lever, actuated by a cam put in motion by a steam engine, are in' the preselit thachidery worked by the piston of a steam cylinder- hi the following nlanner:—TheA.D. 1854.—N° 2275. Specification. 5 Mathers- Impts.in Machinery for Boring, Driving Tubes into the Earth, fyc. piston ro(J, which is preferred to be of a square section, carries at its upper end a wheel or pulley, over whicli the rope passes from a reel to the cutting or tool frame. There is a small jet of steam admitted underneath the piston, causing it . to ascend .slowly, so taking up the slack of the rope and opening Pthe steam valve. The slides or valves of the .steam cylinder are worked by tappets, which are moyeable, so as to adjust the length of stroke, the slides or valves being acted on by the rising and descending of the piston rod; and,provision is made for throttling the outlet of the steam, so that the work- man by hand gearing may regulate the descent of the cutting tools, which, by 10 reason of the rope passing over a pulley or wheel on the piston rod, descend at double the velocity of the piston in the steam cylinder. The lowering end of the rope is by means, of a chain and hook made so as readily to be attached and detached, to facilitate the attaching and removal of the cutter frame and the lifting cylinder or bucket. The rope is wound on a reel or drum, which 15 at the proper times is put in motion by a steam engine. The lifting cylinder or bucket is similar in action to what was formerly described, but its details of construction are modified, The piston is formed with a cup of vulcanized india-rubber.; . The valve of the bucket consists of a disc of vulcanized india- rubber, with a central spindle, and its seat is arranged so as to be retained 20 within the cylinder when in use, yet so as to be lowered with the clack or valve separated, to allow of the parts being cleaned by jets of water. For this purpose the lower end of the lifting cylinder or bucket is, when lifted out of the hole, placed on a step, which is raised or lowered by hand gearing, so as to lower the valve seat and parts below the bottom of the cylinder when a 25 cotter .(which retains them in the cylinder) has been removed. The rope in passing from the reel to the cutter frame is, when the cutters touch the bottom of the hole or boring, clamped, or retained fast by a screw clamp to a slide, which is capable of being moved by hand gearing, to enable the workman to let off rope as the cutters (by repeated descents) cut deeper and deeper into 30 the earth. The arrangement of steam cylinder and parts above described for actuating the rope may be used for actuating a hammer when driving down tubes, when boring into the earth, or for driving piles, or for other uses requiring a like action. When boring with machinery arranged and combined as above described, a bell-mouthed tube is fixed into the earth. The rope, by the rotation 35 of the reel, is allowed to unwind till the lower ends of the cutters come to the bottom of the hole or boring; the rope is then clamped, and the piston of the steam cylinder is put into action. The small jet of steam first acts to raise the, piston to take up the slack of the rope, when the tappets will act on the slides or valves to admit steam, and the piston will continue to rise and fall, and6 A.D. 1854.—N° 2275. Specification. Mathers Impts. in Machinery for Boring, Driving Tubes into the Earth, §c. consequently the cutting tools; the workman, by the hand gear, will give off rope as the cutters descend more and more into the earth. After repeated actions of the cutters, the cutter apparatus is to be lifted out (by the rotation of the reel, the clamping being released) and detached from the end of the rope. The lifting cylinder or bucket is to be attached to the rope and lowered into the 5 hole, when, by repeatedly raising and lowering the bucket by means of the rope on the reel, it will be filled with water, and the pieces of rock or materials cut away by the action of the cutters ; and the action of the lifting cylinder or bucket is to be repeated till the hole or boring is cleared of the cuttings. Where there is no natural flow of water into the hole or boring, water is to 10 be supplied, as water is required to cause the parts of the rock or hard material cut by the cutters to descend into the lifting cylinder or bucket. Having thus stated the nature of my said Invention, I will proceed to describe the manner of performing the same. Description op the Drawings. 15 Figure 1 is a general longitudinal elevation of the machinery; Figure 2 is a front elevation: Figure 3 is a plan of the same. On these three Figures the same letters and figures of reference are placed on corresponding parts. a, a, a, the framework of the machine; b, the steam cylinder for actuating the boring head; c, boring head ; d, lifting cylinder or bucket; e, square 20 piston rod with fork for carrying the pulley; /,/, top pulley; g, screw clamp, for holding the rope whilst the operation of boring is going on, which by means of the screw h can bo moved, so as to give out the rope, and allow the boring head to descend as it penetrates the rock; h, screw to work the slide to which the clamp is attached. On the shaft of this screw are two bevil wheels, 95 which are geared into two other bevil wheels, one at i, the other at Tc, which by means of short shafts and handles can be operated upon from the stage at l, or the floor level at m. n, guide pulley ; 0, large pulley or drum, for winding up and lowering the boring head, and also for working the lifting cylinder or bucket; p, rope; q, segmental spur wheel to winding engine 30 r, there being a spur pinion on the fly wheel shaft, which takes into and drives the segmental wheel q; s, s\ are two square shafts, on which the cams or inclined surfaces t, u, are fixed, by which the valves are worked; these cam surfaces are capable of sliding on the shafts s, s\ and are fixed in any position by set screws, so that a longer or shorter stroke may be given to the 35 piston in the cylinder b, according to the hardness or softness of the material in which the hole is being bored, t, t, are the two cams with inclined surfaces, by which motion is given to the steam valve; u, u, are two similar cams,Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2275. 7 Mathers Impts. in Machinery for Boring, Driving Tubes into the Earth, $c. which give motion to the exhaust valve; v, tappet or arm, fastened on the square piston rod, which as the piston rod ascends slides over the surfaces of the inclined cams t, t, and so turns the square shaft s, and by means of the arm x causes the steam valve to open and shut; w, a roller on a tappet 5 or arm, which acts in a similar manner on the cams u, u, and by means of the arm y causes the exhaust valve to open and shut; arm or lever on the square shaft s; y, arm or lever on the square shaft s1; box containing the steam valve; z\ box containing the exhaust valve; 1, steam pipe; 2, exhaust pipe; 3, tap, by which a small jet of steam is admitted into the cylinder; 10 4, steam port; 5, exhaust port. It will be observed that the steam port is level with the bottom of the cylinder, while the exhaust port is a few inches above; and by this arrangement, when the piston in its descent passes the exhaust port, the steam contained in that part of the cylinder between the bottom of the port and the bottom of the cylinder acts as an elastic cushion 15 for the piston to drop upon. In the construction of the cylinder, the ports are cast solid, and have holes drilled through, so as to form a kind of grating for the passage of the steam, and prevent the packing of the piston projecting into the port. 6, table for receiving the lifting cylinder or bucket; 7, lever; 8, screw; 9, fly wheel; 10, flywheel for opening water tap; 11, water jets; 12, rod, 20 with hook for sustaining the lifting cylinder or bucket while being emptied, and holding it in its place while the boring head is working; 13, hook; 14, hook and short chain fastened to the rope; 15, hook for lifting cylinder or bucket; 16, box for emptying the lifting cylinder or bucket into; 17, lever to open and close the slide door 18, in the side of the box 16, for the passage of 25 the sludge pump. Figure 4 is a transverse section of the boring bar; Figure 5, an elevation; Figures 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 are cross sections, corresponding with the letters marked on the transverse section, a, a, a, a, is a bar of wrougli iron, of round section in the parts a, a, a, a, but square from to ; d is the link by which 30 the whole is suspended, attached by means of four cotters to the part e, e, the lower part of which from f to g is of square section, but twisted. One-fourth part round beyond this twisted portion is another parallel square part, marked h. i is an outer box or cylinder; k is an inner box or cylinder; l, a ratchet wheel with boss projecting downwards; m, ratchet wheel; n, a casting attached 35 to the bar, serving to add weight to the boring head, and to act as a guide to keep it perpendicular in the hole; o, boring head in which the cutters are fixed; p, p, cutters ; q, q, q, india-rubber springs, to break the concussion of the parts r and s when the boring head is raised; r is a collar fixed to the top of the bar a; s, a gland or ring over the india-rubber springs q, q, q.8 A.D. 1854.----------N° 2275. Specification. 'Mather's Impts. in Machinery for Boring, Driving Tubes into the Earth, Qc. The object of the arrangement of parts above described is to cause the catting part of the boring head to revolve a portion of a revolution at each stroke, which is thus effected :—When the bar is resting at the bottom of the hole and the link d is raised, it will pass through the space from to r before it raises the bar, carrying with it the part e, e; but in so doing the twisted portion of the bar a, above described, in passing through the socket of the outer box i, is compelled to make a partial revolution, which puts a corresponding twist in the rope, which, when the weight of the boring head comes upon it, it has a .tendency to straighten itself again, and so causes the boring head to revolve. .: The parts i, k, and ratchet wheels l, m, are caused to act in the following manner to prevent the possibility of the rope being twisted and untwisted without producing the effect desired:—-When the part e, e, is raised, and .caused to move round , by the twisted part f g, as above described, the square part h carries round with it the inner box or cylinder k, k, in the direction shewn by the arrow in the cross section C, D, which is allowed to pass easily in that direction by the slipping of the catches, which take into the teeth of the ratchet wheel l, as shewn; whilst in descending, the casting e, e, is prevented from revolving in the opposite direction by the square part h, passing through the socket of the inner box k, which cannot revolve in that direction without carrying with it the ratchet wheel l and the whole of the boring head, by acting on the bar to which it is attached; but as it cannot revolve in conse- quence of the cutters being at that time imbedded in the earth, it causes the outer box i to revolve in the direction shewn by the arrow on the cross section E, F, which is also retained in its position, and prevented from returning by the catches and ratchet, as shewn. Figure 12 is a transverse section of the lifting cylinder or bucket; Figure 13, an elevation; and Figure 14, a plan of the same, a is the forked pump rod, which serves also as the link, by which the pump is raised or lowered; b, bucket; c, india-rubber valve to same ; d, d, india-rubber springs, to break the concussion, and prevent the nut e coming in contact with the frame /, by which the seating of the bottom clack or valve is fastened to the spindle i; g, bottom india-rubber valve or clack ; h, seating for same ; i, spindle, which passes through the frame or guard / and the bucket b, and is retained in its place by a cotter k; l, frame, which passes over the top of the pump, and serves as a guide for the spindle i and forked pump rod a; m, the outer casing or pump barrel. When the lifting cylinder or bucket is passing down the hole, the piston of the bucket will, be at the top of the working barrel, and the whole suspended by the collar of the frame l, bearing on the closed part of the forked pump rod immediately above the bucket; but when it reaches 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. 9 A D. 1854.—N° 2275. Mathers Impts. in Machinery for Boring, Driving Tubes into the Earth, Sfc. the bottom, the piston of the bucket will descend by its own gravity till it comes to the position shewn in the Drawing. When the motion of the winding engine is reversed, the bucket will be raised, and a partial vacuum formed below it, when a portion of the rock, which has been removed and broken up 5 by the cutters, will be carried by the flow of water past the bottom clack or valve g, into the space between it and the bucket; to facilitate which, the bottom clack or valve, instead of being secured to the seating in the ordinary way, is fastened to a tube, whieh is at liberty to slide in the bar i as far as is allowed by the slot in the tube, and the cotter in the spindle, as shewn at o. 10 When the pump is raised to the surface, and placed on the stand provided for it, and the cotter Jc knocked out, the bottom clack or valve g with its seating h will descend, and the contents be washed out by the flush of water contained in the lifting cylinder or bucket. The operation of boring is thus performed The boring head having been lowered into the hole, the rope is secured by 15 means of the clamp g; the stop valve is opened, and steam admitted into the pipe 1; the tap 3 being opened, a small jet of steam is introduced below the piston, which is slowly raised till the projecting arm or tappet v comes in con- tact with the cam t, which is so formed, that the tappet v in passing along the surface causes the. rod s to turn partially round, and thereby open the steam 20 valve, and admit a sufficient quantity of steam to raise the piston more quickly, till the tappet v comes in contact with another cam t\ of similar form to the former one, but in a reverse position, which closes the valve; whilst at the same time on the opposite side of the piston rod is another tappet w, which opens the valve for the exhaustion of the steam in a similar manner. When the 25 piston descends, and the boring head falls with all the impetus of its own gravity upon the rock or substance into which it is intended to bore, the cutters will penetrate and disintegrate the said substance. This operation having been repeated as many times as the workman by experience considers neces- sary, the clamp g is released, and the boring head is brought to the surface by SO means of the winding engine r, and a hook at the end of a long rod, similar to the one marked 12, by which the lifting cylinder , or bucket is suspended, and hangs from the sliding hook 13,) is passed into the link of the boring head, which may then be placed on one side; the hook 14 is theu to be dis- engaged from the boring head, and attached to the lifting cylinder or bucket, 35 which is then lowered to the bottom of the hole or boring, and the piston of the bucket is to be raised and lowered three or four times. By reversing the winding engine the lifting cylinder is then to be raised to the surface, and without disengaging the hook 14, the hook 15 is passed into the link of the lifting cylinder, and the engine being reversed, the rod 12 will receive the weight10 A.D. 1854.—N° 2275. Specification. Mathers Impts. in Machinery for Boring, Driving Tubes into the Earth, $c. of the lifting cylinder until it comes into the position as shewn in Figures I, 2, and 3, the bottom of it resting on the small table 6; the cotter k is then knocked out, and upon turning the fly wheel 9, the screw 8 acts upon the lever 7 ; the table being lowered, the bottom clack follows it, and the whole of the contents of the pump will be delivered into the box 16. For the purpose of 5 effectually cleansing the clack, there are four jets of water under pressure at II, which, being turned on at the time the table 6 is being loivered, will wash away any sand or other material that may lodge on it. The lifting cylinder or bucket requires to be introduced into the boring three or four times to raise all the loose matters; and when the workman finds that the boring is well 1 o cleaned out, the boring head is again attached to the hook 11, the rope securely clamped, the operation repeated as before. When the apparatus is to be used for driving pipes or piles, a monkey or heavy weight can be substituted for the boring head, and actuated in a similar manner by means of the piston and steam cylinder h. 15 In witness whereof, I, the said Colin Mather, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twentieth day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. COLIN MATHER. (l.s.) Witness, 20 James Brown, Moliere Terrace, Broughton. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.SHEET 1. t SHEETS A.D 185£.Oct25.H?2276- MATHER'S Seeceeicatioit. FRONT ELEVATION LONGITUDINAL ELEVATION FIC.2. F I C. I SCALE o Q Q I7u filed drocwincf is coloreds. Drawn (mStoiie]y¥alby&Sos; RmtedbyGEOHGE Edwid Eyre mdWnxLAM Spottiswoohe , \ : i Printers to tbe Queeris mostEicdlent Majesty, 1855.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854. Oct,25.1^2275. MATHER’S Specification. F I C.4 FI C. 5. BORINC APPARATUS FI G . 14 SECTIONAL PLANS PLAN . SI DE ELEVATION FIC. 12.' F I C. 6 FIC. 13. 3--M F I C. 7 F I C. 8 . SCALE 1+ IN — I FOOT Q P_______ — v-Q FI C.IO. ELEVATION SECTION SECTION ' The, ftZed/dr(mrmg-is colored/. Drawn an Stone iy Sans SECTION ELEVATION SECTIONAL PLANS London : Geotige Edward Lyre and Wduliam Spottisw<LIBRARY v OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2276. Cosmetics. LETTERS PATENT to Frangois Lambert, Chemist, of Rue d’Enfer, 72, Paris, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Compounds to be used as Cosmetics.” Sealed the 12th December 1854, and dated the 25th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Frangois Lambert at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 25th October 1854. I, Franqois Lambert, Chemist, of Rue d’Enfer, 72, Paris, do hereby 5 declare the nature of the Invention for “ Improvements in Compounds to be used as Cosmetics ” to be as follows :— This Invention consists in introducing, in the preparation of cosmetics, chemical substances susceptible of reacting on one another, so as to develope a dynamic electricity, the action of which strengthens the hair, the beard, and 30 the skin. To produce this reaction, I generally prefer to employ pure acid sulphate of peroxide of iron, dissolved in alcohol at 20° or 30°, with a small quantity of a solution of crystallized nitrate of silver. This compound must be made in a dark room, and put immediately in opaque bottles. When this liquid 35 is exposed to the air or to the light, a double decomposition takes place,2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2276. Provisions Specification. Lambert's Improvements in Compounds to be used as Cosmetics. which decomposition disengages electricity. In place of the solution above mentioned, solutions of all other known substances susceptible of producing electricity by acting on one another may be used to produce the same effect. After this liquid has been used, either balsamic oil, essence, or grease must be employed; this is to prevent the too rapid evaporation of the first 5 compound. I mix with this second preparation gold leaf reduced into powder, which hastens the production of electricity. I may also introduce in the oil, essence, or grease, chemical substances capable of producing electricity without departing from my Invention, since it consists in introducing electricity in cosmetics, the fabrication of which is known, and does not form any part 10 of my Invention. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Francois Lambert in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 17th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Fean5ois 15 Lambert, Chemist, of Rue d’Enfer, 72, Paris, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-fifth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, 20 the said Frangois Lambert, Her special licence that I, the said Francis Lam- bert, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Frangois Lambert, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, 25 exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “Improvements in Compounds to be used as Cosmetics,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Francois Lambert, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, 30 and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Frangois Lambert, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed,Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2276. 3 Lambert's Improvements in Compounds to be used as Cosmetics. to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof (that is to say) My Invention consists in introducing, in the preparation of cosmetics, of chemical substances capable of reacting one on the other, so as to develope a 5 dynamic electricity, which strengthens the hair, the beard, and the other parts of the human body, upon which the stimulating action of the electricity may render the employment of these compositions suitable. To produce this reaction, I employ ordinarily the pure acid sulphate of the peroxide of iron, well dissolved in and carefully triturated with alcohol of 10 20 to 30 degrees until complete saturation, and crystallized nitrate of silver, dissolved in small quantity, without the contact of air, and sheltered from the light. These two solutions are mixed together, in the proportion of 200 grammes of ferruginous liquid to 150 grammes of argentiferous liquid. This mixture is made in a dark room, into which only diffused light is admitted; 15 then the mixture is placed in hermetically sealed bottles, and wrapped up in sheet metal, or strongly colored, to intercept the light. When this liquid is exposed to the air or light, a double decomposition is produced, which dis- engages electricity. In place of the solutions above mentioned, the same effect may be produced by the employment of solutions of sulphate of zinc 20 and acetate of lead, or any other known substances capable of producing by acting on one another an electric action; that is to say, an acid metallic oxide, such as auric acid, protoxide of gold, binoxide of platinum, uranic acid, ferric acid, stannic acid, iridic acid, oxide of antimony, binoxide of palladium; or an acid, such as carbonic acid, acetic acid, sulphurous acid, sulphuric acid, 25 nitric acid, phosphatic acid, phosphoric acid, dithionic acid, pentathionic acid, hydriodic acid, or any non-acid salt of a weak base, with a basic metallic oxide, such as binoxide of silver, protoxide of copper, protoxide of silver, protoxide of iron, sesqui-oxide of iron, protoxide of platinum, strontium, &c., or any salt of which the acid is unstable. The moderate and continued 30 electric effect produced by a double decomposition can be regulated by the proportion and the choice of substances, and can easily be determined by means of the Sweiger’s galvanometer and the Bouenberger’s electroscope. It will also be understood that the mixtures can be determined so as to produce different colors, varying according to the nature of, the substances employed. 35 After the application of this liquid I apply a balsamic essential oil, such as the oils of millepertins and of melilot, or other essence, oil, or fat. This operation is for the purpose of hindering the too rapid evaporation of the first liquid. I mix with this second preparation gold leaf reduced to powder, which has the advantage of favoring the production of electricity. When the preparations4 A.D. 1854.—N“ 2276. Specification. Lambert's Improvements in Compounds to be used as Cosmetics. above mentioned4 are employed for the hair,4 it is preferable to divide it successively into locks, to receive the application of the said preparations, and it is well to leave the hair untied to facilitate the disengagement of electricity. I render also all the toilette cosmetics producers of electricity, by introducing in their preparation metallic salts according to the rules above 5 indicated, and this gives to them particularly vivifying properties; I can also use as solvents essences, oils, fats, &c. My Invention thus consists in using known re-agents, and the develope- ment of electricity which results from them, by applying them to all toilet cosmetics, whatever may be the purpose for which they are to be applied. 10 In witness whereof, I, the said Franjois Lambert, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Fifth day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. FRANCOIS LAMBERT, (l.s.) Witness, ’ 15 T. Basset, 2, Rue Drouot, Paris. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855.^^AA^«^VV^^VVV\AAAAAAA«A/W^vr\A/V\AAAA/VV\WWVVyWS/WWVVVVV\AA/>AA^VWW^ A.D. 1854 ......................................N° 2277. Roofs. (This Invention received Provisional Pr, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Edouard Pechenard at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 25th October 1854. I, Edouard Pechenard, Contractor, of Montherme Canton, in the French 5 Empire, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Certain Improvements in Roots or Coverings for Buiddings ” to be as follows:— My roofs or coverings are formed of slate or other suitable covering medium, and of wrought or cast iron beams, and transverse rafters or supports, which drop into steps or grooves cut in the sides of the beams. The slates are held 10 in position by a band or strip, which lies over and parallel with the beam, and overlaps the sides of the slates on each side of the beam. This band is secured, and thereby the slates also, to the beams, by means of a bolt with a broad head and screw, threaded at the end or point. This bolt passes first through an orifice in the band, then through the space left between the slates 15 in setting them up, traverses an aperture in the beam, and is finally secured from the inside of the roof by a nut. In some cases the cross rafters may be dispensed with, and each slate will then overlap that next adjacent to it. The beam must be slightly hollowed out to permit of this arrangement. Again, the slates may be fixed to the cross rafters, either by joining them end to end, or by hollowing out the cross rafters and filling them up with2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2277. Provisional Specification. Pechenard's Improvements in Roofs or Coverings for Buildings. cement, to prevent leakage; or the edges of the slates may he bevilled off or scarfed, so as to fit flush. Where the beams and rafters, as also the bolts, are of iron, and the covering of slate, a perfectly incombustible roof will be formed. Where, however, circumstances require it, the beams, rafters, or bolts may all or either of them 5 be composed of wood. Thus, my Invention will afford an incombustible and waterproof roof, will allow of all repairs being effected from the inside, and will avoid the necessity of perforating slates or tiles used as the covering. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N°2278. Manufacture of Paper from Straw. LETTERS PATENT to Louis Vital Helm, of No. 8, Rue des Douze Apotres, Brussels, in the Kingdom of Belgium, Chemist, for the Invention of “ Improvements in the Manufacture of Paper from Straw.” Sealed the 20th April 1855, and dated the 25th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Louis Vital Helin at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 25th October 1854. I, Louis Vital Helin, of No. 8, Rue des Douze Apotres, Brussels, in the 5 Kingdom of Belgium, Chemist, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in the Manufacture of Paper from Straw ” to be as follows:— This Invention consists in a mode of treating the straw of grain- bearing plants, giving the preference to the straw of rye and wheat, so as to 10 produce a pulp suitable for the manufacture of paper at an economical rate. The straw is macerated for at least 60 hours in water of the temperature of from 55 to 80 degrees of Fahrenheit’s thermometer, rain or river water being- preferred. The straw is then taken out of the water, and exposed to the air or sun until it is dry. It is then steeped for twelve hours in water of the same 15 temperature as before, and at the end of that time is again taken out of the water and dried, as before. This operation of immersion for the space of2 A.D. 1854.—N" 2278. Provisional Specification. Helms Improvements in the Manufacture of Straw. 12 hours in water of the temperature before mentioned, and the operation of subsequent drying, are to be repeated five or six times. After the last immer- sion, however, the straw must not be allowed to become more than half dry. In this state it is placed in the mill, and divided into filaments of as great a length as the straw is capable of yielding. It is then removed from 5 the mill and subjected to maceration, first, for some hours in solutions of carbonate of soda or carbonate of potash, or of bicarbonate of soda or bi- carbonate of potash, or of protoxide of soda or protoxide of potash; and then for some hours in a solution of chloruret of protoxide of soda or potash, or of chloruret of lime combined with chloruret of oxide of lime, or of 10 chloruret of oxide of lime only, or of chloruret of lime combined with carbonate of soda or potash, (such chlorurets being sometimes termed chlorites or hydrochlorides,) the solutions being made by placing the salts in rain water. After maceration, as hereby directed, the straw is to be well washed in rain water, so as to remove the salts in solutions which it has been 15 steeped. It is then of a white colour, and is suitable for making into pulp, from which paper can be manufactured by methods previously in use. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Louis Vital Helin in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 25th April 1855. 20 TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Louis Vital Helin, of No. 8, Rue des Douze Apotres, Brussels, in the Kingdom of Belgium, Chemist, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-fifth day of October, in the year of our 25 Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Louis Vital Helin, Her special license that I,, the said Louis Vital Helin, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Louis Vital Helin, my executors, administrators, or assigns, should at any 30 time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times there- after during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in the Manufacture of Paper prom Straw,” upon the condition (amongst 35 others) that I, the said Louis Vital Helin, by an instrument in writingSpecification. AD. 1854.—N° 2278. s HelirisImprovements in the Manufacture of Paper from Straw. under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to bo performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said 5 Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Louis Vital ILelin, do hereby declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following- statement, that is to say:— 10 My said Invention relates to a peculiar treatment of the straw of grain- bearing plants, for producing a pulp suitable for the manufacture of paper at an economical rate. For this purpose I prefer the straw of rye and wheat; but the same mode of treatment is equally applicable to various other vegetable substances, such as jute, flax, and hemp. In carrying out my Invention, I first 15 steep the straw entire for sixty hours, which time may be exceeded without inconvenience in spring, rain, or river water, of a temperature of from 55° to 85° Fahrenheit, the temperature being varied according to the season of the year. After some hours the water becomes gradually warm and dis- colored, and an active fermentation takes place, arising from the azote con- 20 tained in the straw. After sixty hours the liquid should be suffered to run off, and the remaining straw must then be washed with a plentiful supply of water, in order to remove therefrom all the soluble coloring matter. The straw' is then drained, and while still in a damp state is subjected to the action of millstones, rolling on a plain surface or passed between a pair of rollers, in 25 order to flatten the straw'. It is then passed between other rollers, furnished with cutters or other suitable apparatus, whereby the straw may be formed into filaments or fibres, as long and continuous as possible. In this state, that is, w'hen reduced to long and continuous filaments, the straw is to be exposed to the air and sun for the purpose of drying it; after which process the straw 80 will have assumed a paler yellow' color. In cases where time is no object, I prefer steeping the straw' several times, and again exposing it to the air and light. It will be found convenient in such cases to steep the straw at night, and expose it to the air during the day, to obtain the full benefit of the air and light. The first-described process of maceration is, however, the most 35 important. By subjecting the straw to the action of water, and subse- quently exposing it to the air and light, it becomes bleeched to a certain extent; but by means of the processes herein-after described, it is completely divested of all coloring matter, and is rendered perfectly white. After having- been submitted to the herein-before described processes, the straw is steeped4 A.D. 1854.------------N° 2278. Specification. HelirisImprovements in the Manufacture of Paper from Straw. for one or more days, according as it is in a more cr less filamentous state, in one or more of the preparations which I shall hercin-aftcr fully describe; the filaments being first treated either by the alkaline solutions, or by the solutions of hypochloride of potash or of soda, and sometimes for a longer or shorter period by the preparations of hypochloride of lime, until the straw has acquired the requisite degree of whiteness. The filamentous straw, after it has been submitted to the processes herein-before first described, and has been steeped in the alkaline solutions of soda or potash, which take up a great portion of its yellow coloring matter, assumes a darker tint, notwithstanding its being washed in clean water. This darker tint disappears, however, on the straw being exposed to the open air and light; and the process, if renewed, causes the straw to become more and more white. By these processes the straw becomes reduced to beautiful filaments, which may readily be converted into pulp, and from their solidity and strength, the filaments might even be employed in the manufacture of yarns or fabrics similar to cotton and hemp. Jute, and many plants of the class triandria, in which is comprised the various grasses and plants of the several classes pentandria, hexandria, tetrandia, disecia, pentandria, and others, when treated by the processes herein-before set forth, lose their coloring principles, and become of a permanent bright white. Hemp and flax may also be thus treated and employed in the manufacture of paper. The solutions or preparations herein-before referred to consist, first, of carbonate of soda or of potash, 8 lbs.; and water, 20 gallons: second, bi- carbonate of soda or of potash, 6 lbs. ; and water, 20 gallons: third, caustic potash or soda, 4 lbs.; and water, 20 gallons: fourth, hypochloride of potash or of soda, 10 lbs.; and water, 20 gallons: fifth, hypochloride of lime or bleaching powder, 1-| lbs.; water, 20 gallons; to which may be added, in addition, if necessary, 1| lbs. of bleaching powder: sixth, bleaching powder, or hypochloride of lime, 6 lbs.; and water, 20 gallons: seventh, bleaching powder, 6 lbs.; carbonate of soda or of potash, 2 lbs.; and water, 20 gallons. With the same quantity of water all the chemical components of the herein-before described seven solutions may sometimes be slightly in- creased or diminished in their proportions. After the maceration in water, the subsequent treatment of the straw by any of the before-mentioned processes may thus be enumerated :—First, by alkaline solutions ; second, by solutions of hypochlorides of soda or of potash; third, by the employment of the hypo- chlorites of lime, potash, or soda, as described in processes (5, 6, and 7.) When the alkaline liquids and the hypochlorides contained in the pre- parations 1,2, 3, 4, and 5, are too much charged with coloring matter, by 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2278. 5 Helms Improvements in the Manufacture of Paper from Straw. reason' of the repeated immersions of the straw, they are filtered through a layer of animal charcoal, reduced to a granulated or powdered state for the purpose of obtaining a partial or total discharge of the coloring matter therefrom. 5 The hypochlorites of soda and potash decompose after they have been long in use, but they may be renewed from time to time by chlorine gas, or by a solution of chloride of lime. The straw or vegetable filaments are well washed with plenty of water after they have been perfectly bleached by the above processes, or some of them, and may then be made into pulp in the 10 ordinary manner for the fabrication of paper. It is evident that hydrochloric or sulphuric acids may, if deemed necessary, be used in conjunction with the above bleaching materials, as is now well understood and generally adopted in the bleaching of pulp in the manufacture of paper. Having now described and particularly ascertained the nature of my said 15 Invention, and the manner in which the same is or may be used or carried into effect, I would observe, in conclusion, that I do not confine or restrict myself to the precise details or arrangements which I have had occasion to describe or refer to, as many variations may be made therefrom without deviating from the principles or main features of my said Invention; but what I consider to 20 be novel and original, and therefore claim as the Invention secured to me by the herein-before in part recited Letters Patent, is,— First, the several systems or modes of treating filaments obtained from the straw of grain-bearing plants, and preparing the same in a suitable con- dition to be used in the manufacture of paper, as herein-before described. 25 Second, the application and use of the several solutions or preparations herein-before described, for the purpose of rendering the filamentous material obtained from the straw of grain-bearing plants suitable for the manufacture of paper therefrom. In witness whereof, I, the said Louis Vital Helin, have hereunto set my hand and seal, the 21st day of April, in the year One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. LOUIS VITAL HELIN. (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 N° 2279. Circular Looms. LETTERS PATENT to John Henry Johnson, of 47, Lincoln’s Inn Fields, in the County of Middlesex, and of Glasgow, North Britain, Gentleman, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Circular Looms.”—A communi- cation from M. Poivret. Sealed the 20th March 1855, and dated the 25th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said John Henry Johnson at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 25th October 1854. I, John Henry Johnson, of 47, Lincoln’s Inn Fields, in the County of 5 Middlesex, and of Glasgow, North Britain, Gentleman, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in Circular Looms,” a com- munication from M. Poivret, a foreigner resident abroad, to be as follows:— This Invention relates to an improved construction and arrangement of circular loom, whereby new forms of stitch are produced. The loom is 10 composed of a metal turning table, a plate having a number of slotted radiating arms or spindles secured thereto. These arms, on the surface of which the thread is deposited, by means of a suitable shuttle, or by hand, are not composed of spring needles, as in ordinary looms of this class, but are2 A.D. 1854,—N° 2279. Provisional Specification. Johnson’s Improvements in Circular Looms. ridged arms, formed with a small projection at their outer extremities, whilst the slot which runs their entire length serves to admit of the free working therein of a vertical blade, which serves to beat up or secure the thread de- posited on the radiating arms. The first turn of the running thread deposited on the arms, either by hand or mechanical means, is pushed on to the points of the vertical blades by a suitable curved arm beneath the slotting radiating arms; this thread forming the stitch is afterwards raised by the vertical blades as they pass under the beater-up ; this “ beater,” while lifting the blades, carries them in front of the radiating arms, and deposits each stitch over the pro- jections herein-before referred to, and also over the second turn of the thread, which has been supplied in a similar manner to the first thread. The beater is an inclined eccentric piece, the inclination running from below upwards at each end, thus the middle will be the highest part; the stitch having been left over the projection, the blades return to their original position by the aid of suitable springs. The second turn of the thread is now- pushed against the blades by the curved piece, as before described, and deposited over the pro- jections, before referred to, and over the third turn of thread while passing in front of the beater, and thus the operation of w eaving is carried on to any desired length of material. For obtaining a “ knotted ” or “ cross ” stitch a mechanical thread feeder of a peculiar construction is employed, the peculiar kind of stitch produced depending upon the direction of rotation of such feeder. This feeder consists of a revolving tube or mouth-piece, through wdiich a thread is passed; the tube is caused to pass the thread round'the ends of the radiating arms by the aid of suitable gearing. Several of these feeders may bo applied to one loom, w-hilst one beater alone wall be required. The last-mentioned feeder may be replaced by a feeder of a slightly different construction, to which an oscillating or vibratory motion is imparted, instead of a rotatory one, as in the last-described feeder. This feeder may be made to supply two threads at a time, and several of these may be applied to the same loom. In order to produce selvage goods, a partial rotatory motion only is imparted to the loom. By the mechanism herein-before described various descriptions cf stitches may be produced either with one or more threads and with one “ beater.” Tim radiating arms, in place of being horizontal, may be situated vertically, and parallel with each other, or a ring of metal, in which case the fabric will descend inside the loom as fast as it is woven. Another portion of this Invention relates to certain improvements in the ordinary needle looms of the circular class, and consists in the employment of two wheels, carried in arms or forks, which may be brought nearer to each other or farther asunder, similar to the legs of a pair of compasses. These 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Provisional Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2279. 3 Johnson's Improvements Circular Looms. wheels are notched, so as to depress a certain number of needles, according to the work to be produced. The thread is deposited in the opening or space between the elevated and depressed needles. Two wheels are employed, in order that a greater number cf needles may be depressed at a time, and 5 thereby facilitate the introduction of the thread. The same effects, however, might be obtained by one wheel alone, but it would require to bo of a much larger diameter. The other portions of the loom will remain the same as at present in general use. Another form of “beater” consists of a small oscillating hooked blade ]0 sliding in the radiating arms. The centre of oscillation of the hooked blade is carried by a sliding piece, and the blade is actuated by an eccentric. The horizontal to and fro movement of the hook of this blade and the vertical movement of the same causes the thread to be laid hold of during the beating- up of the second turn of the thread. 15 SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said John Henry Johnson in the Great Seal Patent .Office on the 25th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, John Henry • Johnson, of 47, Lincoln’s Inn Fields, in the County of Middlesex, 20 and of Glasgow, North Britain, Gentleman, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-fifth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the 25 said John Henry Johnson, Her special license that I, the said John Henry Johnson, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said John Henry Johnson, my executors, administrators, or assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, 80 use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improve- ments in Ciscuiis Looms,” being a communication from M. Poivret, a foreigner resident abroad, upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said John Henry Johnson, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, 35 should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to4 A.D. 1854.—N” 2279. Specification. Johnsons Improvements in Circular Looms. be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE,, that I, the said John Henry Johnson, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the 5 following statement, reference being had to the accompanying Drawings, and to the letters and figures marked thereon, that is to say:— The said Invention relates to an improved construction and arrangement of circular looms for weaving looped fabrics, whereby a greater variety of stitches or loops may be produced than in the ordinary circular looms. 10 And in order that the said Invention may be properly understood, I shall now proceed to describe the several Figures on the Sheet of Drawings hereunto annexed. Figs. 1 and 2 of the Drawings represent two circular looms, fitted each with twenty-five radiating arms or spindles A, A, fixed on to the circumference 15 of the revolving plate M ; and Figs. 3 and 4 are corresponding plans of the same. The spindles A, upon which the threads are thrown, either by mechanical aid or by hand, obviate the use, according to this arrangement, of the spring needles, used in ordinary looms; they are simply furnished with a hook B, B1, and have a vertical slot formed in them, to afford a free passage to 20 the blades C, C, which are arranged to produce the necessary fall of the stitch or loop on the spindles. By this arrangement of mechanism, the first turn [of the running thread supplied to the spindles, either by a mechanical feeder or by hand), is pushed upon the points of blades C by the piece D or Dl, which is level with the under sides of the spindles A. This thread is now raised by the 25 blades C, C1, as fast as they pass over the eccentric E, E1, which, while raising the blades C, C1, carries the threads to the ends of the spindles, and throws each loop over the hooks on the ends of the spindles, and at the same time over the second turn of the thread, which has been supplied like the preceding one on to each spindle. 30 The blade actuator consists of an eccentric plate E, E1, inclined slightly from below upwards on both sides, the highest part being about the centre. When the blades G, C1, have arrived at the middle of the eccentric, they allow the loop of the thread to fall outside the hooks of the spindles, and are then brought back to their original position by the springs D2, which constantly 35 draw them inwards, when the stitch or loop falls from off the points of the blades. At the next revolution the second turn of the thread is pushed against the blades C, C1, by the piece D or D1, and is thrown back, like the preceding thread, as it passes before the eccentric over the hooks of the spindles andSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N» 2279. 5 Johnsons Improvements in Circular Looms. over the third turn of the thread, which has been supplied like the preceding ones. The operation is thus continued until the required length of fabric has been woven, which descends below the spindles, as in the ordinary looms. The loom represented by Figs. 1 and 3 is fitted with a mechanical thread 5 feeder, which produces the different kinds of stitches or loops required, accord- ing to the direction of rotation of the feeder, in relation to the motion of the spindles. The bent arm F, through which the thread G passes to the spindles, is made to revolve rapidly by means of a train of wheel-work H, I, J, combined in 10 such a manner, that the bent arm, which is carried by the fixed bracket X2, makes the requisite number of revolutions round the spindles as fast as they pass in front of it, according to the stitch or loop required to be produced. This movem'ent is imparted to the feeders by the revolution of the plate M, to which is fixed the bevel wheel H. Motion is transmitted to the plate M by 15 means of the bevel gearing N and winch handle 0. Several feeders may be applied to one loom in order to supply several threads at once, thereby varying the fabric while one eccentric E actuates the whole of the blades C. The feeder F, shewn in detail, Fig. 5, is capable of supplying 1, 2, 3, or 20 even 4 thirds at one time. The conductors of the threads are placed on a horizontal bar E2, which bar is jointed in two places on the discs P, P1, by pins, placed eccentrically on the discs and at equal distances from their centres. These discs are driven by two pinions G1, G2, which gear with the wheel J, which thus causes the bar E2 to have a parallel and horizontal movement. 25 By this arrangement all the thread conductors will have a rotatory motion, which will enable them to pass the threads round each of the spindles A. Fig. 6 represents a feeder for one or two threads; the wheel J drives only one pinion G3, and the thread conductor is placed at the lower end of a vertical bar R, which is attached by the pin to the disc G4. This bar works 30 through a guiding slot, and is slotted to work over the shaft of the wheel J. The mechanism which drives the rotatory feeder, Fig. 1, is fitted with a series of bevel wheels F4, F5, F6, to change the direction of rotation when requisite. These wheels gear together; the wheels F4 and F6 are fitted loosely on the shaft E3, but may be fixed alternately by pinching screws. The wheel F5 is 35 for the purpose of turning the wheels F4 and FG in opposite directions. The wheel J is fixed to the wheel F4, & the shaft E3 turns always in the same direction, so that as one or the other of the wheels F4 and Fs are made fast, the thread conductors will turn in one direction or the other. When turning in one direction the cross loop (“ maille croisee ”) will be produced, &6 A.D. 1854.----------N° 2279. Specification. Johnsons Improvements in Circular Looms. ■when turning in the opposite one the knot loop (maille h noeucls) will be the result. Figs. 7 and 8 represent another form of thread feeder, on the same prin- ciple as those at Figs. 1 and 5, though slightly modified, the rotatory motion being replaced by a vertical rectilenear one. For this purpose, the 5 driving pinions G2, Gs, and discs F2 and F3,are placed above the wheel J1; and the horizontal bar E4, which carries the thread conductors, is placed in front of the spindles A, and receives its vertical motion from twro rods R1 and R2,'connected with the discs F2, F3. The horizontal position and the vertical rectilenear movement of the bar E4 are preserved by the two rods L1, fixed to 10 this bar, and sliding in' grooves in the supporting frame. The oscillating motion of this feeder places the threads crosswise over and'under the spindles as they pass. The spindles A2 and the blades C2 (Fig. 7) are represented of a new form, for the purpose of producing the various kinds of stitches or loops, but principally the knot loop. The blades C2 for effecting the slipping of the 15 loops require several successive movements imparted to them, namely, from behind forwards, and from below upwards; for this purpose they are actuated by the compound eccentric, shewn at Fig. 9. U1 is a vertical shaft, fixed to a „ beam in the ceiling, and answering as a suspending rod for holding the loom; N2, N2, are set screws for securing the mechanism; -Q,2 is a cup for receiving 20 the oil for lubricating the collar of the plate M. M4 is a nut for supporting the loom on the spindle U1; R is a plate, fixed to the shaft U1, and answering as a support for all the stationary parts of the mechanism. The loom repre- sented at Figs. 2 and 4 is arranged to work with as many threads as there are spindles in the loom; there are therefore as many feeders as there are 25 spindles. The spindles A1 of this loom are round, and made with a projection inclining upwards, to facilitate the falling of the stitch. The loom is here divided to contain 25 spindles, and consequently 25 feeders; these revolving feeders D3 are separate, and are actuated by the circular rack L3, the teeth of which gear with the pinions of the feeders, & the threads pass through the 30 axes of the pinions and through the ends of the feeders. The plates M1 and S1, which carry the spindles and blades, have a slow rotatory motion imparted to them; whilst the plate X, which carries the eecentrix E1, for actuating the blades, and*rod D1, which.pushes the thread on to the hooks of the blades, rotates at about twenty-five times the velocity of the plates M1 and S1, and in 35 a contrary direction to these plates; it is driven direct by the bevel gearing N2 and winch handle O1. The spindle-carrying plate is driven by the intermediate wheels Z, Z1, Z2, Z3, Z4, which reduce the speed, at the rate of twenty-five to one, equal to the number of spindles in the. loom. TheSpecification.- . A«D. 18'04.-—\M° 22^9. _ 7 ......... .. .................;______________________ ■ '____________; . Johnsons Improvements Circular Loom's. ring or circle T, upon which' rests the circular rack Ls, is fixed,, and is suspended by means of tire rods S2 to the tipper plate R3,. which plate serves as a support for all the fixed portions of the loom. The rack L3 is actuated by the intermediate wheels Z1, Vs, V4, and the pinion V5, which latter 5 gears directly with/ the vertical teeth of the rack. The speed of the rack is so calculated that each feeder shall make one turn round the spindle which corresponds to it during the time that this spindle makes one- twenty-fifth of a revolution, so that all the feeders which are secured to the circle T by small bearings T2 make one turn rouiid each spindle, but 10 changing consecutively the spindle at each of their revolutions. The thread conductors P2 are not all placed in the same position or point of rotation, but are arranged in different positions in these circles of rotation in such a manner, that when the eccentric, which actuates the blades C1, comes round in front of each feeder, the thread will be immediately below the spindle which 15 corresponds to the conductor. IP is a fixed vertical spindle, to which as attached the loom; N3, N3, represents a pinching screws, for fixing the dif- ferent parts of the mechanism; Q,3, a cup for holding the lubricating oil, on the bottom of which rests the collar of the plate M1. The loom is kept in position by resting on the nut M5. C1 are the hooked blades, which work.in the same 20 manner as those in the loom, Figs. 1 and 3; D2 are helical springs for drawing in the blades. Fig. 10 represents a new form of counter for circular looms, driven by the mechanism of the loom. This apparatus serves to indicate the number of revolutions or ranges of stitches or loops formed by the ' loom. It is composed of a revolving disc or dial Us suitably divided, a fixed 25 indicator V3 and an endless screw Ts gearing into the disc U3, which is toothed for that purpose. The endless screw is fitted on to the shaft of the actuating handle, cr on any portion of the loom, which makes one turn for every entire range of stitches cr loops. If the rotating part of the loom, upon which is fitted the endless screw, should not-he inexact relation with the number of 30'ranges of stitches or loops, it will be necessary to arrange the teeth of the wheel and the screw threads in such a manner as to place such portion of the loom in proper relation with the divisions on the dial. The indicator and supports for the disc are fixed on to the frame of the loom. K Having now described and particularly ascertained the nature of the said 35 Invention, and the manner in which the same is or may be used or carried into effect, I would observe, in conclusion, that I do not confine or restrict myself to the precise details or arrangements which I have had occasion to describe or refer to, as many variations may be mada therefrom without deviating from the principles or main features of the said Invention ; but what I consider to8 ' A.D. 1854.-----------N° 2279. Specification. Johnsons Improvements in Circular Looms. be novel and original, and therefore claim as the Invention secured to me by the herein-before in part recited Letters Patent, is,— • First, the general construction and arrangement of circular looms for producing knitted or looped fabrics, as herein-before described. Second, the application and use in circular looms of inflexible spindles in 5 place of spring needles, as herein-before described. Third, the construction and arrangement of the vertical hooked blades, herein-before described, and the application in conjunction with the slotted inflexible spindles. Fourth, the system or mode of actuating the hooked blades by means of 10 eccentric inclines, as herein-before described. Fifth, the peculiar constructions and arrangements of thread feeders or supplyers, as herein-before described. In witness whereof, I, the said John Henry Johnson, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twenty-fifth day of April, One thousand eight 15 hundred and fifty-five. J. HENRY JOHNSON, (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A. D, 1854?. Oct. 25. H? 2279. (l SHEET) The/ Med dr-ccwmg parity London: Printedbj George Edward Eyre and William. Spottiswoode, ftintestotbe QiieeDlsmostEs^fleiitMajes^ 1855. Drawn an Store iy-MaDy So Sons.library OF THE. UNIVERSITY OF ILUN0I8A.D. 1854 N° 2280. Furnaces. LETTERS PATENT to William Grindley Craig, of Gorton, near Manchester, in the County of Lancaster, Engineer, for the Invention of “ Improve- ments in the Mode or Method op Consuming Smoke, and in the Machinery or Apparatus employed therein.” Sealed the 20th April 1855, and dated the 26th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said William Grindley Craig at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 26th October 1854. I, William Grindley Craig, of Gorton, near Manchester, in the County 5 of Lancaster, Engineer, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in the Mode or Method op Consuming Smoke, and in the Machinery or Apparatus employed therein,” to be as follows :— I propose to arrange the fire-places of furnaces and boilers, whether for locomotive or stationary purposes, in such a manner that the smoke shall 10 always pass over or through a part of the fire, which is very hot, which I can accomplish by either making two fire-places, so connected, that whilst one is in a green or smoky state, the other will be red hot, over or through which the smoke will pass, and be thus consumed; or if I have only one fire-place I arrange tubes or flues in it, so as to cause a separation, and convey the smoke 15 over a red part of the fire.2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2280. Specification. Craig's Improvements in the Mode of Consuming Smoke, . f" Dra-wn oil Stone fry MaJfry & Sons. ' I ' V V ' J>‘ r ’ . \ I v - ( ^ ( ^ ' _.v V . ' ’ A. tuv©s:;:;.isi ■">i« - •* ' London: Geok^^ . , ,V, ;, .1.".' library OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISLIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA. I). 1854s. Oci. 26. M? 2280. CBAICrS SpEciFrcATioisr. fs SHEETS) SHEET 3. F I C 9 F I G . 10. F I F I G t 7 . F I G . 8 . Drawn on Stone by Malby & Sons. Lmvox: Pok . v Pc it itedbd George Eyre aadVmxAM Spottiswoore * Ltefs tp tiie Queenis mo^tlxeeJkait 1855. ■ v/4-\,LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 ............N° 2281. Obtaining Alcohol from Organic Substances. [This Invention received Provisional Protection, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Richard Archibald Brooman at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 26th October 1854.—A communication. I, Richard Archibald Brooman, of 166, Fleet Street, in the City of 5 London, Patent Agent, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “An Improved Method oe Obtaining Alcohol eeom Organic Substances and Particularly from Wood ” (communicated to me by a foreigner residing abroad) to be as follows:— The wood or other organic substances in their dry state are reduced into very .0 small pieces, and subjected to the action of concentrated sulphuric acid. The mixture afterwards is diluted with water, and then subjected to the action of carbonate of lime, in order to neutralize the excess of sulphuric acid. The sulphate of lime which is formed is separated from the liquid by filtration or decantation. The remaining liquid is fermented with yeast, or otherwise, and 15 alcohol will be obtained by distillation. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 ............N° 2282. Machinery for Drawing, Moulding, and Forging Metals. LETTERS PATENT to John Healey, Engineer, and John Foster & John Lowe, Spindle Makers, all of Bolton-le-Moors, in the County of Lan- caster, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Machinery to be used for Drawing, Moulding, Forming, and Forging Articles in Metal.” Sealed the 20th April 1855, and dated the 26th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said John Healey, John Foster, and John Lowe at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 26th October 1854. We, John Healey, Engineer, and John Foster and John Lowe, Spindle 5 Makers, all of Bolton-le-Moors, in the County of Lancaster, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in Machinery to be used for Drawing, Moulding, Forming, and Forging Articles in Metal,” to be as follows :— The first part of our Invention relates to a novel arrangement of rolls or rollers, 10 and to a manner of operating with them, for the purpose of drawing, moulding, forming, or forging. In the manner of operating here referred unto, the metal to be operated upon is entered between the rolls or rollers from that side of them from which it will be delivered or rolled out when operated upon by them;2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2282. Provisional Specification. Healey, Foster, df Lowe's Impts. in Drawing, Moulding, dfc. Articles in Metal. and in order that the metal to be operated upon may be entered between the rolls or rollers, they are formed with a portion of their peripheries removed, in other words, with flat places on them, which come opposite each other every revolution of the rolls or rollers, leaving at that moment a space between them through which the metal is entered, and as this is done while they are revolving, 5 the speed is regulated to give the necessary time. Stops are arranged on the front or back side of the rolls or rollers, against which the ends of the bar of metal or collars fixed temporarily on it may be held, by which means that point of the bar of metal which the rolls or rollers are to commence to operate upon each time is adjusted or fixed. Grooves are cut in the rollers of such form and jo extent (either for parallel or taper work, as may be required). The second part of our Invention relates to an arrangement of mechanism to be used for striking or giving blows upon swages for forming articles of metal, or which may be otherwise used for drawing, forging, or framing metals. The mechanism here referred to consists of two or more hammers; the ends 15 of the parts corresponding to the handles are jointed with the ends of a straight lever, which has its fulcrum (which is equidistant between its ends) secured on a shaft fixed in bearings, and the handles at a point about the middle of them are also jointed with another similar lever by connecting links, the latter lever being free on the shaft. The handles extend from each end of the fast 20 lever at opposite sides at about right angles to it, and the other lever, which is free on the shaft, is about parallel with them. With this arrangement the move- ment of one hammer is communicated to the other, and if the shaft be revolved, and the head of a swage or other article be brought within the path of the hammers, they will strike upon it; the article will form an obstruction to the 25 progress of the hammer ; but as the shaft continues its revolution, the fixed lever, to which the ends of the hammers are fixed, draws it off the article, by pulling it inwards ; it is thrown outwards again for the next blow by centrifugal force, or by the assistance of a spring, which exerts its force upon that lever which is free on the axis. The hammers can be drawn inwards so as not to strike, by 30 applying friction to the lever, which is free on the shaft. A number of hammers may be arranged on the same shaft, or one arrangement of hammers may be made to slide on a shaft. If used to strike on swages, the swages block may be made to slide, so as to bring the required swage under the hammer; or otherwise swages on pivots may be used. 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2282. 3 Healey, Foster, <$/■ Lowe's Impts. in D, Moulding, $c. Articles in Metal. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said John Healey, John Foster, and John Lowe in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 26th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, we, John 5 Healey, Engineer, and .John Foster and John Lowe, Spindle Makers, all of Bolton-le-Moors, in the County of Lancaster, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-sixth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, 10 did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto us, the said John Healey, John Foster, and John Lowe, Her special license that we, the said John Healey, John Foster, and John Lowe, our executors, administra- tors, and assigns, or such others as we, the said John Healey, John Foster, and John Lowe, our executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any 15 time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Machinery to be used eou Drawing, Moulding, Forming, and Forging Articles 20 in Metal,” upon the condition (amongst others) that we, the said John Healey, John Foster, and John Lowe, by an instrument in writing under our hands and seals, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months 25 next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that we, the said John Healey, John Foster, and John Lowe, do hereby declare the nature of our said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement and accompanying Drawings 30 (that is to say):— The first part of our Invention relates to a novel construction and arrange- ment of rolls or rollers, and to a manner of operating with them, which may be advantageously made use of in drawing, moulding, forming, or forging various articles in metal, such as spindles, flyers, and other articles used in preparing 35 and spinning machines, and many other articles used for other purposes. In the manner of operating with rolls or rollers for the purposes herein-before referred unto, our Invention consists in entering the metal to be operated upon between the rolls or rollers from that side of them from which it will be4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2282. Specification. Healey, Foster, § Lowe's Impts. in Drawing, Moulding, Qc. Articles in Metal. delivered or rolled out when operated upon by them; and in order that the metal to be operated upon may be entered between the rolls or rollers, this part of our Invention further consists in forming or constructing one of them or both of them with portions of their peripheries removed, in other words, with flat or sunk places upon them, which are arranged so as to come opposite each 5 other every revolution of the rolls or rollers, leaving at that moment a space between them, through which the metal is entered, and if this is done while they are revolving, the speed is regulated to give the necessary time. In using rolls or rollers arranged and constructed as referred to above, stops are used either on the front or back side of the rolls or rollers, against which the ends 10 of the bar of metal or collars fixed temporarily on it may be held, by which means that point of the bar of metal which the rolls or rollers are to commence to operate upon each time is affixed or adjusted. The rolls or rollers may be made of any convenient diameter, and are formed or constructed with grooves or moulds of such form and extent (either for parallel or taper work) as the 15 nature of the article to be drawn, moulded, formed, or forged may require. For the purpose of more clearly explaining this part of our Invention, and the mode in which we carry it into effect, we refer to the Figures of the Drawings annexed hereunto, in which the same letters and figures of reference will be repeated on the same or corresponding parts on each Figure of the 20 Drawings. Fig. 1 exhibits a front view of a pair of rolls or rollers; Fig. 2, an end view; the driving geer and pulleys in this view being shewn only in dotted line. a are the side frames of the machine; a1, a cylindrical stay having flanges, by which the sides a are screwed to it; b are the rolls or rollers, having portions 25 of their peripheries removed (seen best in section, as shewn in Fig. 4); their journals work in bearings b1, ¥, supported and fixed in the side frames a; the lower bearing or step 61 forms a support for the upper bearing ; ¥ are bolts, which screw in the side frames to hold down the caps b\ The external diameters of the rolls or rollers are equal, and they are geered together by 30 equal toothed wheels If, which are keyed on one end of the axis of each roll or roller, and revolving motion is conveyed to them by a wheel ¥, keyed on the axis of the lower roll or roller, which wheel geers with a pinion c1 on the shaft c, which first receives motion from the driving power employed by a strap working on the fast and loose pulleys c3. The shaft c passes through the cylindrical stay 35 a1, working in bearings on the side frames a, and has at the end opposite the driving end a fly wheel c3 keyed upon it. We have herein-before stated that grooves or moulds are made in the rolls or rollers (in that part of their peri- pheries which is not sunk or cut away) of such form and extent as the natureSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2282. 5 Healey, Foster, Lowes Impts. in Drawing, Moulding, F.(:n;lCATION . F I C . F I C . FIG. F ! G . S F ! G '/////////&//////////, Scale of Kg's X 2.3.4?. 5 &60aelialf. Seale o£ JFig\ 1. One fifteenth.. 77i& died/ dnxmtiAji is not colored/, Drawn on Sboneloy Malty-3c Sons . London: Priatedbf George Edw&rdEtre andWiuiAM.SpornswoonE . Printers'tothfi QueerismostLxeeUmt Majesty. 18o5.library OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 ....... N0' 2284. Apparatus for Drying Grain, &c. LETTERS PATENT to Charles Henry Olivier, of No. 37, Finsbury Square, in the City of London, Commission Merchant, for the Invention of “ An Improved Apparatus for Drying.”—A communication. Sealed the 17th April 1855, and dated the 26th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Charles Henry Olivier at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 26th October 1854. I, Charles Henry Olivier, of 37, Finsbury Square, in the City of London, 5 Commission Merchant, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ An Improved Apparatus for Drying ” to be as follows, viz.:— This apparatus consists of a dark and closed chamber, constructed of brick- work, in the front of which there are several doors, through which the objects to be dried are introduced. In such chamber are placed iron steam cases of 10 rectangular form, of about eight (8) feet in length, about three (3) feet in width, and about seven (7) inches in depth; these dimensions may be varied, according to the objects that are to be dried. The steam cases above described are made in the shape of rectangular boxes, well closed, so as to be steam- tight ; these are placed in such dark chamber on cross beams, kept firmly sup- 15 ported by iron uprights. These steam cases are arranged side by side, at the distance of about one foot eight inches (1 f. 8 i.) from each other, and upon them plates of sheet iron are laid from one extremity of the range to the other, so that the said steam cases themselves, and the plates of sheet iron laid upon them, form a continuous platform. A second platform may be made also by 20 means of a second series of such steam cases, and of plates of sheet iron placed2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2284. Provisional Specification, Olivier's Improved Apparatus for Drying. at any convenient or required distance above the first series; any number of them could be thus arranged if it were needed, so that the objects to be dried, which are placed on such platform, are dried both on their upper lower surfaces more rapidly, and with greater cleanliness, than with any apparatus heated by the direct action of fire. 5 The Method op Introducing the Steam to the Steam Cases. At the extremity of the first steam case there is a tube, of one inch in diameter, through which steam from the boiler of a steam engine is introduced; at the other end of the said steam case there is also a second tube of the same dimension, which communicates with the second steam case, and thus from 10 one steam case to the other there is a continuous steam communication, and in the last one of the series there is a discharge pipe for the steam which has effected its passage through the entire range of the steam cases for the purpose ef heating the aforesaid chamber, as before described. Each steam case must also have at each of its extremities a small discharge pipe & cock, by which to 15 let off the water of condensation of the steam, and such discharge pipes are laid both to the right and to the left of the front of the apparatus, so as not to obstruct the door ways for the introduction of the objects to be operated on. On each platform there are four discharge pipes, their dimension being deter- mined with precision by the ventilation required for the damp arising from the 20 objects to be dried. Above the chamber another tube also projects about two feet (2 f.) through, and by which all the evaporation from the objects drying will be driven out. In cases, however, where there is no supply of steam from a steam engine to heat the said drying apparatus, then a small pipe must be fixed between a 25 steam boiler & the first steam case, & then a discharge pipe must be provided to the last steam case as well as a cock, by which to regulate or close the issue of the steam therefrom; in this case it would be necessary to place a safety valve upon one of the steam cases. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the letters Patent, filed SO by the said Charles Henry Olivier in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 26th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Charles Henry Olivier, of No. 37, Finsbury Square, in the City of London, Commis- sion Merchant, send greeting. 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2284. 3 Oliviers Improved Apparatus for Drying. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-sixth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, 5 the said Charles Henry Olivier, Her special licence that I, the said Charles Henry Olivier, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Charles Henry Olivier, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully 10 might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention of “ An Improved Apparatus for Drying,” “ a communication,” upon the con- dition (amongst others) that I, the said Charles Henry Olivier, by an instru- ment in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and 15 ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Charles Henry Olivier, do hereby 20 declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement:— This Invention consists in the manner of drying grain or any other article, as hereafter described. The accompanying Drawings represent the apparatus 25 to be used for such purpose. Fig. 1 is a front elevation of the apparatus, shelving one set of doors open. Fig. 2 is a plan of the steam boxes, shewing the ingress and egress of the steam. Fig 3 is a view, shewing three sides of the steam box. 30 Fig. 4 is a view, shewing 3 sides of a steam box, which can be used instead of the before-mentioned one. Fig. 5 is a plan of a tube. Figs. 6, 7, 8, and 9 represent tools for working the matters to be dried. Fig. 10 is a view, shewing 2 sides of flat curved pipes. 35 A is a pipe for the ingress of the steam to the boxes B, in which the steam circulates, as shewn by the arrows, and discharges itself at L. C, sheets of iron covering the spaces between the boxes, to form with them the platforms on which the matter to be dryed is placed. The said platforms are fixed on cross pieces. The small pipes D are for the discharging of the water proceeding4 AD. 1854.—N° 2284. Specification. Olivier's Improved Apparatus for Drying. from the condensation of steam as it circulates through the boxes, and falls into small tubs I at the foot of the apparatus, as shewn in Fig 1. E, the dark chambers to dry the grain or other material. The doors F of the dark chambers are double. The brickwork G supports the apparatus, and through which the small 5 pipes D pass, for the discharge of the water of the condensed steam. H are very short pipes with cocks, to throw out the steam proceeding from the matters that are being dried in the said dark chambers E, which pipes are placed against the interior facing of the upper box, so that the whole steam of each platform may issue by the same upper pipe. J is a tube, which may be '10 placed round the dark chambers under the platform, in case a strong heat should be needed in the said dark chambers. A safety valve M is connected with the pipes or boxes, in case it is necessary to work with the pressure of the steam, instead of the waste steam of a steam engine. The covering N of the dark chambers is either by a roof 15 on iron cross pieces, or by planks coated with sheet iron, so as to close per- fectly the dark chambers. The flat curved pipes 0, Fig. 10, are used to produce a temperate and equal heat, and are placed on iron cross pieces, with the necessary rests for solidity, and covered with a thin sheet of iron, under which all the heat of the pipes will produce the said temperate and equal 20 heat. This mode may be especially adopted for all objects that do not require too great a heat, such as coffee, grain, &c. If it be desired to dry woods, gun stocks, or like objects, there are placed, a short distance from the base of the said flat curved pipes, hooks or iron cross pieces; and if for any other purpose the matter to be dried required a loftier space, the dark chamber might be 25 raised. The tools P are required to turn the material or matter while drying, and for withdrawing the same from the dark chambers. In witness whereof, I, the said Charles Henry Olivier, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this 26th day of April, in the year of our Lord 1855. 30 C. H. OLIVIER, (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.(l SHEET.) AJ).1854k Oct. 26.IN’? 2284. OLIVIEH’S Spe C1EICAT10H. oooooooooo oood O O O o oooooooo oooo ovo o o O o o o o o o o OOOOOOO OOOOq o o o ooooooooooo oo oooo o o o ■ . o o : OO O o O GOO ooooooo o oooo cyo o o o o & OOOOOOOQOO o oo oooooo O OOP 0,0,, O O Q O o 0 0.00 0 O O OOOOOOO 0,00 0 o F 1 G ooooooo oooooo oooo oooooo ooooooo ooo o ooo o o F I C F I G F I C o o ooooooooooooo ooo OOQOQ oooo o oooooooo 0)00 oo ooo o oo' O- OOOO o oo oo O OO OO oo OQ oo ooo o pooooooooo 0.0 o o oooo ooo ooooooo o Q O OP F 1 C F I 0 o"~7> o o o o o Q O 0-- 0 — " loJL o' o 6 o jo o o o o ~o o o o "*£5 "o o o o * o o ooo F 1 C Tlw filed/ draMrmtj is yvof colored/. Dra_wrL oil Stone IjMatbjr S oils ■ London: PrinjedbyGeorge Edward Eire imdWn.iXAM Spotxiswoode ;library OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2285. Bleaching, Drying, and Preparing Hemp and Flax. LETTERS PATENT to Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau, of 4, South Street, Finsbury, London, and 39, Rue de 1’Echiquier, Paris, Patent Agent, for the Invention of “ Improvements in Bleaching, Dyeing, and Preparing Hemp and Flax to be Spun.”—A communication from Messrs. A. and H. Six, of Wazemmes-les-lille. Sealed the 3rd April 1855, and dated the 26th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 26th October 1854. I, Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau, of 4, South Street, 5 Finsbury, London, and 39, Rue de l’Echiquier, Paris, Patent Agent, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention of “ Improvements in Bleaching, Dyeing, and Preparing Hemp & Flax to be Spun,” being a communication from Messrs. A. & H. Six, of Wazemmes-les-lille, to be as follows:— The hemp or flax being hackled is hung upon bars fixed in a frame; in that 10 position it is introduced into baths of chlorine acid lye, dye wash, &c., com- posed as usual, until the bleaching or dyeing operation is completed. The hemp or flax is then dried, and in order to make it soft and silky I beat or bruise it. To separate the fibres I subject them to an operation similar to hackling, which renders the hemp or flax susceptible of being spun by the 15 same machinery & with the same facility as if it had neither been bleached nor dyed.2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2285. Specification. Be Fontaine Moreau'sImpts. in Bleaching,Dyeing, $ Preparing Hemp, cj-c. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 26th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau, of 4, South Street, Finsbury, 5 London, and 39, Rue de l’Fchiquier, Paris, Patent Agent, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-sixth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, 10 the said Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau, Her special license, that I, the said Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times 15 thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention of “ Improve- ments in Bleaching, Dyeing, and Preparing Hemp and Flax to be Spun,” being a communication from Messieurs A. and II. Six, of Wazemmes-les-lille, upon 20 the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and 25 immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to bo particularly described and ascer- tained in and by the following statement thereof, reference being had to the 30 Drawing hereto annexed, and to the figures marked thereon, that is to say:—. The Invention communicated to me consists,— First, in the mode of bleaching or dying unbleached hemp and flax in the state in which they are found, after they have been submitted to the bruising and peeling processes, that is to say, when more or less perfectly freed of their 35 wood or straw. When operating upon certain kinds of peeled hemp, which are now only employed in the manufacture of common rope, in consequence of the imperfect steeping process employed, before dying or bleaching theSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2285. 8 De Fontaine Moreau's Impts. in BleachinDyeing, Preparing Hemp, Qc. matters they are introduced into a copper, at the bottom of which is a steam pipe; water is afterwards admitted in sufficient quantity to cover the sub- stances to be treated, and I heat to a temperature of about twenty-five degrees Reaumur during thirty-six to seventy-two hours, during which time a fermen- 5 tation takes place, which disengages and softens the fibres. By this mode of treatment such kinds of hemp are rendered fit to be employed, not only for fine twine but also for fine thread, which can be made by the hand, or by the engines usually employed for flax spinning. Secondly, in submitting bleached or dyed hemp and flax to several opera- 10 tions to give them softness, and render them fit for being worked and spun, either by the ordinary flax engines or by the hand. By the means herein-after described finer numbers of spun hemp than hitherto are obtained with this material. The chemical processes for bleaching and dying employed are the same as those generally employed, but the manner in which the matters are 15 arranged for bleaching or dying is different, and is herein-after described. I employ an apparatus consisting of a frame of a square form, shewn in the annexed Drawing; of which Figure 1 is a plan, Figure an edge view, and Figure 3 a side view, and provided at its upper part with wooden bars, upon which the matters to be bleached or dyed are hung, so that the ends should 20 hang down equally on both sides, as shewn by Figure 3. The dimensions of the frame may be varied, according to the requirements of the work. The frame may be constructed of any other suitable form. When the hemp or flax is placed on the bars, it can be left there until the bleaching or dying is finished, and may be there alternately submitted, without being disturbed, to the action 25 of the baths of chlorine acid lye, to the dying and washing operations, &c. The frames charged with fibrous matters are moved by means of a crane or lever, by which they are raised and lowered alternately into the bleaching, dying, or washing baths, until the materials have reached the requisite degree of preparation. The cranes also serve to agitate the frames in the baths, in 30 order to cause the fibrous materials to be impregnated with the bleaching or dying agents in as perfect a manner as possible. When the bleaching or dying operations are terminated, the matters are dried; but as it is found that after they are dried the matters become hardened, and the hempen or flaxen fibres adhere together, and become thereby unfit for 35 spinning, I submit the matters to various operations, to render them supple and more fit for spinning. After the hemp or flax is bleached or dyed and dried, it is softened either by beating it by the hand with mallets, or by means of a machine susceptible of producing the necessary softness. Although the hemp and flax upon which I operate are stripped of the wood4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2285. Specification. De Fontaine Moreau's Jmpts. in Bleaching, Dyeing, Q Preparing Hemp, tyc. or straw, I recommend, as a means of softening the matters which have under- gone the bleaching and dying processes, the application of various processes employed for bruising the wood of the hemp or straw of the flax; and in order to complete the disengagement of the fibres, I have recourse to an operation analogous to that employed for peeling, either by hand or by a 5 machine. This operation is performed by means ordinarily made use of for peeling flax. Having thus described the nature of the Invention, and the manner in which the same is to be performed, I would have it understood that I do not- confine myself to the precise details herein laid down; but what I claim is,— 10 First, the submitting peeled hemp to fermentation by means of hot water, for softening and separating the fibres, as herein-before described. Secondly, the contrivance for, and mode of, bleaching and dying flax and hemp, as herein-before described, and referred to in the Figures of the annexed Drawing. 15 Thirdly, the preparing hemp and flax to be spun, after they have been bleached or dyed, by submitting them to beating and to an operation analogous to the processes employed for peeling flax, as herein-before described. In witness whereof, I, the said Peter Armand Ie Comte de Fontaine Moreau, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twenty-fourth day 20 of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. L’ DE FONTAINE MOREAU, (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Etre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.1854. Oct. 26. JSf? 2285.. F I G . I . fiA.D. 1854 N°2286. Transferring Pictures, &c. (This Invention did not proceed to the Great Seal.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Peter Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 26th October 1854.—A communication. I, Petek Armand le Comte de Fontaine Moreau, of 4, South Street, 5 Finsbury, London, and 39, Rue de l’Echiquier, Paris, Patent Agent, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention of “Improvements in Transferring Colored Pictures, Portraits, and Engravings,” being a communication from Leopold Muller & Antoine Widl, of Vienna, in the Empire of Austria, to be as follows:— 10 By means of a lithographic process I obtain an exact outline of the subject to be transferred upon paper, which can then be transferred either upon paper, stone, glass, leather, metal, wood, or any other substance; and by sub- mitting this to a lithocromic operation, I obtain the colored reproduction of the object. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 ............N° 2287. Manufacture of Iron. LETTERS PATENT to James Griffiths, of Wolverhampton, in the County of Stafford, Engineer, for the Invention of “ Improvements in the Mode or Process op Manufacturing certain Kinds op Iron, and in the Machinery or Apparatus used in such Manufacture ; Part of -which Improvements ARE ALSO APPLICABLE TO MACHINERY USED IN THE MANUFACTURE OF OTHER Descriptions of Iron.” Sealed the 24th April 1855, and dated the 26th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said James Griffiths at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 26th October 1854. I, James Griffiths, of Wolverhampton, in the County of Stafford, Engineer. 5 do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in the Mode or Process of Manufacturing certain Kinds of Iron, and in the Machinery or Apparatus used in such Manufacture ; Part of which Improvements are also applicable to Machinery used in the Manufacture of other Descriptions of Iron,” to be as follows:— 10 ' The description of iron to the manufacture of which my Invention has reference is that known as “small hoop iron.” The improvement in its manufacture consists in forming it from billets of larger dimensions than usual, by reducing such billets to bars of a width equal to that of two of the2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2287. Provisional Specification. Griffiths Improvements in the Manufacture of Iron, bars intended to be ultimately fabricated, but of the same length and thick- ness. Each of these bars is then divided longitudinally into two by the action of a cutting apparatus connected with the “ strann rolls,” and the two bars so produced are subjected to the action of finishing rolls to complete them. The improvements in the machinery consist,— Firstly, in the application and arrangement of cutters and guides for the purpose of dividing the bars longitudinally at the “strann rolls,” as above mentioned. And, secondly, in improved mechanism for regulating and adjusting with ease and precision the interval between the finishing rolls, the last-named improvement being more or less applicable to rolls for drawing iron in general. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said James Griffiths in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 25th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, James Griffiths, of Wolverhampton, in the County of Stafford, Engineer, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-sixth day of October, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said James Griffiths, Her special licence that I, the said James Griffiths, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said James Griffiths, my executors, administrators, or assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the- term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention of “ Improvements in the Mode os Process of Manufacturing certain Hinds of Iron, and in the Machinery or Apparatus used in such Manufacture ; Part of which Improvements art; aiso APPLICABLE TO MACHINERY USED IN THE MANUFACTURE OF OTHER DESCRIPTIONS of Iron,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said James Griffiths, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should par- ticularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what 5 10 15 20 25 30Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2287. 3 Griffiths Improvements in the Manufacture of Iron, Qc. manner the same was to bo performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said James Griffiths, do hereby declare the 5 nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement, aided by the Sheet of illustrative Drawings to these Presents annexed (that is to say) :— My said Invention consists, firstly, in an improved method or methods, pro- 10 cess or processes, for manufacturing iron of small sizes, by forming strands of twice the width of the proposed bars, and dividing such strands lengthwise by cutting apparatus of a novel form and construction; also by shortening the process of preparing the billets for making such iron by the use of similar cutting apparatus, to produce such billets by dividing puddle bars or piled 15 bars longitudinally for that purpose. Secondly, in certain additions to, or improvements in, the ordinary rolling machinery constituting the cutting apparatus, employed to divide the strand or bar before mentioned longitudinally. Thirdly, in an improved combination and arrangement of mechanical parts 20 for regulating, varying, and adjusting the distance between the finishing rolls, and which mechanism is also applicable to other rolls which require frequent adjustment, such as those for making boiler plates or the sheets from which tinned plate is manufactured. In the ordinary mode of fabricating the descriptions of iron before referred 25 to, each bar or rod is formed singly by rolling down the material to the pro- posed width and guage from a billet which has been previously produced by bolting down a stouter and shorter billet to a smaller cross section, the first- mentioned billet being required to bear a definite proportion in size to the rod or bar proposed to be manufactured. My method effects a considerable saving 30 by dispensing with this part of the common process, inasmuch as it enables me to use a much larger billet than the old method, as will hereafter appear. By the common process, the material from which each rod is to be fabricated passes singly through all the stages. The reduction of the billets to their ultimate form of bars has also to be effected under other disadvantageous 35 conditions. From the smallness of the body of iron under operation, rapid loss of temperature ensues in the first stages of the process of rolling or “ bolting down,” so that during the later or perfecting stages the heat is frequently so far exhausted as to render the result precarious, and the smaller4 A.B. 1854.----------N0,2287. Specification. "Griffiths' Improvements in the Manufacture tlie bar or strand in course of fabrication, the more it will be liable to this drawback. The objects of my Invention are to prevent this inconvenience, and to enable the process to be carried on with diminished expenditure of labor, time, and fuel, and consequently at a reduced expense. I accomplish these purposes partly by cutting or dividing larger masses or strands of iron into smaller ones, in place of reducing them by the slower process of rolling, and partly by operating upon a double quantity of material at once, so that the mass being larger may not be so rapidly cooled down, and a double amount of useful effect may be obtained at each stage of the process through which such double quantity passes. I proceed as follows :—- Firstly, in preparing the billets, I shorten the process by dividing a large puddle bar or piled bar lengthwise by means of my cutting apparatus, instead of bolting it down to the required size by the more tedious operation of the rolls. Secondly, I use billets of a transverse sectional area four times as great as it would be practicable to use for the same purpose in following the ordinary method; these billets are bolted down into strands of-a length and thickness adapted to produce the required bar, but of twice the width.. Each of the strands so formed is then passed through a pair of cutters, which divide it down the middle. These cutters, which I shall hereafter describe, may form parts of a pair of rolls, by whose action the rolling process is continued simultaneously with the cutting. The two rods or bars produced by the bisection of the, strand are then completed by subjecting them to the action of hard or finishing rolls in the ordinary manner. Many of the advantages attending this method are at once apparent. In the first place, the billet, consisting of a larger body of metal, is more retentive of heat, and goes to the strand rolls at a temperature better adapted for working. In the next place, in the operation of preparing the billets there is a considerable saving of time, labor, and fuel, inasmuch as to produce a given quantity of small bar iron, one billet only has to be made in the improved, where two are necessary in the common method, and that billet may be produced by a much shorter process. In addition to this, the Jabor, time, and fuel expended in the latter case in heating and bolting down the original billet to a second of smaller size are in the former case entirely dispensed with. If the billets are made by compounding portions of bars in the manner termed “piling,” the saving will be still greater, because one opera- tion of piling by the new process may be substituted for four such operations 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification, A.D. 1854.—N° 2287. 5 Griffiths' Improvements in the Manufacture of Iron, fyc. by the old, the piled bar formed being divided by cutting into two billets, and each of these billets containing the material for two bars. Lastly, in all the subsequent parts of the process up to the cutting there will be a similar saving, inasmuch as the quantity of material undergoing manipulation will 5 always be twice as great by the new as that by the old method, and since the operation of dividing the strand may be effected simultaneously with one stage of the rolling, it will cause no delay tending to countervail the advan- tages enumerated. Two pairs of hard rolls will, however, be necessary in the new process in place of one pair in the old, but as each of these will 10 perform its proper quantum of work, no loss will accrue from this addition to the apparatus. Let it be supposed, by way of example, that the kind of iron proposed to be manufactured is half-inch hoop. The fabrication of such iron by the common way would be commenced by forming for each rod to be manu- 15 factured a billet about one inch and a half square in cross section; each of these would have to be bolted down into a second billet, about three-quarters of an inch square in cross section, and this second billet must then be returned to the furnace, and when re-heated be bolted down to about five-sixteenths of an inch square in cross section to prepare it for the strand rolls, by which it is 20 attenuated nearly to the required guage, and then completed by being passed through the finishing rolls. For making such iron by my improved method, I prepare for every two bars or rods to be made, a billet about one inch and a half square in cross section, This billet may either be prepared in the ordinary way, by bolting down the 25 puddle or piled bar, or by the shorter process of dividing the same lengthwise by my improved cutting apparatus. When prepared it contains the material for two of the bars to be finally produced, and is now to be bolted down to about three-fourths of an inch square in cross section, to prepare it for the strand rolls. By the latter it is gradually reduced to a thickness a little 80 greater than that of the hoop bar proposed to be made, and to a width equal to that of two such bars, or one inch; it is then subjected to the cutters, which divide it into two half-inch bars, and these are completed by the finishing rolls in the ordinary manner. In describing the cutting apparatus which I employ for effecting the bisec- 35 tion of the strands or bars, I shall refer to Figure 1 of the Drawings annexed to these Presents. In these Drawings the Figures are marked with alpha- betical characters, for the purpose of identifying the parts referred to in the course of the description. Figure 1 represents a pair of cutters adapted for6 A.D. 1854.—N° 2287. -Specification. Griffiths Improvements in the Manufacture of Iron, Qc. dividing the strand in making half-inch hoop bars, one of the rolls or cutters being shewn in side elevation and the other in longitudinal section. In constructing such cutters for the purpose of dividing larger bars, the only- difference will be that they must be made of proportionately larger dimensions. The cutters consist of two pairs of concentric rings or circular plates of steel, 5 or of iron with steeled edges. Of the two plates composing each pair, one is of larger diameter than the other, the difference being greater or less according to the thickness of the strand or bar which they are intended to divide. In Figure 1, a, a, are these rings, and in this example the excess in the diameter of one ring over that of the other is about one-fourth part of an inch, so that 10 the edge of the larger ring projects beyond that of the smaller about one- eighth of an inch. The larger ring on either roll is placed opposite to the smaller ring on the other, so that the projecting edges of the larger rings slightly overlap each other, and form a pair of cutting edges. The cylindrical surfaces of the rings, which are in this case about half an inch broad, act as 15 rollers, and roll out the two bars at the same time as their cutting edges sever them asunder, b, b, shew the cross section of the iron in course of being cut and rolled ; c, c, are collars on the axis of the rolls; and d, d, shew the section of a screw thread cut on the latter to receive an inside screw in the nut ; is a loose collar or heavy washer, intervening between the nut e and the cutting 20 rings a, a. By screwing up the nut e, the cutting rings a, a, are pressed against the collar c, so as to be firmly retained in their places. The rolls are adjusted endways, so as to bring the cutting edges of the rings into mutual contact, and their distance apart is adjusted to the guage suitable for the intended make of iron. They are mounted in a pair of holsters, and furnished 25 with guides in the same form and manner as other rolls. : The cutters a, a, when used for dividing the strand, may be mounted on, and form part of, the strand rolls, but I prefer mounting them, as above described, in a separate pair of holsters; because if attached to, and forming jiart of, the strand rolls, it is not easy to arrange them so as to make the edges 30 of the cutters adjustable to each other, as the strand rolls cannot be moved endwise for that purpose, but must always maintain in that direction the same relative positions. The cutters for dividing the puddle or piled bars only differ in size from these now last described. My improvements in the mechanism for varying and adjusting the distance 35 of the rolls front each other consist in the application for that purpose, instead of the screwed pin and spanner "commonly used, of a scroll, formed upon the pin or spindle, and working against a corresponding fixed scroll abuttingSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2287. 7 Griffiths Improvements in the Manufacture of Iron, . against a part of the holster or housing, the turning of the spindle being effected by the action of a worm or endless screw upon a worm wheel fixed on the upper part of the spindle. The general arrangement is shewn in Figure 2 of the Drawings, which represents an elevation of one of the 5 holsters with the apparatus attached. Figures 3 and 4 are respectively a side view and plan view of one of the scrolls. An inspection of the last- mentioned Figures will shew that the working faces of the scrolls are inclined planes g, g, and one of these scrolls being fixed in the holster, the corre- sponding one attached to the spindle will, on being turned, impart, motion to 10 the spindle in the direction of its axis by the sliding of the inclined faces against each other. In Figure 2, h, h, is the holster; k, the rolls ; and j, the cap. Against the cap j the spindle s bears, and by its descent or ascent effects the depression or permits the elevation of the cap, thereby forcing the rolls closer to each other, or allowing them to separate to a greater distance. 15 lis the scroll on the spindle; and m, the corresponding scroll, against which it acts. The latter is let into a cavity or recess in the holster, against the upper part of which it abuts. The spindle s passes through the scroll m and the top of the holster, and is furnished at its upper extremity with a worm wheel n. o is the worm or endless screw, which works in gear with the worm wheel n. 20 Its shaft is carried in bearings attached to a moveable plate bolted to the top of the holster, the bolts passing through slots in the plate, which permit the latter to have its position varied to a certain extent, to meet the convenience of the workman. On the end of the worm shaft, extending to the front side of the rolls, is fixed a hand wheel p, by which the workman, through 25 the medium of the worm and wheel, turns the spindle s, thereby causing the scroll l partially to rotate around the axis of the spindle; the sliding of its working faces against those of the fixed scroll m, effecting the elevation or depression of the spindle, according to the direction of the motion com- municated. 30 Having explained the nature of my Invention, and the manner of carrying the same into effect, I desire it to be understood that the matters which I claim as new and of my Invention, with reference to the subject of the foregoing statement, are,— Firstly, the form, construction, and arrangement of parts constituting the 35 cutting apparatus, before described, or any modification thereof. Secondly, the method herein-before pointed out of forming small bars of iron by. the bisection of a strand lengthwise, and the use and application of the cutting apparatus for the latter purpose.8 A.D. 1854.—N° 2287. Specification. Griffith’s Improvements in the Manufacture of Iron, <$fc. Thirdly, the method of producing billets from puddle bars or piled bars, by dividing the said bars longitudinally by the afore-mentioned cutting apparatus, and the use and application of such cutting apparatus for that purpose. Fourthly, the arrangement and combination of mechanical parts, herein- 5 before described, for the purpose of adjusting and varying the distance of rolls from each other. In witness whereof, I, the said James Griffiths, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twenty-first day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. 10 JAMES GRIFFITHS. (l.s.) Signed, sealed, and delivered by the before-mentioned James Griffiths, in the presence of J. Tayleb, Patent Agent, 15 Manchester. LONDON: Printed by Geobge Edwakd Eybe and William Sfottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.AJ). 1854. Oct. 26. N? 228 7. GRIFFITHS' Specification. F! C . I . f FIC. 2. FIC. 3 The/ filed/ drawing is partly eclorzcL. -p. r u ni 0 r ■____________ 1 __________________;____________________'________;___________________________■_______________.Urawn on bione by Malby gc ooiis London-: Priiited br Gfokge Edward Eyki: andWilliam Spotttsv^oode . Printcis to tlie Queens most Excellent Majesty. l8-’>-5.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2288. Rendering Ships and Batteries Shot Proof. {This Invention received Provisional Protection, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given xvithin the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by John Dudgeon at tlie Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, oh the 26th October 1854. I, John Dudgeon, of 151, Fenchurch Street, in the City of London, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention for “ An Improvement in Rendering 5 Ships and Batteries Shot Proof,” that is to say:— This Invention has for its object the so constructing ships and batteries with curved surfaces of iron as to cause shot to be deflected off therefrom. For this purpose, in constructing a ship or the face of a battery, the same is cased with or formed of iron with curved forms, such as will deflect off shot; and the 10 parts which are subject to shot being also made double, so as to contain water under compression, caused by the employment of a hydraulic pump. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William SroTTiswooDE, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.[Second Edition.] A.D. 1854 ............N° 2289. Machinery for Operating Trip Hammers. LETTERS PATENT to Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, of 16, Castle Street, Holborn (City), London, Patent Agent, for the Invention of “ An Improved Mode op Operating Trip Hammers.”—A communication. Sealed the 24th April 1855, and dated the 27th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 27th October 1854. I, Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, of 16, Castle Street, Holborn 5 (City), London, Patent Agent, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ An Improved Mode op Operating Trip Hammers ” to be as follows, viz.:— The nature & intention of the Invention is a new and improved mode of operating trip hammers, & I put in practice & perform the same in 10 manner following:—I apply to the trip hammer in its general construction & use the means of increasing its natural power, & of regulating the amount of such power from time to time, by a ready mode of adjustment. The particular construction & arrangement of the apparatus is thus:—The hammer & its shaft are raised by cams set on the driving shaft, & acting2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2289. Provisional Specification. JBellford's Improved Mode of Operating Trip Hammers. on a cross head working on guides, after the manner of other trip hammers. But in my improved construction I apply a cylinder having an air-tight piston passing through its length, such piston being made the actual rod of the hammer, & which it carries at its lower extremity. The cylinder is open at its upper end & closed at its lower, but allowing its piston rod (which, as aforesaid, is also the rod of the hammer,) to pass freely through it in an air- tight stuffing box, & thus forming an atmospheric engine. The action of the apparatus is thus:—When by the operation of the cam the hammer is raised, a vacuum of sufficient rarity for the purpose required is formed in the lower portion of the cylinder, and when the hammer is released by the action of the cam by which it was raised, it descends with a force compounded of that which is due to its gravity & the height of its fall, taken together with that of the natural atmospheric pressure. Thus, if the vacuum previously formed be a perfect one, but in cases when it is required to moderate the force of the blow to be delivered by the hammer, then, simultaneously with the use of the piston in the cylinder, in preparation for the blow to be delivered, I admit a regulated quantity of atmospheric air to enter the cylinder, following the rise of the piston, and which on the descent of the hammer reduces the valve of the. vacuum described as being formed in the first case, and counter- acts the rate of descent of the hammer by the amount of such reduction, and thus by the amount of resistance presented the force of the blow is moderated. Such adjustment of its force, by the admission of atmospheric air below the piston, I effect by the aid of ordinary slide valves formed at the sides of the cylinder, & which are put in motion at pleasure, admitting such volume of air as the required intensity of the blow may render necessary. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 26th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, of 16, Castle Street, Holborn (City), London, Patent Agent, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-seventh day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her 5 10 15 20 25 30Specification. A.D. 1854.—N” 2289. 3 Bellford's Improved Mode of Operating Trip Hammers. reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, Her special licence that I, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, my exe- 5 cutors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention of “Ax Improved Mode of Operating Trip 10 Hammers,” a communication, upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar 15 months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement, that is to say: — 20 The nature of my Invention consists in providing the rod of the hammer with a piston fitting to a cylinder, which is so constructed and furnished with valves, that the air may be excluded therefrom or admitted thereinto under the piston in such manner and in such degree as to control the force of the blow at the pleasure of the operator, and to increase the force of the blow 25 without an increase of the weight of the hammer. My Invention is illustrated in the accompanying Drawing, in which,— Fig. 1 is a vertical section of my “ atmospheric trip hammerFig. 2 is a front elevation of the same. Fig. 3 is a horizontal section of the cylinder C, showing the arrangement 30 of the valves. Fig. 4 is a vertical section of the cylinder C, in a different plane to Fig. 1. Similar letters of reference indicate corresponding parts in the several Figures. A is a guide frame, similar in character to that employed for other trip 35 hammers, supporting the anvil B and the cylinder C, which occupies a vertical position, with its axis directly over the centre of the anvil. The cylinder has an open top, but is closed at the bottom, and furnished with a stuffing box D, for the rod E of the hammer F and piston G to work through. It is provided4 A.D. 1854.------------------N° 2289. Specification. J3ettford'sImproved Mode of Operating Trip Hammers. near the bottom, in front or on either side, as may De most convenient with an opening a, see Figs. 1 and 3, which is furnished outside with a spring valve b, which will be closed by excess of pressure on its outer, and opened by excess of pressure on its inner, side; and near the opening a it has another opening c, which is fitted with a flap valve d, opening by excess of pressure on its outer, and closing by excess of pressure on its inner, side, and also with a slide valve e outside. The conditions of the valves b and e are controlled, in the manner to be presently described, by a small shaft i, which works in a journal box j outside the cylinder, and is furnished with an eccentric / opposite the valve b, with a lifting stud g opposite the slide valve e, and with a handle h. The hammer and its piston are raised by a double cam H, H, on the driving shaft I, acting under a cross head J, working on the guides k, in a similar manner to other trip hammers. In working the hammer, when it is desired to give the full force of the blow, the shaft i is placed in the position shown in Figs. 1 and 3, leaving the valve b free of the eccentric/, and leaving the slide valve e closed; and then the air, having been all or nearly all expelled from the cylinder below the piston by the descent of the hammer, causes a vacuum to be formed below the piston by the ascent of the hammer; and hence, when the hammer is set free by the cam, the pressure of the atmosphere above the piston gives force to the blow. But when it is desired to give a more moderate blow, the shaft i is turned by the operator, who holds the handle h to such a position as to open the slide valve e by means of the lifting stud g, and increase the pressure of the spring l on the valve b by means of the eccentric / and then, during the ascent of the piston, a certain quantity of air passes the valve e, and opening the valve d, as shown in Fig. 4, enters the cylinder, and then, according to its density, either partly or wholly neutralizes the effect of the atmospheric pressure above the piston, or creates a resistance to the descent of the piston by its own gravity. It will now be understood that by properly regulating the opening of the valve e and pressure on the valve b, the force of the blow may be very perfectly regulated, or the hammer may be arrested in its descent before striking. Having thus described the nature of this Invention, and the manner in which the same is or may be carried into effect, I wish it to be understood that what I claim as secured to me by the herein-before in part recited Letters Patent is, attaching to the stem or rod of the hammer a piston working in a cylinder which is open at the top and closed at the bottom, and is provided with valves, or their equivalents, substantially as herein described, by which the air can be excluded therefrom or admitted thereinto under the piston, for the 5 10 15 20 25 SO 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N" 2289. 5 Bellford's Improved Mode of Operating Trip purpose either of adding’ the whole or such part of the pressure of the atmo- sphere as may be desirable, or of creating resistance to the weight of the hammer in giving the blow; but I wish it to be understood that I do not confine myself to the precise arrangement of valves which I have described, or 5 to any particular arrangement of such devices. In witness whereof, I, the said Auguste Edouard Loradoux Bellford, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this 20th day of April, in the year of our Lord 1855. A. E. LORADOUX BELLFORD. (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.SHEET J BELLFOBD’S Specification. FIG.2. ■ • ' v.v. \ \\ - \ ' \\ \WW \ \ w F I G. 4. FIG.3. 77?&/ cZraziZru? iWpartT*- co/ Lyri; ami Wiluam Spottiswooj>i- iVijit(*rs lo (lie Qihvus mostI’xcolloat Majesty. .185:5.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2290. MXVImVVVVW Power Looms. (This Invention received Provisional Protection, hut notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time by the Act.) PBOVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by John Turner, Benjamin Holdsworth, and Robert Hartley at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with their Petition, on the 27th October 1854. We, John Turner, Overlooker, and Benjamin Holdsworth, Overlooker, 5 and Robert Hartley, Beamer, all of Burnley, in the County of Lancaster, do hereby declare the nature of the Invention for “ Certain Improvements in Power Looms for Weaving ” to be as follows:— Our improvements relate to those power looms wherein small “ check” straps are employed at each end of the slay or lathe, such “ check ” straps acting 10 upon spindles, and having at their centre a small button, working in a grooved bracket fastened to the side of the lathe or slay, which allows it to move about an inch each way before confining its action. In our improvements wre employ a bracket, secured to the side of the slay, as well as a “ check ” strap, furnished in the middle with a button or stop, and working between the cheeks 15 of the bracket on a small spindle ; but the peculiar novelty of our Invention consists in the application of a friction plate beneath the button of the check strap, and acting upwards and against it by means of springs. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode. Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 ............N° 2291. Calcination and Oxydation of Metallic and Mineral Substances. LETTERS PATENT to Astley Paston Price, of Margate, in the County of Kent, Chemist, for the Invention of “Improvements in the Calcination and Oxidation op certain Metallic, Mineral, and Metallurgical Com- pounds, AND IN THE APPARATUS AND MEANS FOR EFFECTING THE SAME.” Sealed the 24th April 1855, and dated the 27th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Astley Paston Price at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 27th October 1854. I, Astley Paston Price, of Margate, in the County of Kent, Chemist, 5 do hereby declare the nature of my said Invention for “ Improvements in the Calcination and Oxidation of certain Metallic, Mineral, and Metallurgical Compounds, and in the Apparatus and Means for Effecting the same,” to be as follows: — My improvements consist in the employment of retorts or tubes placed 10 horizontally or inclined, and heated externally, and so constructed as to be capable of revolving, by which arrangement the metallic, mineral, metallur- gical, or other products or compounds therein contained are kept in constant agitation, and the oxidation or calcination is thus most readily effected. My improvements further consist in the employment of highly heated air, 15 and of highly heated steam, singly or combined, for effecting the oxidation and2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2291. Provisional Specification. Prices Impts. in Treating Metallic, Mineral, and Metallurgical Substances. calcination of the products and compounds above mentioned in connection with my above described apparatus, or any modifications thereof. What I wish to be understood under the name of metallic, mineral, or metallurgical products or compounds are, the metallic and earthy sulphurets, antimoniurets, and arseniurets, alloys of oxidizable metals, or oxidizable metals or metallic oxides, or compounds of the metallic oxides. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent filed by the said Astley Paston Price in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 27th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Astley Paston Peice, of Margate, in the County of Kent, Chemist, send greeting. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-seventh day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Astley Paston Price, Her special license that I, the said Astley Paston Price, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Astley Paston Price, my executors, administrators, or assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improve- ments in the Calcination and Oxidation op certain Metallic, Mineral, and Metallurgical Compounds, and in the Apparatus and Means for Effecting the same,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Astley Paston Price, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Astley Paston Price, do hereby declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement, reference being had to the accompanying Drawings, and to the letters and figures marked thereon, that is to say:— 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2291. 3 Prices Impts. in Treating Metallic, Mineral, and Metallurgical Substances. My said Invention consists in tlie employment of tubes or retorts placed hori- zontally or inclined, which are so constructed and arranged that the materials to be calcined or oxidized may on being placed therein be subjected to the required temperature necessary to effect their calcination or oxidation, and that 5 a current of atmospheric air or of steam, or of the two conjointly, may, either at their ordinary or at an elevated temperature, be admitted into the interior of the retorts or tubes in which the substance to be calcined or oxidized is contained. The retorts or tubes are so arranged as to be capable of revolving, and their contents may during such revolution be kept in agitation, and so 10 present a large exposed surface to the action of the oxidizing agent, by which arrangement their calcination or oxidation is more readily effected than by the method and arrangements which are now generally employed. The retorts or tubes may be of any convenient size or form, and they may be divided by one or more partitions, arranged either longitudinally or in any other suitable 15 manner. They may also be entirely or partially open at their extremities, or they may be partially closed, and the air or steam be admitted through suitable inlet pipes, or other arrangements, and the products resulting from oxidation or calcination are carried off by suitable outlet pipes, or by other arrangements than those shewn in the Drawings, and are conducted in such a manner as to 20 be capable of being thereafter utilized. It will also be obvious that the retort or tube may be constructed so as to revolve either with or without a spindle, or by means of a wheel or driving bands or chains, or by other mechanical arrangements, differing in detail from the arrangements shewn in the Drawings. These and other modifications may obviously be adopted; but what I parti- 25 cularly wish to be understood as constituting my Invention is, the constructing of retorts or tubes capable of revolving, in which retorts or tubes, by the application of external heat, and the admission internally of atmospheric air or steam during such revolution, the calcination or oxidation may be effected. The tubes or retorts may be constructed of wrought or cast iron, or of fire clay, 30 fire bricks, or other suitable materials; or the iron tubes may be coated or lined with fire brick, fire clay, or any other substances that may be capable of protecting the metal from the action of the heat, or from the action of those compounds which may be calcined or oxidized therein. And in order that my said Invention may be more properly understood, I 35 shall now proceed to describe and refer to the several Figures on the Sheets of Drawings hereunto annexed. Figure 1 on Sheet 1 of my Drawings represents a longitudinal vertical section of one form of revolving retort, having the ends closed and supported4 A.D. 1854.------------N° 2293. Specification. Price* Impts. in Treating Metallic,Mineral, and Metallurgical Substances. by an internal spindle; and Figure 2 is a corresponding front elevation of the same, shewing a pair of retorts. The retorts A are cast or made with a series of internal supporting or strengthening arms B, through the central bosses of which arms is passed the carrying spindle or shaft C, which is supported at each extremity by the standard D, D, and works in the bearings E. Each retort is rotated slowly by a pair of endless driving chains F, F, which pass round the two ends of the retort and over a pair of driving pullies G, G, fast on the over-head driving shaft H, which may receive motion from any suitable prime mover through the spur wheel T, keyed thereon. The retorts are heated by the furnace J, which communicates by suitable side flues K with each retort; the heat and flame after passing round the revolving retort escape by the passage, L to the chimney. The retorts are charged with the material to be treated through the upper one of the two feeding doors M, M, and when charged, a current of heated air or steam, or both combined, is forced into and through the retort, and over the material contained therein through the inlet pipe N. The products of oxidation or calcination are carried off by an outlet pipe 0 at the opposite end of the retort. Both these pipes are fitted with metallic packing at P, for the purpose of allowing the shaft C to pass through them, and work steam and air tight therein. When the process of oxidation or calcination is completed, the materials are withdrawn or discharged through the discharging doors Q, Q, the lower one of the two being employed. Figure 1 on Sheet 2 of my Drawings represents a longitudinal section of another modification of revolving retort, and Figure 2 is a corresponding trans- verse section of the same. In this arrangement the system or mode of actuating or rotating the retort, shewn on Sheet 1 of the Drawings, may be employed, but the internal spindle or shaft is dispensed with, the retort rotating upon and being supported by a set of anti-friction rollers or pulleys A, A, fitted into suitable boxes, which are built in with the brick-work surrounding the retort. The ends of the retort are closed, and the materials are introduced by the feeding doors B, B, and withdrawn through the discharging doors C, C, at the opposite end of the retort. The heated air and steam is admitted through the inlet pipe D, and escapes with the products arising from the process of oxidation or calcination by the outlet pipe F. Figure 3 represents a longitudinal section of a portion of a tube or retort placed horizontally, and arranged to be heated externally. The ends of this retort are made spherical and open, and a free current of air allowed to pass through it during the process of calcination or oxidation, the products being allowed either to escape into the atmosphere, or into a hood or outlet pipe A, 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. 5 AD. 1854.—N° 2291. Prices Impts. in Treating Metallic, Mineral, and Metallurgical Substances. as shewn at Figure 4; the spindle B passing through a stuffing box C, as herein-before described, and illustrated on Sheet 1 of my Drawings. The material may be supplied and withdrawn through the hinged doors D, D, and E, E, which are shewn more clearly in the end elevation, Figure 5. This 5 retort is represented as being driven by pinions F, F, gearing into the spur wheels G, G, fitted on to the ends of the retort. In some cases the heated air and steam may be admitted into the retort through a hollow perforated shaft, and carried off by a suitable outlet pipe or hood; or the products may be carried off by a hollow perforated shaft, and the air and steam admitted by 10 a suitable inlet pipe. Figure 6 represents a longitudinal vertical section of one end of a retort, made partly open at the extremities and fitted with a hood; and Figure 7 is an end elevation of the same with the hood removed. The retort is fitted internally with a flange or shoulder A, having doors B formed therein. A large door C is also fitted into the hood D, and when the 15 retort is cither to be charged or emptied, the outer door C is opened, and also one of the inner ones B, when the material may be introduced or with- drawn with facility. The heated air and steam is introduced through the pipe E, and enters the retort by the large central aperture F; the same arrangement being adopted at the other end for allowing the products of 20 oxidation and calcination to be collected, such products entering a hood and passing off by a pipe, similar to the pipe E. Figure 8 represents another arrangement of retort, having three divisions A, A, suitably arranged inside, and running the entire length, or nearly so, of the retort. These divisions have each a raised flange or lip B cast upon them 25 at each extremity, and are fitted with moveable doors C, C, to prevent the materials from falling out during the rotation of the retort; the material to be treated is placed in each cf the divisions, and during the process of calcination or oxidation is, by the revolution of the retort, constantly agitated and exposed to the increased surface of the oxidizing agent. These divisions may be 80 encreased'or diminished, or otherwise modified, according to circumstances. The whole of the revolving retorts herein-before described may either be fitted with or without spindles or internal shafts. Where no supporting shaft is employed, the retorts will be supported on anti-friction rollers, as shewn. It will be obvious that numerous arrangements may be adopted for rotating 35 the retorts; but I wish it to be distinctly understood that I lay no claim to, neither do I confine myself to, any particular arrangement for actuating or rotating such retorts, nor to any particular construction or arrangement of doors therein, so long as the main features of my Invention be adhered to,6 A.D. 1854.---------N° 2291. Specification. Prices Impts. in Treating Metallic, Mineral, and Metallurgical Substances. viz4, that of employing externally heated revolving retorts or tubes for the purposes of calcination and oxidation. The metallic, mineral, metallurgical, or other products or compounds which with others may with advantage be subjected to the process of calcination or oxidation in the before-mentioned revolving retorts or tubes, are some of the metallic, mineral, and earthy sulphurets, antimoniurets and arseniurets, the oxides or compounds of the metallic oxides, oxidizable metals, or their oxidizable oxides. Having now described and particularly ascertained the nature of my said Invention, and the manner in which the same is or may be used or carried into effect, I would observe, in conclusion, that I do not confine or restrict myself to the precise details or arrangements which I have had occasion to describe or refer to, as many variations may be made therefrom without deviating from the principles or main features of my said Invention; but what I consider to be novel and original, and therefore claim as the Invention secured to me by the herein-before in part recited Letters Patent, is,— The employment for the purposes herein-before mentioned of revolving tubes or retorts heated externally, and so arranged as to admit into their interior air or steam highly heated, or otherwise free from the products arising from the combustion of the fuel employed in the heating of such revolving retorts or tubes, or of their contents, and to allow of the exit of the products of the oxidation or calcination. In witness whereof, I, the said Astley Paston Price, have hereunto set my hand and seal, the Twenty-seventh day of April, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. ASTLEY PASTON PRICE, (l.s.) 5 10 15 20 25 LONDON: Printed by George Edward Etre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D .1854.0CT.27.iJ9 2291. PRICE’S. Specification FI 0.2 F I C . I . The Med- drawing is-partly co lored-. IDtjlwp ooi St. 1854. Oct 27 IN? 2292. ASHTON’S SE5ECDE1CAHQN The Hied/ drocwia# fcr -parti} colored/. Londoit Pr-intedbjGeorge Edward Eyre andWiiiiAM Spoitiswoode Printers to ttie Queenls most Excellent Majesty. 1855.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY or ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N°2293. Construction of Fire-proof Buildings, &c. LETTERS PATENT to William Bout-land Wilkinson, of the Town and County of Newcastle-on-Tyne, Plasterer and Manufacturer of Artificial • Stones, for the Invention of “ Improvements in the Construction of Piee-feoof Dwellings, Warehouses, and other Buildings, or Parts of THE SAME.” Sealed the 3rd April 1855, and dated the 27th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said William Boutland Wil- kinson at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 27th October 1854. I, William Boutland Wilkinson, of the Town & County of Newcastle- 5 on-Tyne, Plasterer and Manufacturer of Artificial Stones, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in the Construction of Fire-proof Dwellings, Warehouses, and other Buildings, or Parts of the same," to be as follows:— This Invention relates to an improved construction of the floors, ceilings, 10 roofs, and staircases of buildings, whereby such buildings will be rendered fire-proof. The walls of the building are carried up from the foundation to the height of the spring of the concrete arch; a centreing of sufficient strength is then to be firmly fixed over the whole area of first floor, and boarded close with narrow 15 strips; the composition to form the ceiling and floor is composed of crushed2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2293. Provisional Specification. Wilkinson sImprovements in the Construction of Fire-proof , <$r. bricks, metallic scoria, or other hard substances, (which, however, must be free from soil or other extraneous substances,) and good Portland cement, or other cement of equal quality, in the proportion of three parts of crushed hard-burnt bricks and scoria, passed through a riddle of 2-incli mesh, and one part of hammer-broken stones or bricks, or other hard material,- broken about the size of an egg, and one part of the same material hammer-broken to about the size of £ brick; the whole is then well incorporated; the parts of 2-inch scoria are mixed with water first, and two parts of coarser material are added, the whole being well worked together to cause perfect adhesion. The material so mixed is then to be thrown upon the centring, and beaten in solid, the coarser portions in the haunches and the finer towards the crown, where the larger portions of the broken bricks, &e. (in consequence of the thickness being so much less than at the haunches) would not so conveniently lay down. IIoop iron on edge is laid across the crown about 2 feet apart, or at greater or less distances, according to the desired strength of the, floor, and reaching its full length across the floor or floors; ,the under edge of the same is set on the crown of centring, or nearly so, so that in this low position it may act with the more power as a tension rod to the floor; the concrete is filled up'to the desired level and trowelled smooth, adding a little finer material as a finishing, while the mass is yet moist. Where a wood floor is desired as a means of supposed additional comfort; strips of wood may be imbedded or dovetailed in the concrete, to which the boards can be nailed. When the first floor has been formed, it must be pro- tected from injury by being covereved with thin deals, laid on a stratum of sifted sand., which will assist in keeping the concrete moist for a longer period than if exposed to the free action of the air, slow drying adding much to its strength. The walls of the n.ext story are then proceeded with to the level of the spring of the arches of the next floor and ceiling, the same process in the formation of which being carried out as herein-before described, and so on to the roof, which may be formed in the same way, giving it sufficient rise in the middle to throw off the wet into a channel or gutter at the front and back; or, if preferred, a slated roof can be put on the top in the usual way; the ceiling of the upper story being of concrete, will effectually prevent the roof, if of timber and slate, from taking fire, should the furniture or other combustible matter in the rooms below be consumed. When the centring has been with- drawn, all that is required will be a setting coat, the arched form being capable of as much elabox*ate decoration as a flat surface. The walls of the building must be carefully built to prevent unequal settlement. The . floors formed in 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Provisional Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2293. 3 'Wilkinsons Improvements in the Construction of Fire-proof Dwellings, $c. this way, being rigid and unyielding, will allow brick partitions to be set on them in positions which a wooden floor would not admit; or partitions formed in a peculiar way, herein-after explained, may be used. The stairs may be of stone, of the same material as the floors, which will be considerably cheaper 5 and as good. The skirtings, architraves, &c. may be of Pariah, Keene’s, or Martin s cement; there will thus be nothing consumable but doors and win- dows, and a fire originating in one apartment could scarcely extend to an adjoining one. For warehouses the arch and supporting walls are made of additional strength. In ordinary buildings with wood floors it is proposed to 10 form partitions, in lieu of ordinary lath and plaster, of Paris plaster alone, cast in a cellular form and fixed together, which requires no plastering, and may be fixed on an ordinary wooden floor without a support underneath. For this purpose the plaster of Paris is cast into celluUfr blocks, about 4 feet long, 21 inches wide, and 4^ inches thick, and are to be bedded as soon as cast in 15 the place intended to receive them with guaged putty and plaster, the floor being previously prepared to receive them by having a strip of wood nailed on in the direction of the length of the partition, to fit the groove loosely in the plaster block when one course is laid. The workman must now cut a block in two parts, and commence another course from one end with one of the halves, 20 and then follow up the course with whole blocks, which will thus break joint with the lower course. The door frames are to have a lath nailed up the side, and the workman will with a hand-saw and chisel form a groove in the ends of the block to fit against it; in the same way he must proceed until he reaches the top, taking care to set the blocks flush with each other on the face, which 25 is afterwards to be dressed up with steel scrapers, which will prepare the surface to receive the paper or paint. The longitudinal cells are admirably adapted for the insertion of plugs for paintings, and may be used for ventila- tion ; they also, afford facilities for the introduction of pipes for gas and bell wires. The skirting can be afterwards formed in cement or wood, or may be 30 cast on the blocks. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said William Boutland Wilkinson in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 26th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, William 35-Boutland Wilkinson, of the Town and County of Newcastle-on-Tyne, Plasterer and Manufacturer of Artificial Stones, send greeting.4 Specification. A.D. 1854.—N“ 2293. Wilkinsons Improvements in the Construction of Fire-proof WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-seventh day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said William Boutland Wilkinson, Her special license that I, the said William 5 Boutland Wilkinson, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as T, the said William Boutland Wilkinson, my executors, administrators^ or assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time .and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great 10 Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ImPEOVEI,TEXTS in THE CoiTSTSUCTIOK OP FlRS-PBOO? DwEILIKSS, WAREHOUSES, . Arm othee Buiidihgs, oe Pasts op the sake,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said William Boutland Wilkinson, by an instrument in- writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain 15 the nature of the said Invention, and in .w'hat manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. ' NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said William Boutland Wilkinson, do hereby 20 declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement, reference being had to the accompanying Drawings and to the letters and figures marked thereon, that is to say:—. My said Invention relates to an improved construction or constructions of 25 the floors, ceilings, roofs, partition wails, and staircases of buildings, whereby such buildings will be rendered fire proof, at a much cheaper and economical rate than can be accomplished by any of the existing methods. And in order that my said Invention may be more properly, I shall now proceed to describe and refer to the several Figures on the Sheet of Drawings 30 hereunto annexed. Figure 1 on Sheet 1 of my Drawings represents a longitudinal section of a portion of a warehouse, constructed according to my Invention, so as to be rendered fire-proof; Figure 2 is a corresponding transverse section of the same ; Figure 3 is a detail section, taken through the line 1, 2, in Figure 1; 35 and Figure 4 is a similar Section, taken along the line 3, 4, in the same Figure. In constructing the floors of dwelling houses or warehouses, formed during . the progress of the building with ceilings of an arched form, the walls A ofSpecification. 5 A.B. 1854.—N° 2293. Wilkinson’s Improvements in the Construction of Fire-proof Divellings, y MaJby So SonsLIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D .1854. Oct. 27 .^T° 2293. mLUPTSO^TS SEE CIETCAITON. (2 SHEETS) SHEET 2. FIC. 1. FIC. 2. Tlie'SIed/dreavinjg London: ftratedly George EdwardEyne andWituAM Spqtuswoqde, 1 rintcrs to the QucerismostExcclfcat Majesty. 1855. " J' . f- ' -v | , 1 FIC.3. FIC. 4. | - ' Drawnon Stonety Maltyh Sons. - :J 1 ; , ^_____________________________________________________________________________^-------------—---------------------LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2294. Introducing Strips of Wrought Iron into Metal Castings. ( This Invention received Provisioned Protection, but notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent was not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by Henry Adcock at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 28th October 1854. I, Henry Adcock, of London, Civil Engineer, do hereby declare the nature 5 of the Invention for “ Improvements in Strengthening Castings op Iron and other Metals ” to be as follows:— This Invention consists of introducing rods or strips of wrought iron into cast iron and other metals. The rods or strips of wrought iron are arranged longitudinally and transversely across the moulds representing the objects to 10 be cast, prior to pouring into such moulds the liquid metal of which the castings are to be made. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 . ..........N° 2295. Machinery for Cutting Metals. LETTERS PATENT to Jabez Morgan, of Kidderminster, in the County of Worcester, Engineer, for the Invention of “Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Cutting Metals.” Sealed the 12th January 1855, and dated the 28th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Jabez Morgan at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 28th October 1854. I, Jabez Morgan, of Kidderminster, in the County of Worcester, Engineer, 5 do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improvements in Machinery or Apparatus for Cutting Metals ” to be as follows:— , This Invention relates to certain improved constructions and arrangements of shears for cutting or severing boiler and other metal plates, whereby a greater nicety of cut is obtained, and the cutting mechanism rendered more 10 simple than that hitherto employed. The upper shear or blade works on a fixed centre at one end of the blade, such working centre being above the cutting edge. The blade is fitted at one end upon a screwed spindle, which works through a fixed portion of the standard, and is so arranged, that by unscrewing slightly 15 the spindle, forming the working centre of the blade, the latter with the “ steeling ” will be brought close up against the lower “ steeling,” thereby2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2295. Provisional Specification. Morgans Improvements in Machinery for Cutting Metals. rendering tlie machine more accurate in its work. When adjusted, the spindle is tightened up by a screw nut, and either a cotter or wedge may be also employed to adjust the blade, either passing through the spindle, which in this case is not screwed in the standard. The free end of the blade works in a fixed guide or groove, and is also tightened up by a metal strip and adjusting screw. An eccentric or crank is employed for actuating the blade, such eccentric or crank working in a slot or recess in the blade. The shaft which carries the eccentric, cam, or crank is entirely out of the way of the plates when being put through the machine; it is carried inside one of the end standards, and works at right angles to the blade, the eccentric cam, or crank, being at the end of the shaft. Another improvement consists in the application of a table moveable at pleasure, actuated behind the lower “ steeling,” for the purpose of supporting the plate or scraps when a long length is being passed through the machine. This table may be removed when short pieces are to be cut to allow them to fall in a heap behind the machine, and afterwards removed in the ordinary manner. Another improvement consists in the employment of a guage pin behind the “ steelings,” and fitted to a fixed part of the standards. This guage is adjusted to guage any width, and enables a perfectly straight cut to be effected. Another improvement consists in cutting out or recessing the end standards of the machine, whereby a plate of any length may be cut by simply passing it through the machine, the recesses before referred to admitting of such plate being passed under the blade. In place of two standards being employed, one only may be used for carrying the working centre of the blade, and the actuating cam, eccentric, or crank and its shaft being carried by a double bracket cast on the one standard. By a modification of the herein-before described arrangement, the blade is made to work in vertical slides on the front or insides of the end standards, and is actuated by eccentrics, cams, or cranks below the cutting edge, such eccentric, cam, or crank being made to work in slots or recesses in the bottom of a vertical frame, forming one piece with the blade. This frame may either be outside or inside the main standards. The table and guage herein-before described are also applied in the last-described arrange- ment, and the standards are also cut away to admit of a plate being passed through the machine lengthwise of the blade. 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification^ A.D. 1854.—N° 2295. 3 Morgan's Improvements in Machinery for Cutting Metals. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Jabez Morgan in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 27th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Jabez 5 Morgan, of Kidderminster, in the County of Worcester, Engineer, send greeting. WHEBEAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-eighth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of 10 Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Jabez Morgan, Her special license that I, the said Jabez Morgan, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the . said Jabez Morgan, my executors, administrators, or assigns, should at-any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter 15 during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ Improvements in Machinery os Apparatus for Cutting Metals,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, the said Jabez Morgan, by an instrument in writing under iny 20 hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Jabez Morgan, do hereby declare 25 the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be per- formed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following- statement, reference being had to the accompanying Drawings, and to the letters and figures marked thereon, that is to say:— My said Invention relates to certain improved constructions and arrange- 30 ments of shears for cutting or severing boiler and other metal plates, whereby a greater nicety of cut is obtained, and the cutting mechanism rendered more simple than that hitherto employed for this purpose. The upper shear or blade works on a fixed centre at one end of the blade, such working centre being- placed above the cutting edge. The blade is fitted at one end upon a screwed 35 spindle, which works through a fixed portion of the standard, and is so arranged, that by unscrewing slightly the spindle, forming the working centre of the blade, the latter with its “ steeling ” will be brought close up against the lower “ steeling,” thereby rendering the machine more accurate in its work. When4 A.D. 1854.---------N° 2295. Specification. Morgan's Improvements in Machinery for Cutting Metals. adjusted, the spindle is tightened up by a screw nut and cutter. A cutter or wedge may also be employed to adjust the blade, the cutter passing through the spindle, which in this case is not screwed in the standard. The free'end of the blade works in a fixed guide or groove, and is also tightened up by a metal strip and adjusting screws. An eccentric or crank is employed for actuating the blade, such eccentric or crank working in a slot or recess in the blade. The shaft which carries the eccentric, cam, or crank is entirely out of the way of the plates when being put through the machine; this shaft is carried inside one of the end standards, and works at right angles to the blade, the eccentric, cam or crank being at the end of such shaft. Another improvement consists in the application of a table moveable at pleasure, situated behind the lower “ steeling,” for the purpose of supporting the plate or scraps when a long length is being passed through the machine. This table may be removed when short pieces are to be cut, to allow them to fall in a heap behind the machine, and afterwards removed in the ordinary manner. Another improvement consists in the employment of a guage piece behind the “steelings,” and fitted to a fixed part of the standards. This guage is adjustable to guage any width, and enables a perfectly straight cut to be effected. Another improvement consists in cutting out or recessing the end standards of the machine, whereby a plate of any length may be cut by simply passing it through the machine, the recesses before referred' to admitting of such plate being passed under the blade. By a modification of the herein-before described arrangement, the blade is made to work in vertical slides on the front or insides of the end standards, and is actuated by eccentrics, cams, or cranks below the cutting edge, such eccentrics, cams, or cranks being made to work in slots or recesses in the bottom of a vertical frame, forming one piece with the blade. This frame may either be outside or inside the main standards. The table and guage herein-before described are also applied in this last-described arrangement, and the standards are also cut away to admit of a plate being passed through the machine lengthwise of the blade. And in order that my said Invention may be more readily understood, I shall now proceed to describe the several Figures on the Sheets of Drawings hereunto annexed. Figure 1 on Sheet 1 of the Drawings represents a front elevation of one modification of a shearing machine; Figure 2 is a corresponding side elevation of the same; Figure 3 is a plan of the machine; and Figure 4 is a horizontal 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—-N® 2295. Morgans Improvements in Machinery for Cutting Metals. 5 section, with the upper blade removed. A is a cast-iron framing or standard, cast in one piece, and formed with openings or recesses B, B, at each side, for the purpose of admitting of the plate to be cut being passed through the machine. A strong boss C is cast on one side of the standard or framing, and through this boss is passed the pin or spindle I), which serves as the working centre of the upper blade E. This spindle may be fixed and tightened up to any extent by means of the cutters F, one being passed through the spindle D at each end, and a third one through the boss C and the centre of the spindle. By this arrangement it is obvious that the upper blade may be adjusted with the greatest facility in relation to the lower cutting edge or “ steeling ” G, which is screwed to the inner face of the front plate of the framing, the upper edge of such plate being recessed slightly to present a firm and steady bearing or support to the “ steeling.” The lower edge of the upper blade is similarly recessed to receive the upper “ steeling H, which is also secured by screws, as shewn in the Drawings, the heads next the cutting sides of both steelings being countersunk. The free end of the upper or working blade is guided and kept close up against the face plate I, cast on the standards, by means of the plate J and adjusting or tightening bolts K, K, which pass through the standards and through curved slots L in the blade, and finally protrude through the plate J, where they are secured by nuts, as shewn in the Drawings. The upper blade is actuated by an eccentric M, which is cast on the end of the driving shaft N, and works in a slot or recess 0, formed in the body of the blade. The shaft N works in suitable plummer blocks P, P, cast on the inside of the framing, and has keyed on to it at one end the spur wheel Q,,which is driven by the pinion R, fast on the main driving shaft S. In order to support the plate or portion which is being severed while passing through the machine, a table T is placed behind the lower steeling, and is supported at its ends by resting upon the recessed portion of the framing. This table is represented more clearly in the horizontal section, Figure 4, which shews also the adjustable guage U, for regulating the width of strip to be cut off. This guage is com- posed of a bar or plate of cast or wrought iron, supported near its ends upon the screw spindles or studs Y, Y, which are fixed into the lugs W, W, bolted to the inner sides of the standards. The adjustment of the guage bar or plate may be effected by nuts, as shewn, or by cutters, as herein-before described with reference to the mode of adjusting the working centre D of the blade. When short scraps are to be cut the table T is removed, and the scraps then fall down in a heap on the bottom of the machine, whence they are subsequently removed. The whole machine is bolted down on to a firm ■ foundation by long bolts and nuts at X, X.6 A.D. 1854.—N° 2295. Specification. Morgans Improvements in Machinery for Cutting Metals. Figure 1 on Sheet 2 of my Drawings represents a longitudinal vertical section of another modification of shearing machine, the front or face plate being removed, for the purpose of shewing more clearly the arrangement for actuating the working blade. Figure 2 is a corresponding transverse vertical section of the same, taken near the centre thereof; and Figure 3 is a sectional 5 plan of the machine. The framing A is cast in two pieces, and is recessed at the ends at B, B, as herein-before described with reference to Sheet 1 of my Drawings. The lower steeling C is also secured in the manner herein-before described to the face or front plate of the framing. The upper plate D with its steeling E works in slides at F, formed in the face of the machine framing. 10 This blade is cast in one one piece with the rib G and open cam or eccentric chamber H, in w’hich chamber works a pair of cams or eccentrics I, I, fast on the main driving shaft J. This shaft may be the driving shaft of a set of rolling mills, the shearing machine being placed at one end of the set of mills, and the eccentrics I, I, fitted on to the end of the driving shaft. This shaft works 15 in bearings K, K, fitted into the front and back plates of the framing, a square boss L being cast thereon at those parts for the purpose of uniting the two halves of the frame, which is effected by two strong bolts passed trans- versely through each boss, one above and the other below the bearing of the driving shaft, as is clearly shewn in Figure 2 of the Drawings. The rib or 20 framing G is guided in its vertical traverse by the upper and lower guide spindles M and N, the upper one M being cast on the top of the rib, and the lower one N cast on the under side of the cam chamber H. These two guide spindles work through bushes fitted between the two halves of the square bosses 0, cast on the top and bottom of the standard, and fastened together 25 by transverse bolts, as herein-before described. It will thus be obvious that when the driving shaft revolves, the eccentrics thereon will impart a vertical traverse to the upper blade, and effect the cut required. The moveable table, described with reference to the first-described machine, and lettered T therein, is also applied to this second machine, as well as the adjustable guage bar, 30 herein-before described and illustrated on Sheet 1. This bar is not shewn in the present machine, as it would be a mere copy of that shewn on Sheet 1. Figure 1 on Sheet 3 of my Drawings represents a front elevation of a modified arrangement of the machine, illustrated on Sheet 1 of the Drawings ; Figure 2 is a corresponding side or end elevation of the same; Figure 3 is a 35 plan of the machine; and Figures 4 and 5 represent respectively a detailed front elevation and vertical section of the upper blade detached. This arrange- ment differs from that illustrated on Sheet 1 of my Drawings, inasmuch as two actuating eccentrics A, A, are employed for working the blade B, suchSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2295. 7 Morgans Improvements in Machinery for Gutting Metals. blade having a perfectly vertical movement communicated to it in place of working on a fixed centre at one end, as herein-before described. The eccen- trics A, A, are cast on the ends of the shafts C, C, and work in two slots or recesses D, formed in the blade B. The shafts C work in suitable bearings 5 cast on to the inside of the standard or framing E, and are each fitted at their back ends with a spur wheel F; such wheels gear together and receive motion from the pinion G, fast on the driving shaft H. The upper blade works in the slides I, I, formed for that purpose in the face of the standard, and is kept therein by the cover plate J, which is bolted or screwed on to the front of the 10 standard. The arrangement and mode of fixing the upper and lower steeling K and L is precisely similar to that herein-before described with reference to Sheet 2 of the Drawings. The ends of the standard are cut out or recessed at M, in the manner and for the purpose also herein-before described. The move- able table & guage plate, shewn on Sheet 1 of my Drawings, are also represented 15 in Figure 2 on Sheet 3; they are applied in a similar manner to all these modifications, although I have not considered it necessary to repeat the same throughout all the Figures. By the arrangement last described, the blade B will have a vertical parallel motion communicated to it, each end of the blade ascending or descending simultaneously by the action of the eccentrics, as is 20 clearly shewn by the details, Figures 4 and 5. The adjustment of the working blades of the two arrangements, shewn in Sheets 2 and 3, may be effected by having suitable adjusting strips inside the front cover plates J, and tightened up either by screws or cutters. Having now described and particularly ascertained the nature of the said 25 Invention, and the manner in which the same is or may be used or carried into effect, I would observe, in conclusion, that I do not confine or restrict myself to the precise details or arrangements which I have had occasion to describe or refer to, as many variations may be made therefrom without deviating from the principles or main features of the said Invention; but 30 what I consider to be novel and original, and therefore claim as the Invention secured to me by the herein-before in part recited Letters Patent, is,— First, the general construction and arrangement of machinery or apparatus for cutting or shearing metal plates, as herein-before described and illustrated on Sheets 1 and 2 of my Drawings. 35 Second, the system or mode of actuating the cutting blades of shearing machines, by means of an eccentric or eccentrics working in an opening recess or chamber, formed either in the blade itself, or in a frame cast or otherwise connected to the blade, as herein-before described.8 A.D. 1854.—N” 2295. Specification. Morgans Improvements in Machinery for Cutting Metals. Third, the system or mode of adjusting the cutting edges of plate-shearing machines, as herein-before described. Fourth, the application and use of a moveable table in plate-shearing machines for supporting the severed portion of the plate, as herein-before described. Fifth, the application and use of adjustable guage bar or guide for guiding the plate during its traverse through the machine. Sixth, the application and use of plate-shearing machines with the sides of the standard cut away or recessed, to receive the plate and allow it to pass through the machine. In witness whereof, I, the said Jabez Morgan, have hereunto set my hand and seal, the Eighteenth day of April, One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. JABEZ MORGAN. (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by Geokge Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen's most Excellent Majesty. 1855.AJ). 1854. Oct. 28. N? 2285. MORGAN’S specification. (.3 SHEETS.) SHEET l. FIG. 2 FIC. I. FIG. 3 FIG . 4. The/ holed/ drwwiruj is partly colored/. Dr ami on Stone ~hy Malby 2c Sons. Load on: Piiptedby George Eijwakd Spoxtiswoode Printers to. the QuceiVsmo&t^ 1855.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF iuinoisAJ).1854<.0ctobeb_28.N? 2295. MORGAN’S SPECIFICATION. (3 SHEET SHEET 2. Thu Hied/ cbnmmp parity colored/. Lon don: PnintedfeyGeorge Edward Eyre mdVnxLAM. Spottiswoode , Pnnteis to die Queexijs most EiceEcnt Majesty. 1855. Drawn on Stone lyMnlly Sc Sons .library Of THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D .1854. OCT. 28;TST9 2295. AIORGAN’S SPECIFICATION. F I C . I ;■■■■ ' i W ■i * 4 ASHEETSJ SHEET 3. S£ F I G. 3 . I 3 3 € € □_______r r • ! n M A 1 1 . * H ! ! I 1 —rr [ J —uy- - 4 1 i 1 III III 1 1 1 -uj- 3 j. tv F I C . 4 -p. ;'.:iV. F I 0.5. The fttedy ctrcunrig is partly colored. Lon do n : Priated by George Ed^aixd £ Printers to die Queens most!? _ he£e andWnxT-AM Spottisvoode % E L^entMiyesty. 1855. ■ ■ Lx awn on Stone "byMalby So Sons.library OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2296. Writing Apparatus. (This Invention received Provisional Protection, lut notice to proceed with the application for Letters Patent um not given within the time prescribed by the Act.) PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by George Mumby at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 28th October 1854. I, George Mumby, of 9, Hunter Street, Brunswick Square, in the County of Middlesex, Mechanical Draughtsman, do hereby declare the nature of the 5 said Invention for “ Improvements in Reservoir Penholders and other Writing Apparatus ” to be as follows:— These improvements consist, firstly, in the application of a tube, composed of metal, glass, or any other suitable substance, of the shape required, and which by the use of an clastic or other material is made to fit accurately to the 10 lower end of a quill, metal, or elastic tube, for the purpose of directing the flow of ink to the pen whilst in use. This tube may also be made as a screw or otherwise, having one end formed as a stopper to prevent the ink escaping. Secondly, the application of the barrel of a quill as a reservoir for ink in combination with the tube above described, and the employing its elasticity to 15 keep up a constant supply of ink to the nip of the pen, thus enabling a person to write for several hours without the necessity of constantly dipping in or using an inkstand. Thirdly, the application of an elastic substance to the inside of a metal tube, having suitable openings made in it, and serving as a reservoir for ink, for2 A.D. 1854,—N° 2296. Provisional Specification. Mumby s Improvements in Reservoir Penholders cj* other Writing Apparatus. the purpose of supplying the pen (used in conjunction with the tube above mentioned) with ink when required; or this tube may be altogether formed of a suitable elastic material. The reservoir penholder is fitted for use by dropping ink in at the lower end of the quill or tube, (or upper, if required,) the small tube having been 5 previously removed. When about three parts full, fix the small reservoir tube in its place, and make it fit perfectly tight; and by pressing the quill or elastic tube by the forefinger or thumb, or by both, will cause the ink to flow to the pen when required. LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and "William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.D. 1854 ...........N° 2297. Revolving-breech. Fire-arms. LETTERS PATENT to Edward Lindner, of the City and State of New York, in the United States of America, for the Invention of “ Improve* MENTS IN RsVOLVING-BBEECH FlRE- ARMS AND MAGAZINE.” Sealed the 24th April 1855, and dated the 28th October 1854, PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Edward Lindner at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 28th October 1854. I, Edward Lindner, of the City of New York, in the United States of 5 America, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ Improve- ments in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine ” to be as follows:—• I construct my fire-arm with one barrel, either rifled or plain, and attach a chambered breech in an opening behind the barrel, so that the upper chamber in said breech shall coincide with the bore of the gun. This chambered breech 10 is fitted so that it can be revolved on a pipe, within which pipe is a sliding rod receiving its motion from the cock or hammer; so that as the hammer is cocked, a latch on said rod (moving in a slot in the pipe on which the chamber revolves) takes one of a series of spiral grooves around on the inside of the centre hole of said chambered breech, revolving the same sufficient to bring the next 15 chamber on the line of the barrel. The centre rod is prolonged through beneath the barrel, and fitted with guides, that allow the same to .slide endwise, and said rod passes between the barrel and a pipe that contains cartridges;2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2297. Provisional Specification,. Lindner s Improvements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. and a follower in said pipe, taken by latches on said sliding rod, forces each cartridge in succession back into the lower chamber of the revolving breech, whence it is brought around to be fired in turn. In order to explode the cartridge as it comes on to the line of the barrel (in consequence of cocking the piece as before described), I use a needle, set and moving in slides, with a 5 circular spring around it, and the back end of the needle projecting through. The cock is moved by the main spring, and discharged by the trigger as usual; but instead of the end striking a cap, as usual, I fit a small latch, to move on a centre crosswise of the hammer, which as the hammer is discharged, takes the rear end of the needle, forcing the same into the cartridge, exploding a per- 10 cussion pill contained in said cartridge, and a fixed cam lifts the end of this latch as the needle gets fully home, allowing the said needle to be thrown back by its spring, so as not to get heated by the explosion. In order to use caps when desired with this fire-arm, I fill an annular groove with said percussion caps, and have the same so attached to the gun that the 15 end cap in said ring is on the line of the nipple and barrel, and as the slide which is attached to the hammer comes up on firing the piece, it carries said cap out of the ring on to the nipple, and explodes the same, firing the piece. Two, three, or more tubes containing cartridges may be applied beneath and around the barrel, each of which has its cartridges emptied successively into 20 the breech as the same is revolved by firing the piece, and a cartridge box may be constructed of a series of tubes to be emptied into said pipes to replenish the same. My claims are, to the means for rotating the chambered breech ; to the means for supplying cartridges to the rotating breech out of a pipe or pipes; to the means for firing said cartridge when on the line of the barrel by 25 the needle, actuated as described, or by percussion caps, as specified; also to a cartridge box of pipes to supply those attached to the bari'el; and also to a knife in the inside of each chamber to pierce and cut the end of the cartridge, so that it can be exploded; and to a peculiar rammer which may be used to force home the ball into the chamber. ., . 30 SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed by the said Edward Lindner in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 28th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Edward"* Lindner, of the City and State of New York, in the United States of 35 America, send greeting.Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2297. 3 Lindner s Improvements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letteis Patent, bearing date the Twenty-eighth day of October, in tbe year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto 5 me, the said Edward Lindner, Her special licence that I, the said Edward Lindner, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Edward Lindner, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might 10 mate, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “Im- provements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine,” upon the con- dition (amongst others) that I, the said Edward Lindner, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should particularly describe and ascertain 15 the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Edward Lindner, do hereby declare 20 the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement thereof, reference being had to the Drawings hereunto annexed, that is to say:— The nature of my Invention consists in providing below the gun barrel an 25 extra charge barrel, which according to its length contains from thirty to fifty cartridges. Between the gun and charge barrel is a rack, in connection with a piston or slide, which acts upon the cartridges, and which said rack is again in connection with the gun lock, in such a manner, that each time the gun is fired off, one of the cartridges is forced into a revolving breech piece, by which means 30 the whole amount of cartridges contained in the charge barrel can be fired off in the shortest possible time. The revolving breech piece is turned round each time the gun is cocked one-sixth part by a mechanism applied to the inside of the same. The percussion caps are brought exactly opposite the nipple by an arrangement of springs, and are put on the same by the hammer itself at 35 the moment the gun is fired off, while the fired-off caps are thrown off from the nipple when the gun is cocked. The needle lock is so arranged, that the needle, after having entered the cartridge sufficiently far to ignite the priming, springs Suddenly back, by which arrangement any heating of the needle is effectually prevented, and the application of a revolving breech piece is permitted.4 A.D. 1854.—N° 2297. Specification. Lindner s Improvements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. Figure 1 of the Drawings annexed is an outside view of the gun; Figure 2 is a longitudinal section of the gun adapted to the needle lock; Figure 3 is an outside view of the same; Figure 4 is a longitudinal section of a gun with the percussion-cap lock; Figure 5 is a top view of the same, shewing the ramming hammer; Figure 19 is a cross section and part of a side view of a gun or pistol with five charge barrels ; Figure 20 is a view of a round rack for guns or pistols where several charge barrels are used; Figure 21 is a section and outside view of a cartridge box particularly adapted to this gun. All other Figures are views and sections of several parts of this gun, &c., and will be more particularly mentioned in the following description :—A is the barrel of the gun, which is screwed to the frame C at its after end in such a manner that its bore cor- responds exactly with the openings in the revolving breech piece D. B is the cartridge or charge barrel, which is likewise fastened to the frame C. The same is made of very thin metal, and is provided with two slots h, h, (Figures 9, 10, 19,) running very nearly the whole length, and in which the slide or feeder W is guided. On the lower side of this barrel are cut teeth of the same number and distance apart as the teeth on the rack E. The two barrels A and B are connected together by the side plates m, m, (Figure 17,) between which the rack E is situated, provision being made in the plates m, m, for the flat keys Jc, Jc, by which the rack E is guided (Figure 2). C is the frame to which the barrels are attached, and within which the revolving breech piece, the gun lock, springs, &c. are situated, (Figures 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5.) If made for the percussion-cap lock, the same is provided with two projections cm. This frame has two prolonged sides, by which the whole is fastened with screws to the wooden butt end of the gun. One of these side plates is made with a joint for the purpose of facilitating access to the lock. D is the revolving breech piece, provided with six holes u, u,u, and ground into the frame C perfectly tight. For the needle lock, (Figures 12, 18,) the holes u are not quite bored through, and are somewhat countersunk towards the gun barrel, and smallei hoies aie at the back bored through to allow a free entrance for the needle, as snewn at e, e, e, c, (Figure 18). At the after side are likewise six tapering recesses c, in which the pin d, provided with a spring, fits, (Figure 2,) and by which the revolving breech piece D is held fast in one position. On tne knee piece II is funny attached a stop pin (j. which enters the lower hole & of the breech piece D, holding the same stationary while the needle enters the upper hole e in the same to discharge the gun. The revolving breech piece D, adapted for the percussion-cap lock is represented in Figures 4, 7, and 8. x igure 7 shews a section on the line I. and II. of Figure 4 ; and Figuie 8 is a back view of the same. I, l, l, l, l, l, are six nipples (Figure 26), screwed into 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification. A.D. 1854.—N° 2297 s Lindners Improvements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. the back end of the same (Figure 4). n, n, n, are recesses, into which the stop pin o (Figures 4 and 5) fits, to hold the breech piece in its position. In the centre of the breech piece a hole is bored out (Figure 13), in which six spiral grooves pl are cut, for the purpose of turning the breech piece from the inside 5 by means of the piece p (Figures 2, 4, 13). q (Figure 13) is a recess, sharply turned in, where the grooves p1 terminate, for the purpose of allowing the piece p to drop after having passed through the spiral grooves pl. F is a hollow pin screwed in the frame C, and upon which the revolving breech piece is carried and allowed to turn. The same is bored out sufficiently large to allow 10 the piece G to pass through it easily, and is provided with two slots r and s (Figure 14), large enough to allow the piece to move in the same. E is the rack (Figure 24), situated between the gun barrel A and the cartridge barrel B. This rack has the same number of teeth as the number of charges for which the cartridge barrel is arranged, and these teeth are exactly the same length or 15 distance apart as the length of one cartridge. Towards the middle and near the forward end is made a slot K1, in which the key K is fitted, and through which the rack E is guided. vis a square hole, through which the square bolt w passes, and which through the motion of the rack is carried back and forward with the same. To the after end of the rack E is attached the round 20 rod G, which passes through the bolt F, as before described. In this i*od G is let in the piece p, so that the same can move around a pin fast through G, and the end is bored out from the rack E up to the point where the piece p is attached. Behind the piece pis a spring, which is let into the rod G in such a manner that it presses upon the lower projection of the piece p, thereby 25 forcing the same always upwards. In the bored-out part of the rod G is a turned rod z, provided with a small spiral spring. The after end of this rod 2 fits into the recesses of the piece p, and the forward end is provided with a cross pin z\ which is held fast during part of the time the rack E with the rod G is moving, and thereby compresses the spiral spring around the rod 2, so 30 as to give the latter a small motion when released. On the after end of the rod G is attached the knee piece H, having teeth cut on it, and provided with a slot h\ -into which the key c1 is fitted, and by which it is guided and made to move parallel when moved by the segment K. W is the feeder, which slides in the cartridge barrel (Figures 2, 16, 17, and 19), and is made to 35 press upon the charges by the rack E. The feeder is made round to fit into the cartridge barrel, with flat projecting pieces 1 and 2, which fit into the slots h, h, of the same, and by which the piston is guided. Through these projecting pieces 1 and 2 the pin s1 passes, the upper end of which fits the teeth of the rack E, and the lower end receives a small head r1. The pin s1 is6 A.D. 1854.-----------N° 2297. Specification. Lindner sImprovements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. provided with a spiral spring, to press the same always against the rack E and into the teeth. To prevent the piston from moving while the rack E makes the backward motion, a small spring a1 is attached to the head r1, which falls into the teeth made at the lower side of the cartridge barrel B. Figure 16 represents a section at the lines XIII. and XIY. of the piston W, shewing a small spring t\ which is placed around the groove of the piston, Figure 2, for the purpose of keeping the same steady in the cartridge barrel B. Figure 17 represents a section at the lines XV. and XVI., shewing the gun barrel A, the cartridge barrel B, the feeder W, in connection with the rack E, as well as the connecting side plates m, m, and key K, by which latter the rack E is guided, as has before been described. K is a segment fast on the pin J, Figures 2, 3, 4, and 5,) and by which the knee piece H is worked. Upon the pin J is fastened the cock L. On the segment K is attached the link o\ through which a communication is made with the same, and consequently with the cock L and the main spring 0, as well as with the catch P and the notch W1, when the gun is cocked. Q, is the trigger for firing off the gun; M is the needle box, screwed to the frame C, and in which the needle / with the needle carrier N moves and is guided; this box has a cover g\ screwed on for the purpose of putting in or taking out the needle and carrier. The needle carrier has a collar a111, against which a spiral spring acts; the other end of which spring presses against the box R in such a manner as to keep the needle with the carrier always out of the revolving breech piece D except when forced in by the action of the hammer L. R is an air box, fitted tight against the back face of the revolving breech piece D, and pressed against the same through the above-mentioned spring, and by which air box the opening e is closed up tight. If the gun is made with the needle lock, Figures 2 and 3, then a joint l1 (Fig. 15) is made to the segment K, to which the cross pin n1 is jointed, upon w'hich the spring m1 acts. This cross piece n1 acts upon the needle carrier N when the gun is fired off, forcing the same and consequently the needle into the charge. S is an inclined surface, fast on one of the projecting sides of the frame C, for the purpose of lifting up the cross piece n1 after the same has pressed the needle carrier with the needle sufficiently far into the charge to ignite the priming, by which uplifting of the cross piece n1 the needle carrier will be at liberty to pass under the same when forced out by the spiral spring around the same, as before mentioned. If the gun is adapted for the percussion cap, the segment K is provided with a joint a\ to which the hammer T (Figures 4, 5) is connected. This hammer is provided with a joint l\ and is guided in the piece dn\ fast to the frame C, to ensure always a straight motion o is the stop bolt, by which the revolving 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification; A.D. 1854.—N° 2297. 7 Lindners Improvements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. breech piece is held stationary (Figures 4, 5). This stop bolt is provided with a spiral spring round the same, acting upon it in such a manner as to press said stop bolt o always against the back face of the breech piece, and in the recesses n, n, thereon (Figure 8). On the outside of the stop bolt o is attached 5 the small bell erank e\ turning upon the pin /, fast to the side plate of the frame C. g1 is a spring bolt, fast to the rod G, and so arranged that by the cocking of the gun, the spring bolt passes under the bell crank e1 without communicating any action to the same; while, when the gun is fired off, the spring bolt g1 comes in contact with the lower part of the bell crank e1, and 10 acts through the same on the stop bolt o, pressing the same out of the recesses n, n, and thereby allowing the revolving breech piece to be turned. Figure 6 represents the percussion-cap chamber, and the manner of feeding the caps in section at the line V., YI. U is the percussion-cap chamber, which is placed right behind the breech piece D, between the frames C (Figures 4, 5), and is 15 formed of two plates u\ u1, with raised circular ribs, forming a groove wide enough for the caps. The two plates have a space between their raised ribs, all around to allow the feeding spring x1 and its handle xu to pass through. At the centre they are held together by a hollow hub, which fits upon a hollow pivot (Figure 14). The groove for receiving the caps is circular, £0 pointing towards tbe centre, and terminating in front of the nipple l and the hammer T, where the two plates u1,u1, are perforated, a11, c11, d11, is a little bell lever with its fulcrum at c11. The point a11 of the same passes into the feeding groove, and is forced into it by a spring bn; its other end dn bears against the revolving breech piece D, and extends far enough down to come 25 in contact with the nipples l, l, (Figure 6), when the revolving breech piece D turns. The outer end of the feeding groove is provided with a spring valve d1, to allow it to be opened when the cap chamber is to be filled with caps. Next to this valve d1 there is a recess e11 provided for the fired-off caps. / is a hole through which the stop pin o with its spring and case passes; X (Figures 4 30 and 6) is a spring, which serves to clear the nipples l, l, of the remainder of the caps, and is made of such a shape as to touch the nipples l, l, successively as they come to action, and by its elasticity to push off the fired cap, which falls then into the recess eu; X1 is the feeding spring; it is laid spirally around the hub of the cap chamber, to which it is fastened, and extends to the outside 35 of the case, where it terminates in a handle «u, which presses upon the caps. Figure 9 is a section on the line XV., XVI., representing the ramming hammer Y with its spring gn at the lower side of it; it passes through the frame C, and corresponds with the holes u in the breech piece D. It has its fulcrum at h11,in front of the frame C, and extends with one arm to G, and8 Specification.- A.D. 1854.—N" 2297. Lindner's Improvements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. with the other to the outside of the frame C; and this latter bears against a spring g11, which is secured to the frame C1 and forces out; a pin i11, placed at the side of G, moves y. An oblong hole z11 in the front part of the frame C\ communicating with the holes u in the breech piece Id, serves for the purpose of having access to the holes u when.they are to be cleaned. 1‘igt.ire 10 S represents a section on the line VII., VIII. Z is a spring case fastened below the gun barrel. It consists of two tubes z, one on each side of it; they contain two spiral springs (Figure 11), which are compressed by two plates &u, connected by a cross piece w, which passes through the rack. The two spring cases are provided with slots (Figure 11), in which the cross piece is 10 guided. The rack E moves between these spring cases, as shewn in Figure 10 ; in order to have access to these springs the cases are made of two halves hinged together. Figure 4 shews a section of the nipples, and the manner in which they are screwed into D. Figure 26 represents a single nipple with cutters. The nipples are hollowed out, and have grooves filed in crossways, la and a cutter in the shape of a cross, with sharp edges, inserted. The nipple is turned out or countersunk as much as possible, and provided with a thread and an incision, so as to admit of their being taken out easily by means of a screw-driver, and replaced through the cavity at e\ Figure 19 is a front and side view of a gun, calculated for fortifications, or whenever its greater weight 20 is no objection. It contains five charge barrels B1, each one being provided with a piston iv1; they have valves at their ends, and the one that is to be used first can be removed from its place, as it turns on hinges, in order to clean the revolving breech piece D. This mode of using more thanone charge barrel will be especially adapted for a short fire-arm, such as pistols of five 25 inches in length, which can easily fire from twenty to twenty-five times in succession. Figure .20 represents a rack E1, suitable for guns with more than one charge barrel. It differs from the one described above, in so far as it consists of a series of cones, turned on to a round rod, and filed flat at the side towards the gun barrel. This rack touches all the surrounding charge barrels, 30 and gears into each of the pistons w. All the rest of the. parts are the same as above. Figure 23 represents another manner of constructing the trigger for a percussion gun. It has instead of the gearing Iv a case K1, provided with a slot y11, which moves the piece G backwards and forwards by means of a screw #1; all the rest of the lock is the same as above described. This 35 trigger may be adopted for pistols where but few charges are to be moved; (it can be worked above as well as below.) The spring cases (Figure 20) are entirely done away with, as the spring o of the lock is sufficient to move the charges. Figures 2band 22 shew a rotary cartridge box, which contributesSpecification. A.D. 1854.—N“ 2297 9 Lindner's Improvements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. to make a repeating gun complete and perfect. It consists of six charge barrels ?nu, fastened to a round bottom plate n11, and surrounded by a circular case. Another circular plate of the same size is connected to the first one by a pin a11, upon which it can turn independently. This plate a11 is provided 5 with a nipple, which corresponds with all the charge barrels in the case, and through which the contents of them can be discharged. Figure 24 is a cartridge, with a paper or muslin case for round bullets, in which there is a cavity for the igniting fuse, in case it is to be used in needle locks. When used with percussion caps, the bottom of the cartridge must be covered with 10 thin skin. The gauze is tied round the bullet with the paper plate in front of the same, and must be carried away by the bullet when the gun is fired off. Figure 25 is a pointed bullet cartridge, calculated for the needle lock; the case is made of thin sheet copper, and pressed around and into the neck of the bullet, so as to make it tight. The end of the bullet does not terminate 15 in a perfect point, but in a cross, with sharp edges. Figure 27 is a copper case with a perforated bottom, which is to be covered in the inside with gauze. Figure 28 is a cartridge with a number of plates made out of felt, and con- nected by a rivet wn; it can be used either for the needle or percussion gun. In the Figures the needle gun is represented in a position ready to be fired 20 off, and the percussion gun in a position after being fired off. The use of the gun will be readily understood from the above description. In order to get a gun ready for firing, first take the feeder W out of the charge barrel (this is done by pressing against the bottom r1 and loosening s1 from the rack E), then put the cartridge box (Figure 21) with its nipple upon the mouth 25 of the charge barrel B (Figures 1, 2, 4), and empty as much of its contents into B as it will hold ; then replace the feeder W, so that the pin s1 can work in the rack E ; then cock the trigger L three times to let the charges enter the holes u in the breech piece D until the first one is opposite the gun barrel A; or else the first cartridge to begin with may be placed by hand into the breech 30 piece through the opening znof the frame C ; but this is only needed when all the charges are fired off, which is seldom the case. It would be advisable to leave three charges at least in the gun, and refil the charge barrel before firing again. Filling the barrel must always be done when the lock is in the position shewn in Figures 4 and 5 after being fired off. In order to fire off, 35 the trigger L must be pulled till P falls into the recess w\ which is so placed that the rack E is moved a little beyond the pin s\ to ensure the certain feeding of the feeder W. When L and K is moved on its fulcrum, the knee piece II gears into K, until G and E slide back, so that the pin s1 drops into the ;next tooth of E, and the two spiral springs in their cases are being10 Specification. A D. 1854.—N” 2297. Lindners Improvements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. depressed by cross piece wl and plates and held in that position till P is pulled out of w1 (Figures 2,4, 15). When E begins,, to move, p stands up- right in front of the spiral grooves p\ and enters one of them ; and as itself is prevented from turning by the slots rand s (Figure 14), it causes the breech piece D to turn one-sixth of a revolution. After this the motion of the breech 5 piece is completed; the pin gin the needle gun at H drops into the,hole e of the breech piece D, and holds it in this position (Figures 2 and 18). In the percussion-cap gun this is done by a pin o, Figure 4. When D has come to a stop, the rack E has not yet finished, its forward motion by one-eighth, and while E travels through the latter part of its motion, the 10 lower arm of p strikes at s (Figure 4), and causes p to turn on its fulcrum (Figure 13), and presses upon the pin Z and its spring until the recess of advances in the direction of Z, when Z drops into it, and holds p in this depressed position, so as to clear the spiral grooves p1 (Figures 2 and 13); at the same time the lower arm of pdepresses the spring attached to G. 15 After the gun is fired off, one charge is passed into the revolving breech piece by its backward motion; the pin zn strikes against the frame C, while G moves one-eighth further, and is removed from the recess in p, which causes the spring y to thrown back in its upright position, which operation is gone through every time the gun is cocked and discharged. The charges are 20 fed into the revolving breech piece by cocking and discharging, and D carries them successively in front of the opening of the barrel A. The description of the operations is the same in the needle lock as in the percussion-cap lock ; the two guns only differ in the mode of igniting the charges. The needle lock is represented in Figure 2; it operates as follows:—When the lock is 25 cocked as described above, the piece id (Figure 15) of the hinge P, attached to K, drops down in front of N, to which the needle is fastened; at the same time P drops into the recess of K ; when now Q, is touched, the needle/ darts into D, and ignites the charge. When the needle has advanced as far as possible, the piece rd comes in contact with the inclined plane s1 (Figures 2, 3, 30 15), which raises it up and frees N, and allows the spiral spring in M to throw the needle back. This operation is of great importance, as it successfully prevents the needle becoming heated, and at the Same time admits of a revolving motion in the breech piece D. As the spring in M bears upon a111, it becomes depressed, and forces the air box R in the frame C (Figure 2) 35 against the breech piece D, and causes a tight fit around the needle hole e, e. When the trigger L is pulled back, id slides on N, and drops down again at the end. When the cartridge shewn in Figure 25 is used, the- needle pushes the bullet first into the bore of the. barrel, which is a little smaller thanSpecification. 11 A.D. 1854.—N° 2297. Lindner sImprovements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. the bullet, and where it comes to a stop, and then the needle pierces into the charge; consequently the motion of the needle requires to be a little longer, or the air box R may be shorter. A gun with these water-tight cartridges will never miss, and is consequently of the greatest advantage for sea service, &c. 5 The gun for percussion caps is represented in Figure 4. The frame of the gun is a little longer, and provided with two projections c111, on the inner side of which D, and on the outer side the percussion cap chamber U, is placed, (Figure 6). Between D there is a space for the nipples l, l. Figure 4 shews the gun in a position after the charge has been fired off, where the hammer T 10 has entered the chamber U and touched the nipples l, l. The stop pin o is in its hole in the breech piece D (Figure 8). When now the trigger is pulled, p enters one of the spiral grooves p\ the spring piece g1 attached to G strikes the bell crank ex, which moves it back one-sixth around its fulcrum f, which draws the stop o from its recess n, and depresses its spiral spring; then p begins to 15 move D forward, and the spring piece g1 escapes below e, and leaves the spiral spring of o at liberty to expand, which causes o to bear against the back side of D (Figure 8). When now D has finished its motion, and another nipple l stands in front of the feeding hole in the chamber U, the corresponding recess u has arrived before o, and drops into it, and holds D steadily in its position. 20 While X) performs this one-sixth of a revolution, the hammer T is withdrawn from U, and the nipple l, which has just left the barrel A, is cleared of the remainder of the discharged percussion cap by the spring X, which pushes it off, and throws it into the cavity e11 (Figure 6). The percussion-cap chamber U, as described above, is placed between the frame C upon the hollow pin T, 25 which is provided with two slots for p. This chamber is so arranged that the spring forces the caps towards the hole through which they are fitted to the nipple l, l, by the hammer T. The lever a11, c11, d11, is intended to hold all caps back except the last one until the hammer has withdrawn from U, when the motion of D causes the next nipple l to strike against the arm 30 of the lever a11, c11, dn, at d11, which raises the point 11 off the caps, and allows the whole row of caps to slide on. As soon as the nipple l has left the arm at d11, the spring b forces the point of the lever in between the last cap and the last but one, and so stops the whole series of caps while it leaves the last one in front of the nipple. In this manner the spring will feed all caps except the 35 four last ones, when it strikes against a11; then the spring must be pulled back by its handle, the valve d opened, and the chamber refilled with caps, which can be done best by a separate percussion-cap box, of a similar con- struction to the chamber U. The action of the hammer T is easily understood. When it advances, it pushes the last cap upon the nipple, strikes it there, and12 A.D. 1854:.-------------N° 229^. Specification. Lindners Improvements in Revolving-hreeFire-arms and Magazine. ignites the charge. In order to give the hammer T a free and still a tight motion, there is a little hinge arranged at y, which springs and allows the hammer to go free. As the trigger L and K requires less motion for the per- cussion-cap locks than in the needle lock, its fulcrum may be placed a little above the centre when adapted for the former. Figure 9 represents the ramming hammer y; it serves to press the charge tight against the bottom of the nipple without striking it too hard. Its motion begins when D has come to a stop, and is caused by a pin in the last moment of the motion of G, when the spring gn is depressed; when G returns, the spring g11 withdraws the ramming hammer from D. Z11 is an opening in the frame, corresponding with win D, in order to have access to these holes when they are to be cleaned. The pistons with the cross cutters serve to open the bottom of the charges (Figures 25, 24), and to allow the powder oartly to enter the cavity in the plug, which causes the cartridge case to be drawn out with the bullet when the gun is fired off. The cross cutters may be adapted for every kind of gun or rifle intended to be used with cartridges, and will enable one to fire quicker, as the cartridges need not be opened before they are put into the barrel. The cutters are made of steel and hardened. Figure 19 is a gun with more than one charge barrel B; it may be used where it can be rested upon something while firing. By means of the round rack all the pistons can be moved one after the other. In order to use one of the charge barrels at the time, the pins s1 of all the barrels but one must be withdrawn from the teeth of the rack E. When all the charges of one barrel are used up, and the feeder V/1 has descended to the frame C, its pin s1 must be withdrawn from the rack, and the pins of one of the other feeders Wmust be let loose and brought into the teeth of the rack E, and so on, till all the charge barrels are used. In such a manner a gun may be made for two hundred charges, by having five barrels and forty charges in each of them. Figure 20 shews the round rack, made of steel. It is to have when used for pistols a round extension, by which it is guided in a staple fastened to the end of the barrel. Figures 21 and 22 shew the rotary cartridge box; a very convenient imple- ment to fill the charge barrels. In the moveable plate o11, a pin slides upon the plate nu till it drops into one of the holes ttu, where it holds the plate in such a manner that the nipple pn corresponds with one of the barrels mu, and all charges contained in this barrel can be emptied. Figure 27 shews an arrangement for using the percussion caps without the cross cutters of the nipples. The bore of the nipple is made the reverse of what 5 10 15 20 25 30 35Specification, A.D. 1854.—N° 2297. 13 Lindner sImprovements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. is shewn in Figure 26. It is wider at the point, where the cap is to be put on, and becomes smaller towards the bottom of the cartridge, so as to concentrate the flame originating from the igniting of the cap. Figure 28 shews a felt cartridge. These serve to, clean the gun barrel; ® they must be placed amongst the other charges, one to every twenty or forty, according to circumstances; they are made so that the dirt in the barrel finds a place between the felt plates. As the charges are ignited in the breech piece D, the gun barrel is not liable to get heated in great measure by the repeated firing. And having now described the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, I declare that what I claim as my Invention is as follows:— First, I claim the slanting incisions and the springs attached to B, near C, for the purpose of holding the last cartridge, and the two slots h, h, 15 and the construction of the feeder W worked by the rack E. I do not claim the cartridge barrel. Second, I claim the rack E placed between A and B in connection with the piece G and the piece p, with its up and down motion. Third, I claim the arrangement for turning the breech piece D, by operating 20 upon its centre hole, or the equivalent thereof.' Fourth, I claim the needle carrier with the joint at the upper end of the hammer, and the arrangement for drawing the needle directly after having ignited the charge, either by the spiral spring or any other means, in order to make the needle adapted for the revolving breech piece; but I do not 25 claim the needle. Fifth, I claim the air box R in connection with the spiral spring of the needle, to press the air box tight against the revolving breech piece when the needle strikes the charge. Sixth, I claim the knee piece II and the piece K, and the manner of moviug 30 the stop pin g, as described above. I claim the spring case Z with its two spiral springs (Figure 11) operating upon the rack E. Seventh, I claim the trigger with the curved groove case, as shewn in Figure 23, for the purpose of moving the rack E back and forward. Eighth, I claim the round rack, consisting of a series of cones for guns and 35 pistols with more than one cartridge barrel. Ninth, I claim the construction of the percussion-cap chamber at the back of the revolving breech, and the spring extending to the outside of the case and having a handle, and the manner of feeding the caps on the nipple l by the hammer before igniting the same.14 A.D. 1854.—N° 2297. Specification. Lindner s Improvements in Revolving-breech Fire-arms and Magazine. Tenth, I claim the spring K, or any equivalent means of removing the remainder of the discharged caps from the nipples while they are in motion. Eleventh, I claim the ramming hammer worked by the cocking of the trigger. . Twelfth, I claim the construction of the nipples to receive the percussion 5 caps, with the arrangement of cutters or points to open the bottom of the charges. And, thirteenth, I claim the construction of the rotary cartridge box. In witness whereof, I, the said Edward Lindner, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Third day of April, One thousand eight hundred 10 and fifty-five. EDWARD LINDNER. (l.s.) LONDON: Printed by George Edward Eyre and William Spottiswoode, Printers to the Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.A.3). 1854. Oct. 28 2,297. LINDNJER’ S See chicatiok . (1 SHEET) FIG. I. MU I j - j r-\E ■) s 1 I I m; \ i 1 ls§r fG i_ ,v jr* The filed; cbrccAiartg ~is -partly colored'. DmwnonStone by Malby h Sons. London: Pimteclby Gtzorge EdwakdEyre aud Viijjam. Sfottis^oodl , Printers to die Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855.LIBRARY OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2298. Apparatus for Testing Gold Coin and Weighing Postal Communications. LETTERS PATENT to Jean Pierre Savoure, of 2, Catherine Street, Strand, in the County of Middlesex, and 11, Rue de la Saunerie, Paris, in the Empire of France, for the Invention of “ Ah Improved Gold Coin Detector, APPLICABLE ALSO FOR WEIGHING POSTAL COMMUNICATIONS.” Sealed the 24th April 1855, and dated the 28th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Jean Pierre Savour6 at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 28th October 1854. I, Jean Pierre Savour£, of 2, Catherine Street, Strand, in the County of 5 Middlesex, and 11, Rue de la Saunerie, Paris, in the Empire of France, do hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ An Improved Gold Coin Detector, applicable also for Weighing Postal Communications,” to be as follows:— My improvements in coin detectors refer to an arrangement of balance, 10 whereby the operation of testing coin is simplified, and also to the adaptation of such balance to weighing postal communications. In balances commonly employed for testing gold coiu, the weight of the coin is determined by a distinct and separate act from that by which its size is ascertained, and conse- quently troublesome to perform; whereas, according to my improvements, the2 A.D. 1854,—N° 2298. Provisional Specification. Savoure's Improved Gold Coin Detector, <$[c. coin is placed in the slit or measure of its size, and is therein measured and weighed simultaneously. I employ a balance beam or lever, suitably supported at its fulcrum and by suitable guides; on the one end of this lever depends the weight, the counterpoise for the gold coins, while in the opposite end slits are cut horizontally through the lever at the proper distances from the fulcrum, 5 so that the same weight answers for all the coins to be weighed. The slits or measuring apertures are formed so that the genuine coin will just fit, and at the same time preponderate in the balance; whereas if the coin be spurious, the baser metals with which it would be alloyed being of less specific gravity than gold, it would be found either too large to pass through the slit or too light in the balance. In testing a coin, it is introduced about half its breadth through the slit, by which it is held in a horizontal position, where it is weighed; sub- sequently it is pushed entirely through the slit, when it drops on the other side completely tested. To adapt this balance for weighing postal communications, I render the counterpoise for the coins of a form to receive the letters to be weighed, and to the opposite end of the balance I hang a weight, which is to be slid to a position on the lever till it is on an equipoise with the letter. This weighted end of the lever being graduate according to the weights required, shows by the position of the sliding weight the weight of the letter. SPECIFICATION in pursuance of the conditions of the Letters Patent, filed 20 by the said Jean Pierre Savoure in the Great Seal Patent Office on the 27th April 1855. TO ALL TO WHOM THESE PRESENTS SHALL COME, I, Jean Pierre SavourS, of 2, Catherine Street, Strand, Middlesex, and 11, Rue de la Saunerie, Paris, France, send greeting. 25 WHEREAS Her most Excellent Majesty Queen Victoria, by Her Letters Patent, bearing date the Twenty-eighth day of October, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-four, in the eighteenth year of Her reign, did, for Herself, Her heirs and successors, give and grant unto me, the said Jean Pierre Savoure, Her special licence that I, the said Jean 30 Pierre Savoure, my executors, administrators, and assigns, or such others as I, the said Jean Pierre Savoure, my executors, administrators, and assigns, should at any time agree with, and no others, from time to time and at all times thereafter during the term therein expressed, should and lawfully might make, use, exercise, and vend, within the United Kingdom of Great Britain 35Specification. 3 A.D. 1854.—N° 2298. Savoure s Improved Gold Coin Detector, Qc. and Ireland, the Channel Islands, and Isle of Man, an Invention for “ An Improved Gold Coin Detector, applicable also for Weighing Postal Com- munications,” upon the condition (amongst others) that I, ti e said Jean Pierre Savoure, by an instrument in writing under my hand and seal, should 5 particularly describe and ascertain the nature of the said Invention, and in what manner the same was to be performed, and cause the same to be filed in the Great Seal Patent Office within six calendar months next and immediately after the date of the said Letters Patent. NOW KNOW YE, that I, the said Jean Pierre Savoure, do hereby 10 declare the nature of my said Invention, and in what manner the same is to be performed, to be particularly described and ascertained in and by the following statement:— The object of my Invention is to give a readier means and greater security than obtained by the weighing instruments hitherto used for ascertaining if 15 gold coins are genuine or counterfeit. The principle of my Invention consists in having a gauge for the weight, and one for the size of gold coins, both gauges acting simultaneously during the detecting operation. The construction of my gold coin detector will be more readily understood by referring to the annexed Drawings; in which Fig. 1 represents a longitu- 20 dinal elevation view of the entire machine; of which Fig. shows a side elevation view; whereas Fig. 3 is a top view of the beam or lever, repre- sented provided with a coin. In these three Figures the same letters refer to corresponding parts. The machine consists of a solid base A, provided with two vertical standards B and B'; the upper end of the standard B has a slot 25 C and two holes, forming the beds for two suspension knives of a weighing beam or lever D, of the kind called a Roman, the smaller arm E of which is provided with a scale or letter holder, whereas the end F of the long arm G moves up and down in the slot with which the upper end of the standard B1 is provided. In the height of this long arm G are cut longitudinal slots a, a\ a?, as, 30 at such distances from the suspension point J of the beam D, that when the gold coin to be weighed is laid in its corresponding slot (in the manner as is represented in Fig. 3), the arm G will descend, and the end F of the same come to rest on the under part of the slot of the standard B1, if the coin be a genuine one. The slots a, a1, a2, u®, are made of such length and height as to 35 correspond with the size of the gold coin intended to be weighed in this slot, in such manner that a genuine coin of this sort will fit, or rather just pass through, its corresponding slot; whereas a base or counterfeit coin of the same weight as the genuine one, being manufactured entirely or partly of a metal of less weight than gold, would consequently be of a larger size than the genuine4 A.D. ! 854.—N° 2298. Specification. Scivoure's Improved Gold fyc, _____________ coin, and not pass through the corresponding slot. On the contrary, should a counterfeit or base coin be exactly of the same size as the genuine correspond- ing coin, then, on being laid into the corresponding slot, this counterfeit coin being of less weight than the genuine one, would not cause the end F of the arm G to descend on the under part of the slot of the standard B1, which in this case would at once detect the fraud. These slots a, a\ a2, a3, serve conse- quently^ a gauge for the size of the coin, and for holding this latter during the action of weighing; and if, therefore, a coin would pass through in its corresponding slot, and on being laid into this slot cause the end F of the arm G to descend on the under part of the slot of the standard B\ then such a coin might easily be known as genuine; whereas on failing in one of these two points, the same might be declared counterfeit or altered. It will be under- stood that the sizes of the slots a, a\ a2, a3, and the distances at which the same are placed from the centre of suspension J of the beam D, varies according to the species of gold coins which are required to be detected by the machine. In order to make this latter serve at the same time as a balance for ascertain- ing the weight of letters, , a scale or letter holder is adapted to the short arm E of the beam D, and a small weight II may be suspended at the long arm G in small cuts h, h\ h2, at such distances from the centre of suspension J as will correspond with the weight desired to be indicated. Having thus described the nature of my Invention, and the manner in which the same is put into practical effect, I wish it to be understood that what I claim as my Invention consists in,— Firstly, the construction of machines for detecting counterfeit or altered gold coins, by which the size and the weight of these latter may be gauged simultaneously. Secondly, the general arrangement of the gold coin detector here above described, and serving at the same time as a letter weigher. In witness whereof, I, the said Jean Pierre Savoure, have hereunto set my hand and seal, this Twenty-sixth day of April, in the year of our Lord One thousand eight hundred and fifty-five. J. P. SAVOURE; (l.s.) Witness, Geo. White. LONDON: Printed by Georoe Edward Eyre and William Spottiswdode, Printers to tne Queen’s most Excellent Majesty. 1855. 5 10 15 20 25 30A.I). 1854. October. 2 8.M 2298. SAAO TIRE'S Specification. V V ■ r gj i v □ . & F f C . i v/3 s~\ JB . JL * y. l' FI C . 3 . >; the/fdeci drawing is-riot coloreds. London: Matedby Geokgk Edward Exius and Wiixiam SpottiswoodL , Printers to the Queens most Excellent Majesty. 1855. (1 SHEET.) ■ . , *•< ' | Drawn on. Stone DyMaJbr.ScSqiis.library OF THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISA.D. 1854 N° 2299. Preventing Collisions at Sea, &c. LETTERS PATENT to Charles Blake, of Saint Leonards, in the County of Sussex, Painter, for the Invention of “ A Method of Preventing or Lessening the Injurious Effects arising from Collisions at Sea and on other Navigable Waters.” Sealed the 3rd April 1855, and dated the 28th October 1854. PROVISIONAL SPECIFICATION left by the said Charles Blake at the Office of the Commissioners of Patents, with his Petition, on the 28th October 1854. I, Charles Blake, of Saint Leonards, in the County of Sussex, Painter, do 5 hereby declare the nature of the said Invention for “ A Method of Preventing or Lessening the Injurious Effects arising from Collisions at Sea and on other Navigable Waters ” to be as follows :— My method consists in fitting to the fore part of the bow of a ship a false bow or buffer, fitted to the end of a rod or rods, working through a stuffing 10 box or stuffing boxes in the,bow; the inner end of the rod or rods bears upon, or is otherwise connected to, springs, which are to be of such strength as to withstand the shock the vessel is likely to sustain should she come in collision with another vessel. My false bow or buffer is to be so constructed as not to interfere with the way of the ship, nor with the bowsprit nor rigging.2 A.D. 1854.—N° 2299. Specification Blake's Method of Preventing Collisions at Sea, .LIBRARY Of THE UNIVERSITY OF ILLINOISI ft §stf: ¥M' ■ H SSi "A: ;M’ :®1!' 2Siff#SIi ...' ..” '>^r^SS-'.v.<4-£^ .; -. .**.. -!/■■'■ ;* i j* -■; ••• ■ ■-> /1- ’■ ^1 • ■■ -*y o. - ■ - - -,t ^ - ■;:,^ .; MWlitiilfSlIltlK CV.‘iv" ■'■;■ ' . .j;' ■ V ■ V'.'A, "X .. : ,' v \ " ... if.' ,: • ■" y ,1K,i tern. . : ■■ - ■'■ . v.- r ........... ,;ftSft: